AM2020-AFP1010 Installation Programming Operating

Fire Alarm Control Panel
AM2020/AFP1010
Document 15088 10/22/99 Rev:

P/N 15088:J ECN
99-521
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Fire Alarm System Limitations

An automatic fire alarm systemtypically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control with remote notification capabilitycan provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors be located throughout a protected premise following the recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's recommendations, State and local codes, and the recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge to all installing dealers. A study by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of reasons: Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor or basement fire. Particles of combustion or "smoke" from a developing fire may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because: Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, or chimneys may inhibit particle or smoke flow. Smoke particles may become "cold," stratify, and not reach the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air outlets. Smoke detectors may be drawn into air returns before reaching the detector. The amount of "smoke" present may be insufficient to alarm smoke detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels of smoke density. If such density levels are not created by a developing fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into alarm. Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limitations. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little visible smoke. Detectors that have ionizing-type sensing chambers tend to detect fast-flaming fires better than smoldering fires. Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire. Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, etc.).
While a fire alarm system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for fire insurance!
Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect property, not life. IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, signaling, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire may damage the alarm system, crippling its ability to report a fire. Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs, alcohol or medication. Please note that: Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in people with conditions such as epilepsy. Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a fire alarm signal, do not respond or comprehend the meaning of the signal. It is the property owner's responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training exercise to make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals. In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause temporary or permanent hearing loss. A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly maintained and replaced regularly. Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control. It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your control panel. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled. For added protection against telephone line failure, backup radio transmission systems are recommended. The most common cause of fire alarm malfunction is inadequate maintenance. To keep the entire fire alarm system in excellent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA standards. At a minimum, the requirements of Chapter 7 of NFPA 72 shall be followed. Environments with large amounts of dust, dirt or high air velocity require more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be arranged through the local manufacturer's representative. Maintenance should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/ or local fire codes and should be performed by authorized professional fire alarm installers only. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept.
LimWarLg.p65
01/10/2000
Installation Precautions
WARNING - Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. CAUTION - System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes. To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified. This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49 C/32-120 F and at a relative humidity of 85% RH (noncondensing) at 30 C/86 F. However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and all peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27 C/60-80 F. Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device voltage.
Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability:
Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning-induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Services Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, transformer, and printed circuit board location. Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over-tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. Though designed to last many years, system components can fail at any time. This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static-suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation by authorized personnel.
FCC Warning
WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Canadian Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada.
LimWarLg.p65
01/10/2000
TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter One Installation

Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
Capabilities and Capacities ................................................................................................................... 1-3 Fire Alarm and Related Service Standards ........................................................................................... 1-4
Section One
Installation Overview ............................................................................ 1-5
Section 1.1 Basic Equipment .......................................................................................................... 1-5 Section 1.2 Related Documentation ................................................................................................ 1-5 Table 1.2-1 AM2020/AFP1010 Related Documentation ..................................................................... 1-6
Section Two
Cabinets ................................................................................................ 1-7
Section 2.1 Mounting the Backbox ................................................................................................. 1-8 Figure 2.1-1 Cabinet Backbox Mount ................................................................................................. 1-8 Section 2.2 CAB-3 Series Backboxes ............................................................................................ 1-11 Section 2.3 Mounting the ICA-4L ................................................................................................... 1-13 Figure 2.3-1 ICA-4L 16 Position Receptacle Connections ................................................................ 1-13 Figure 2.3-2 Expansion Power Cable Part Number 75378 ................................................................ 1-13 Figure 2.3-3 Connecting Two ICA-4Ls .............................................................................................. 1-14 Figure 2.3-4 Power Cable Part Number 75379 .................................................................................. 1-15 Figure 2.3-5 15 Position Receptacle Connections ............................................................................ 1-15 Figure 2.3-6 Cable Part Number 75142 ............................................................................................. 1-16 Figure 2.3-7 Cable Part Number 75142 Connected to the ICA-4L ..................................................... 1-16 Figure 2.3-8 Mount System Boards to the ICA-4L Chassis .............................................................. 1-17 Section 2.4 Component Placement ............................................................................................... 1-18 Table 2.4-1 Cabinet Size Information .............................................................................................. 1-18 Figure 2.4-1 Component Placement Guidelines ................................................................................ 1-18 Figure 2.4-2 AFP1010 LIB SLC Numbering Scheme ........................................................................ 1-19 Figure 2.4-3 LIB SLC Numbering Scheme ........................................................................................ 1-20 Figure 2.4-4 LIB-400 Placement in an AFP1010 ............................................................................... 1-21 Figure 2.4-5 LIB Placement Example in an AFP1010 ....................................................................... 1-22 Figure 2.4-6 LIB-400 Placement in an AM2020 ................................................................................ 1-23 Figure 2.4-7 LIB Placement Example in an AM2020 ........................................................................ 1-24 Section 2.5 Optional Chassis Mounting ....................................................................................... 1-25 Figure 2.5-1 Optional Chassis Mount ............................................................................................... 1-25 Section 2.6 Other Components ..................................................................................................... 1-26 Figure 2.6-1 Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm System ................................................................ 1-26 Section 2.7 Display Interface Connection ..................................................................................... 1-27 Figure 2.7-1 Display Interface Assembly .......................................................................................... 1-27 Figure 2.7-2 Wiring Placement Diagram ........................................................................................... 1-28 Figure 2.7-3 Power-Limited and Non Power-Limited Wiring .............................................................. `1-29 Figure 2.7-4 Dress Panel Placement Diagram .................................................................................. 1-30 Section 2.8 Mounting the MOD-1 into the CHS-4 and CHS-4L Chassis ...................................... 1-31 Figure 2.8-1 Mounting the MOD-1 into the CHS-4 and CHS-4L Chassis ........................................... 1-32
Section Three Power Supplies ................................................................................... 1-33

Section 3.1 Table 3.1-1 Table 3.1-2 Section 3.2 Table 3.2-1 Table 3.2-1 Table 3.2-2 The AC Primary Power Input ..................................................................................... 1-33 120 VAC Fire Alarm Circuit .......................................................................................... 1-33 220/240 VAC Fire Alarm Circuit .................................................................................... 1-33 The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply ..................................................... 1-33 AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculations (1 of 2) ..................................... 1-35 AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculations (2 of 2) ..................................... 1-36 Maximum Secondary Power Fire Alarm Current Draw .................................................. 1-37
iv
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99
CHAPTER ONE INSTALLATION (CONTINUED)

Table 3.2-3 Secondary Power Standby and Fire Alarm Load ........................................................... 1-37 Table 3.2-4 Battery Size Requirements ........................................................................................... 1-38 Figure 3.2-1 Mount the Main Power Supply ...................................................................................... 1-39 Section 3.2.1 The MPS-TR Main Power Supply .............................................................................. 1-40 Figure 3.2.1-1 Threading the Screws ................................................................................................... 1-40 Figure 3.2.1-2 Mounting the MPS-TR .................................................................................................. 1-41 Figure 3.2.1-3 System Common Terminal Connection ........................................................................ 1-41 Section 3.3 Connecting the Main Power Supply .......................................................................... 1-42 Table 3.3-1 MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply Loads ..................................................... 1-43 Figure 3.3-1 Field Wiring the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Power Supply ............................................... 1-44 Section 3.4 The Optional Main Power Meter ................................................................................ 1-45 Figure 3.4-1 Installation of the Main Power Meter ............................................................................ 1-45 Section 3.5 The CHG-120 Remote Battery Charger ....................................................................... 1-46 Figure 3.5-1 CHG-120 Installation into CAB-3 Series (3.6-1a) and BB-55 (3.6-1b) Cabinets ............. 1-46 Figure 3.5-2 CHG-120 Connections .................................................................................................. 1-46 Section 3.6 The APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply ........................................................................ 1-47 Figure 3.6-1 Mounting the APS-6R to a Chassis .............................................................................. 1-48 Figure 3.6-2 Cover Installations ........................................................................................................ 1-48 Figure 3.6-3 Typical APS-6R Wiring ................................................................................................. 1-48 Figure 3.6-4 Trouble Bus Connections for Multiple APS-6R Power Supply Configurations ............... 1-49 Section 3.7 The Central Processing Unit (CPU-2020, CPU-2) ...................................................... 1-50 Figure 3.7-1 CPU Alarm and Trouble Contacts ................................................................................. 1-50
Section Four
Section 4.1 Section 4.2 Figure 4.2-1 Figure 4.2-2 Figure 4.2-3 Section 4.3 Figure 4.3-1 Figure 4.3-2 Figure 4.3-3 Figure 4.3-4 Figure 4.3-5 Section 4.4 Figure 4.4-1 Figure 4.4-2 Figure 4.4-2 Section 4.5 Figure 4.5-1 Figure 4.5-2 Figure 4.5-3 Section 4.6 Figure 4.6-1 Figure 4.6-2 Figure 4.6-3 Figure 4.6-4 Figure 4.6-5 Figure 4.6-6
Signaling ............................................................................................. 1-51

The LIB Signaling Line Circuit .................................................................................. 1-51 The Loop Interface Boards (LIB-200, LIB-200A, and LIB-400) .................................. 1-52 The LIB-200 .................................................................................................................. 1-52 Loop Interface Boards .................................................................................................. 1-54 Surge Suppressor/FACP Connections .......................................................................... 1-55 LIB SLC Loop Wiring Requirements ......................................................................... 1-56 SLC Loop Wiring Requirements (Style 4) ...................................................................... 1-56 SLC Loop Wiring Requirements (Style 6) ...................................................................... 1-57 Typical NFPA Style 4 SLC Loops ................................................................................ 1-58 NFPA Style 6 LIB SLC Loop ........................................................................................ 1-59 NFPA Style 7 SLC ........................................................................................................ 1-60 SLC Loop Shield Termination (Optional) ................................................................. 1-61 Shield Termination in No Conduit .................................................................................. 1-61 Shield Termination in Full conduit (LIB-200 only) .......................................................... 1-61 Shield Termination in Partial Conduit (LIB-200 only) ..................................................... 1-62 The Isolator Module .................................................................................................... 1-63 The Loop Isolator Module (ISO-X) ................................................................................ 1-63 Isolating a Branch of a Style 4 SLC Loop ..................................................................... 1-63 Isolating the Remainder of a Style 4 SLC Loop ............................................................ 1-63 Monitor Modules ......................................................................................................... 1-65 MMX-1 or MMX-2 Monitor Modules .............................................................................. 1-65 MMX-101 Monitor Module ............................................................................................. 1-65 NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit .......................................................................... 1-66 NFPA Style D Initiating Device Circuit .......................................................................... 1-67 Employing Four-Wire Smoke Detectors (Style B IDC) .................................................. 1-68 Employing Four-Wire Smoke Detectors (Style D IDC) .................................................. 1-69
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99
CHAPTER ONE INSTALLATION (CONTINUED)

Section 4.7 Figure 4.7-1 Figure 4.7-2 Figure 4.7-3 Figure 4.7-4 Figure 4.7-5 Figure 4.7-6 Figure 4.7-7 Section 4.8 Figure 4.8-1 Figure 4.8-2 Section 4.9 Section 4.10 Figure 4.10-1 Figure 4.10-2 Figure 4.10-3 Figure 4.10-4 Section 4.11 Figure 4.11-1 The Control Module .................................................................................................... 1-70 The CMX Control Module .............................................................................................. 1-70 Providing Power to Control Modules ............................................................................. 1-71 Power Distribution ......................................................................................................... 1-72 NFPA Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit ................................................................ 1-73 NFPA Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit ................................................................. 1-74 Using the CMX as a Form-C Relay ............................................................................... 1-75 Typical APS-6R Wiring to a CMX Module ..................................................................... 1-75 The Addressable Manual Pull Station ....................................................................... 1-76 Addressable Manual Pull Station .................................................................................. 1-76 Wiring Addressable Pull Stations .................................................................................. 1-76 Intelligent Detectors .................................................................................................... 1-77 Smoke Detector Installation ....................................................................................... 1-78 Wiring the Smoke Detector Base .................................................................................. 1-78 Wiring the B524BI Isolator Base ................................................................................... 1-79 Wiring the B524RB Relay Base .................................................................................... 1-79 Typical SLC Loop (Style 4) ........................................................................................... 1-80 The XP Series Transponder ....................................................................................... 1-81 XP Dress Panel and XPP-1 Module ............................................................................. 1-81
Section Five
Serial Communications ...................................................................... 1-83
Section 5.1 Optional Serial Interface Boards ............................................................................... 1-83 Figure 5.1-1 Male DB-25 Connector .................................................................................................. 1-83 Figure 5.1-2 Guidelines for Terminating the Shield ........................................................................... 1-84 Figure 5.1-3 SIB-NET/SIB-2048A Terminal Designations ................................................................. 1-85 Section 5.2 The CRT-2 Terminal .................................................................................................... 1-86 Figure 5.2-1 CRT to SIB Connections .............................................................................................. 1-87 Section 5.3 Remote Printers .......................................................................................................... 1-88 Figure 5.3-1 Remote Printer to SIB Connections .............................................................................. 1-88 Figure 5.3-2 Keltron Printer Connections .......................................................................................... 1-89 Section 5.4 Annunciator Modules ................................................................................................. 1-90 Figure 5.4-1 EIA-485 to SIB Connections ......................................................................................... 1-91
Section Six
Standard-Specific Requirements ...................................................... 1-92
Section 6.1 NFPA 72-1993 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems ............................................................ 1-94 Figure 6.1-1 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System (Fire Alarm Signal Transmission) .................................... 1-94 Section 6.2 Generating Event-Pending Signals at a Remote Location ....................................... 1-95 Section 6.3 Supervising an Uninterruptable Power Supply ........................................................ 1-96 Figure 6.3-1 Uninterruptable Power Supply ....................................................................................... 1-96 Section 6.4 NFPA 72-1993 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems ........................................................ 1-97 Table 6.4-1 NIB-96 (Minimal Configuration) ..................................................................................... 1-97 Figure 6.4-1 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems ................................................................................... 1-98 Figure 6.4-2 NFPA 72-1993 Proprietary and Central Station Protected Premises Unit/ Proprietary and Central Station Receiving Unit Interface .............................................. 1-99 Section 6.5 Applying/Removing Power to the Fire Alarm System ........................................... 1-100
vi
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99
Chapter Two Operation

Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 2-2 Section One The Display Interface Assembly ......................................................... 2-8
Section 1.1 Section 1.2 Normal Operation ........................................................................................................ 2-8 Read Status ................................................................................................................ 2-10 Display System Configuration .................................................................................. 2-11 Point Read .................................................................................................................. 2-14 Special Status ............................................................................................................ 2-16
Section Two
Prior/Next/Auto Step .......................................................................... 2-17
Section Three Special Function ................................................................................. 2-18

Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Reports ....................................................................................................................... 2-18 AM2020/AFP1010 Special Function Report Printout .................................................. 2-19 The History Buffer ..................................................................................................... 2-20 AM2020/AFP1010 Special Function History Buffer Printout ...................................... 2-21
Section Four
Section 4.1
Fire Alarms ......................................................................................... 2-22

Acknowledging a Fire Alarm .................................................................................... 2-23
Section Five
Section 5.1 Section 5.2 Section 5.3 Section 5.4 Section 5.5 Section 5.5A Section 5.6
Troubles .............................................................................................. 2-24

Trouble...with SLC Loop Devices ............................................................................. 2-24 Trouble...with Disabled Zones .................................................................................. 2-25 Trouble...with the AM2020/AFP1010 System .......................................................... 2-26 Trouble...with the Annunciators .............................................................................. 2-26 Block Acknowledge ................................................................................................... 2-27 Acknowledging Troubles in Receiving Unit Mode ................................................. 2-28 Displaying Current Alarms and Troubles ................................................................ 2-28
Section Six
Remote Peripherals ............................................................................ 2-29
Section Seven Trouble Messages .............................................................................. 2-30 Section Eight Drift Compensation ............................................................................ 2-32
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99
vii
Chapter Three Programming

Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3-3 The Initial Programming Outline ................................................................................... 3-5 Section One
Figure 1-1 Section 1.1 Figure 1-2 Section 1.1.1 Section 1.1.2 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-4 Section 1.1.3 Figure 1-5 Section 1.1.4 Section 1.1.5 Section 1.1.6 Figure 1-6 Section 1.1.7 Figure 1-7 Table 1-1 Section 1.1.8 Figure 1-8 Section 1.1.9 Figure 1-9 Section 1.2 Section 1.3 Figure 1-10 Section 1.3.1 Section 1.3.2 Section 1.3.3 Section 1.3.4 Figure 1-11 Section 1.3.5 Figure 1-12 Section 1.3.6 Section 1.4 Figure 1-13 Section 1.5 Section 1.6 Section 1.7 Section 1.8 Figure 1-14
Main Programming ............................................................................... 3-7

Main Programming Menu Flow Chart ............................................................................ 3-8 Partial System Programming ..................................................................................... 3-9 Partial System Programming Submenu Flow Chart .................................................... 3-10 LIB Installation ........................................................................................................... 3-11 LIB SLC Loop Style .................................................................................................... 3-11 Install Option Flow Chart ............................................................................................. 3-11 Style Option Flow Chart .............................................................................................. 3-11 Time Delays ................................................................................................................ 3-12 Time Delay Option Flow Chart .................................................................................... 3-12 Enabling the Trouble Bus .......................................................................................... 3-13 Zone Boundary ........................................................................................................... 3-13 External Equipment .................................................................................................... 3-14 External Equipment Option Flow Chart ......................................................................... 3-15 Local Parameters ........................................................................................................ 3-18 Local Parameter Option Flow Chart .............................................................................. 3-18 Extended Local Mode Categories and Software Type I.D.s .......................................... 3-20 Intelligent Serial Interface Board Programming ....................................................... 3-22 Intelligent Serial Interface Board Option Flow Chart ..................................................... 3-22 Additional System Parameters .................................................................................. 3-25 Additional System Parameters Option Flow Chart ........................................................ 3-25 Full System Programming ......................................................................................... 3-28 Partial Point Programming ........................................................................................ 3-30 Partial Point Programming Flow Chart .......................................................................... 3-31 Type I.D. ...................................................................................................................... 3-31 Control-By-Event ......................................................................................................... 3-32 Label ............................................................................................................................ 3-32 Optional Features ....................................................................................................... 3-33 Optional Features Flow Chart ....................................................................................... 3-33 Annunciator Mapping ................................................................................................. 3-34 Annunciator Mapping Option Flow Chart ....................................................................... 3-34 Cooperative Control-By-Event ................................................................................... 3-35 Full Point Programming ............................................................................................ 3-36 Full Point Programming Flow Chart .............................................................................. 3-36 Remove ........................................................................................................................ 3-39 Password ..................................................................................................................... 3-39 Message ....................................................................................................................... 3-39 History Mode ............................................................................................................... 3-40 History Buffer Option Flow Chart .................................................................................. 3-40
Section Two The Alter Status Menu ........................................................................... 3-43

Figure 2-1 Section 2.1 Section 2.2 Section 2.3 Section 2.4 Section 2.5 Section 2.6 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Section 2.7 viii Alter Status Menu Flow Chart ..................................................................................... 3-44 Disable Point .............................................................................................................. 3-44 Control Module .......................................................................................................... 3-45 Detector Sensitivity ................................................................................................... 3-45 Time ............................................................................................................................. 3-45 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................. 3-46 Walk Test .................................................................................................................... 3-46 Walk Test Option Flow Chart ...................................................................................... 3-47 Printout of an AM2020/AFP1010 Walk Test Report .................................................... 3-50 Group Zone Disable ................................................................................................... 3-51
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99
Section Three Software Type I.D.s ............................................................................. 3-52 Section Four

Section 4.1 Section 4.2 Section 4.3 Section 4.4 Section 4.5 Section 4.6
Control-by-Event Programming ........................................................ 3-59

Control-By-Event Programming ................................................................................ 3-59 Operators .................................................................................................................... 3-61 Size Limitations .......................................................................................................... 3-65 Cooperative Control-By-Event ................................................................................... 3-67 The Null Control-By-Event ......................................................................................... 3-67 Programming Examples ............................................................................................ 3-68
Section Five
Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation .............................................................. 3-72
CHAPTER FOUR SECURITY

Section One
Section 1.1 Section 1.2 Section 1.3 Table 1.3-1 Table 1.3-2 Table 1.3-3 Table 1.3-4 Figure 1.3-1 Figure 1.3-2 Figure 1.3-3 Figure 1.3-4 Figure 1.3-5 Figure 1.3-6 Figure 1.3-7 Figure 1.3-8 Figure 1.3-9 Figure 1.3-10 Figure 1.3-11 Figure 1.3-12 Figure 1.3-13 Figure 1.3-14 Figure 1.3-15 Figure 1.3-16
Installing and Programming Combination Fire/Security FireAlarm Systems ...... 4-3

Introduction .................................................................................................................. 4-3 General Security Requirements ................................................................................... 4-3 Security Configuration - Specific Requirements ........................................................ 4-4 Building Perimeter Security Devices .............................................................................. 4-4 Interior Space Security Devices ..................................................................................... 4-5 Zone numbers - One Set of Zones ................................................................................. 4-6 Zone Numbers - Two Sets of Zones ............................................................................... 6-4 Simplest Security System .............................................................................................. 4-7 Multiple Tenant Simple Security System ........................................................................ 4-8 Multiple Tenant Simple Security System ........................................................................ 4-9 Single Tenant Consolidated Security System ............................................................... 4-10 Multiple Tenant consolidated Security System ............................................................. 4-12 Single Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay .................................................. 4-13 Connecting an MMX-101 Module to the RKS-S ............................................................ 4-16 Connecting an MMX-1 to the RKS-S ............................................................................ 4-16 Multiple Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay ................................................ 4-17 Single Tenant Security System with Ringback ............................................................. 4-19 CMX Control Module for Ringback ................................................................................ 4-26 Installing an STS-1 Security Tamper Switch ................................................................ 4-26 Connecting an STS-1 Switch to an MMX-101 Monitor Module ..................................... 4-27 Connecting an STS-1 Switch to an MMX-1 Monitor Module ......................................... 4-27 Multiple Tenant with Security System for Ringback ..................................................... 4-28 System Requirements .................................................................................................. 4-29
APPENDICES
Appendix A
Section A.1 Table A-1 Table A-2
Circuit/Device Ratings ........................................................................ A-3

Design Considerations ................................................................................................ A-3 Wiring Selection Chart ................................................................................................... A-3 Circuit Ratings/Connections .......................................................................................... A-4
Appendix B
Section B.1 Section B.2 Section B.3 Section B.4 Section B.5 Section B.6
Listed Equipment ................................................................................ B-1

Underwriter's Laboratories .......................................................................................... Factory Mutual ............................................................................................................. Lloyd's Register ........................................................................................................... United States Coast Guard .......................................................................................... Optional System Components .................................................................................... City of New York .......................................................................................................... B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6
PROGRAMMING SHEETS & GLOSSARY

Programming Sheets ..................................................................................................... G-2 Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations .......................................................................... G-6
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99
ix
Notes
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99
AM2020 AFP1010
Chapter One Installation
Installation 15088: J 10/22/99
1-1
1-2
Installation 15088:J
10/22/99
Capabilities and Capacities
Introduction
The AM2020/AFP1010 is an Intelligent Analog Addressable Combination Fire Alarm/Security Control Panel capable of supporting the following: Intelligent Analog Addressable Fire Detectors Photoelectric, ionization, and thermal (heat) detectors. Intelligent Addressable Fire and Security Initiating Devices Pull Stations and modules that monitor any conventional normally open contact type devices (4-wire smoke detectors, heat detectors, pull stations, supervisory switches, water flow switches), 2-wire conventional smoke detectors or any normally closed contact type device, such as a door contact that may be used in security applications. Intelligent Addressable Notification Devices and Addressable Control Relays Modules that can supervise and switch power to notification appliances or serve as Form-C control relays. Notification Appliance Power Notification appliance power is provided by the main power supply. Additional notification appliance power may be provided by optional power supplies listed for fire protective signaling. Voice Evacuation Functions Prerecorded or live voice alarm messages can be dispatched through an audio message generator. A fire fighter's master telephone unit allows communication between the control panel and fire fighter's telephones installed throughout the system. Audio Amplifier Power Audio power is provided by several sizes of audio amplifiers for use in voice alarm applications. Peripherals An AM2020/AFP1010 system can support remotely-mounted video display units, printers, and serial annunciators. AM2020 Maximum Intelligent Addressable Device Capacity (10 LIB-200/LIB-200A or five LIB-400 modules) + = 990 990 1980 Intelligent photoelectric, ionization, and thermal (heat) detectors. Addressable pull stations, monitor modules, control modules and XP Transponder circuits. Addressable devices system wide.
AFP1010 Maximum Intelligent Addressable Device Capacity (four LIB-200/LIB-200A or two LIB-400 modules) + = 396 396 792 Intelligent photoelectric, ionization, and thermal (heat) detectors. Addressable pull stations, monitor modules, control modules and XP Transponder circuits. Addressable devices system wide.
TE R M PART NUMBER PRN-4, PRN-5 CRT-2 MMX-1, MMX-101, MMX-2 CMX-1 or CMX-2 PRN CRT MMX CMX
To the right are general terms and their associated specific part numbers as referenced in this manual:
Note: The term "loop" is used in a general way throughout this document and does not necessarily mean that the circuit is a Class A configuration, unless a reference is made to Style 6, Style 7, Style D or Style Z circuit performance.
1-3
Fire Alarm and Related Service Standards

It is imperative the installer understand the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and review the following documents for applicability: NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA 92A Smoke Control Systems NFPA 92B Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, Large Areas UL 916 Energy Management Systems UL1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems UL 1459 Surge Suppressor Device Compatibility UL1610 Central Station Burglar Alarm Units CAN/ULC - S527 - M87 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems EIA-232E Serial Interface Standard EIA-485 Serial Interface Standard NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station UL 228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances CAN/ULC - S524 - M91 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems Applicable local and state building codes
1-4
10/22/99
Section One Installation Overview

Section 1.1 Basic Equipment
The basic equipment package for the Notifier AM2020 is the BE-2020N and the basic equipment package for the Notifier AFP1010 is the BE-1010N. The following list may be used to identify the components provided in a BE-2020N and/or BE-1010N shipment. Refer to Appendix B of this manual for an optional equipment listing. Cables: MPS/ICA Power Cable (75378) CPU/MPS Supervisory Cable (71031) BP-3 Battery Dress Panel CPU-2020 (BE-2020N) or CPU-2 (BE-1010N) Central Processor Unit DIA-1010 or DIA-2020 Display Interface Assembly CPU to DIB Cable (75226) ICA-4L Interconnect Chassis Assemblies Refer to Section Six, Standard Specific Requirements, for minimum system equipment requirements.
Section 1.2 Related Documentation

To obtain a complete understanding of specific features within the AM2020/AFP1010 or to become familiar with functions in general, make use of the documentation noted in Table 1.2-1. VeriFire is a Windows 95/98 based software program which provides an off-line programming and test utility designed to reduce installation programming time. The Notifier Document chart (DOC-NOT) provides the current document revision. A copy of this document is included with each shipment of Notifier products.
1-5
TITLE AM2020/AFP1010 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD-80) N ETWORK CONTROL STATION INTELLIGENT N ETWORK ANNUNCIATOR (INA) UNIVERSAL Z ONE CODER INSTALLATION (UZC-256) PRODUCT INSTALLATION DOCUMENT (CCM-1) PRODUCT INSTALLATION DOCUMENT (MPS-TR) AM2020/AFP1010 OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS NOTIFIER DEVICE COMPATIBILITY DOCUMENT ANALOG FIRE PANEL (AFP-200) CANADIAN R EQUIREMENTS FOR AM2020/AFP1010
THE
NUMBER 15088 15037 51095 15092 15216 15328 15331 15337 15378 15511 15631 15666 15712 50253/50259/ 50260 51118 50702 51138 51093
TITLE ANNUNCIATOR CONTROL SYSTEM L AMP DRIVER MODULES (LDM) VOICE ALARM MULTIPLEX THE XP SERIES TRANSPONDER SYSTEM NETWORK ADAPTOR MODULE (NAM-232) THE UDACT UNIVERSAL DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR/TRANSMITTER FCPS-24/FCPS-24E FIELD CHARGER/POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND APPLICATION MANUAL VIDEO GRAPHICS ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM (VGAS) INSTALLATION MANUAL MEDIA INTERFACE BOARD (MIB) REPEATER (RPT) NOTI-FIRE-NETTM TELEPHONE/PANEL INTERFACE (TPI-232) AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM WARDEN STATION SERIES PRODUCT INSTALLATION DRAWING MMX-2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CHG-120 BATTERY CHARGER XP5 SERIES TRANSPONDERS VEC 25/50 VOICE EVACUATION CONTROLPANEL
NUMBER 15842 15885 15889 15888 50038 50050 50059 50251 50255 50256 50257 50372 50705 M500-03-00 50641 50786 50686
N ETWORK INTERFACE B OARD (NIB-96) SMOKE CONTROL MANUAL ANALOG FIRE PANEL (AFP-300/AFP-400) ACT-2 AUDIO COUPLING TRANSFORMER APS-6R AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY RM-1 SERIES REMOTE MICROPHONES NBG-12LX PULL STATION
allndocs.tbl 11/30/99
Table 1.2-1 Related Documentation
1-6
10/22/99
General
Section Two Cabinet Selection and Component Installation
The cabinet assembly consists of two basic components; the backbox (SBB) and door (DR). All cabinets for the AM2020/AFP1010 are fabricated from 16-gauge steel. Cabinet parts are painted Notifier gray or red with navy blue windows. Provided with the key-locked door are a pin-type hinge, window, two keys, and the necessary hardware to mount the door to the backbox. The backbox has been engineered to provide ease-of-entry, with knockouts positioned at numerous points to simplify conduit installation. The hinges are field-selectable for either left or right mounting. The door opens 180 degrees. Product Line Information Cabinets are available in sizes A through D. The cabinets are identified by product codes CAB-A3 for the smallest enclosure through CAB-D3 for the largest. A trim ring (TR) option is available for semi-flush mounting (TR-A3, TR-B3, TR-C3, TR-D3). A wire channel (WC) option provides a pair of wire trays to neatly route wire between rows in the cabinet. Order one pair per cabinet row. Prior To Installation The doors may be mounted in either a left or right opening configuration; aiding in installation and service when two control panels are mounted in a confined area or side-by-side (as shown). In this manner the doors may be opened "barn door" style, creating an open work space. Note that in this type of installation it is necessary to leave enough space between cabinets to insert a key into the locks on the door frames. Left Mount On a left mounted door, the Display Interface Assembly (DIA) dress panel cannot be opened when the door is at less than a 120 degree angle to the cabinet. If you are using the left mounting option, be sure that the door can open at least 120 degrees. This is especially important if the cabinet is to be mounted in a closed area, such as a closet or utility room. NOTE The two hinges and the two alignment tabs should be attached to the backbox before any equipment is mounted in the backbox. See the Door Assembly Instructions section.
Left Mounted Door Right Mounted Door
1-7
Section 2.1 Mounting the Backbox

The cabinet may be either surface mounted or semi-flush mounted (refer to Figure 2.1-1). Mount the cabinet in a clean, dry, vibration-free area, using the four holes provided in the back surface of the backbox. Locate the cabinet so that the top edge is 66 inches (168 cm) above the surface of the finished floor. This procedure places the center of the control panel keypad 60 inches (152 cm) above the finished floor.
Mounting Holes
Figure 2.1-1 Cabinet Backbox Mount

CAUTION!
Unless you are familiar with the placement of components within this backbox, use only the knockout locations provided for conduit entry. Do not allow any conduit entry at the bottom of the panel where the batteries are to be mounted (see Figure 2.4-2).
1-8
10/22/99
Door Assembly Instructions Hinges can be either left or right mounted. The illustrations and text depict a left-mount example. For right mounting, simply substitute right for left in the instructions. 1) Insert door hinges (A) into the top and bottom slots of the side to be hinged (in this case the left side). Secure the hinges to the studs in the backbox with the nuts provided. Note that the small hole on the outer tab faces outward. 2) Thread stud (B) into the BOTTOM hinge first. Thread from the bottom up. Place the grounding star washer on the stud. Place the door's lower corner onto this stud. Placing the door on the lower stud first provides a place for the door to rest while completing the assembly. 3) Align the door on the backbox, so that the door sits directly under the top hinge. Thread remaining stud (B) into the TOP hinge and through the hole in the top of the door. The door should now swing freely.
Top Left Corner
B A
Small Hole Faces Outward
Bottom Left Corner
Star Washer B
1-9
4. Install the door alignment tabs (C) in the unused slots on the backbox (top and bottom). (In this example the door was mounted on the left, leaving the unused slots on the right). Secure alignment tab (C) to top PEM stud with nut provided. These tabs align the door correctly with the backbox and prevent the door from being "skewed" open. 5. Punch out the knockout for the door lock and install the snap-in lock mechanism by pressing it into the hole. Be sure to do this LAST, so you will be sure to knock out the correct side. CAUTION: The lock must be installed in locked position with the key removed. The installation picture below shows the proper lock position for a left-hand mounted cabinet door.
Top Right Corner
Left hinged door
Install Lock Here
Bottom Right Corner
Open
Locked
Locked
Open
The lock mechanism as viewed in a left-hinged mounting application. The lock would be placed in the right edge of the door.
1-10
The lock mechanism as viewed in a right-hinged mounting application. The lock would be placed in the left edge of the door.
Installation 15088:J 10/22/99
Section 2.2 CAB-3 Series Backboxes

CAB-A3 The CAB A-3 is the cabinet and door assembly for one mounting row. An optional TR-A3 trim ring is available for use with the A-size cabinet, which is 24.125 inches wide by 20.125 inches high (612.775 mm wide by 511.175 mm high). The following replacement parts are available: DR-A3 door SBB-A3 backbox
CAB-C3 The CAB-C3 is the cabinet and door assembly for three mounting rows. An optional TR-C3 trim ring is available for use with the C-size cabinet, which is 24.125 inches wide by 37.250 inches high (612.775 mm wide by 946.15 mm high). The following replacement parts are available: DR-C3 door SBB-C3 backbox
1-11
CAB-B3 The CAB-B3 is the cabinet and door assembly for two mounting rows. An optional TR-B3 trim ring is available for use with the B-size cabinet, which is 24.125 inches wide by 28.625 inches high (612.775 mm wide by 727.075 mm high). The following replacement parts are available: DR-B3 door SBB-B3 backbox
CAB-D3 The CAB-D3 cabinet and door assembly for four mounting rows. An optional TR-D3 trim ring is available for use with the D-size cabinet, which is 24.125 inches wide by 48.875 inches high (612.775 mm wide by 1165.225 mm high). The following replacement parts are available: DR-D3 door SBB-D3 backbox
1-12
10/22/99
Section 2.3 Mounting the ICA-4L

The AM2020/AFP1010 system may use one to three Interconnect Chassis Assemblies (ICA), depending on the specific installation requirements. The AFP1010 requires only one ICA when using LIB-400s. The ICA-4L is a low profile mounting chassis that currently replaces the ICA-4 in all BE-1010N and BE-2020N basic equipment kits. The ICA-4L is compatible with both CAB-2 and CAB-3 cabinets and the ICA-4 chassis. The ICA-4L is required when employing the LIB-400 local mode general alarm bus (refer to The Loop Interface Boards, Section 4.2 of this chapter). When using more than one ICA-4L, interconnect each ICA-4L before mounting it to the backbox by mating the male connector on one chassis to the female connector on the other (no cable is required). Align all ICA-4L Assemblies over the studs in the backbox. Connect chassis grounding cable, part number 71073 for each board to be installed on the ICA-4L to an ICA-4L stud. Secure the assemblies and cables with the nuts and washers provided. Each ICA-4L is marked with "TOP" for proper orientation. The ICA-4L is recommended when installing the SIB-2048A, SIB-NET, LIB-200A, or LIB-400 because a 16position receptacle is mated with a 16-pin plug. The LIB-400 is used to illustrate this in Figure 2.3-1.
LIB-400
Figure 2.3-1 ICA-4L 16 Position Receptacle Connections

The power cable part number 75378, (refer to Figure 2.3-2) is able to mate properly with the ICA-4L since it has a 16 position receptacle. The power cable also has an 8-position receptacle to connect to the main power supply (refer to Figure 2.3-3).
59 in. (149.86 cm) - expands to fit a CAB-D3 size cabinet
Figure 2.3-2 Power Cable Part Number 75378

1-13
OPTIONAL
Figure 2.3-3 Using the Optional Expansion Power Cable
1-14
10/22/99
Expansion power cable part number 75379 (Figure 2.3-4), is able to mate properly with the ICA-4L since it consists of a 16-pin plug and a 16-position receptacle (Figure 2.3-3). Note: Only one power expansion cable is needed per system.
OPTIONAL
36 in. (91.44 cm) - expands to fit up to a CAB-D3 size cabinet
Figure 2.3-4 Expansion Power Cable Part Number 75379
Any board with a 15-position receptacle suitable for use on the ICA-4 may also be mounted on the 16-pin plug ICA-4L. The following nine boards have 15-position receptacles and may be installed on the ICA-4L: CPU-2 CPU-2020 SIB-64 SIB-232 CCM-1 SIB-2048 LIB-200 UZC-256 NIB-96
When installing any board consisting of 15-position receptacles on the 16-pin plug ICA-4L, only pins one through 15 will engage. The 16th pin will remain on the outside of the board receptacle (refer to Figure 2.3-5). A 16-position ICA-4L is required for local mode general alarm bus operation (refer to The Loop Interface Boards, Section 4.2 of this manual).
Figure 2.3-5 ICA-4L 15 Position Receptacle Connections
1-15
Although cable part number 75142 consists of a 15-pin plug and a 15-position receptacle (Figure 2.3-6) it can still be mated on the 16-pin plug ICA-4L, only pins one through 15 will engage. The 16th pin will remain on the outside of the board receptacle (Figure 2.3-7).
36 in. (91.44 cm) - expands to fit up to a CAB-D3 size cabinet
Figure 2.3-6 Cable Part Number 75142
Figure 2.3-7 Cable Part Number 75142 Connected to the ICA-4L

Figure 2.3-8 illustrates the installation of a LIB-200, LIB-200A, and/or LIB-400 module in the back right position of an Interconnect Chassis Assembly (behind the CPU, which is installed later). Installation of boards in the remaining ICA-4L positions involve a similar procedure.
1-16
10/22/99
Figure 2.3-8 Mount System Boards to the ICA-4L Chassis

Step 1 Place the board in front of the Interconnect Chassis Assemblies (ICA-4L) in the position where it will be installed. Tilt the board into the ICA-4L and align the square slots on the board with the first set of four tabs on the ICA-4L as illustrated.
Step 2 Carefully push the board back to the first level and then slide it away from the ICA-4L, until it is directly over the second set of four tabs, now located immediately behind the printed circuit board.
Step 3 Push the board back again to the second level and then slide it away from the ICA-4L until it is directly over the third set of four tabs, now located immediately behind the printed circuit board.
Step 4 Now push the board back so that it is resting on the four tabs behind the board. Slide the board inward toward the center of the ICA-4L and carefully engage the female connector on the board with the male connector on the ICA-4L. When the board is correctly seated, it will be stopped by a mechanical tab. Some force is required. Before applying force, carefully check alignment of all pins. When finished, the board should be seated in a channel consisting of four retaining tabs in front of the printed circuit board and four retaining tabs behind the printed circuit board.
CAUTION Remove Serial Interface Boards (SIBs) carefully, as the metal tabs on the ICA-4L may shear off some of the SIB components. NOTE For installation of system boards in the first level of the ICA-4L, omit Steps 2 and 3.
1-17
Section 2.4 Component Placement

Each component in the system has a specific mounting position in the cabinet. Mount any optional APS-6R power supplies and amplifiers in CHS-4/4L chassis positions A through D as required. It is recommended that the CHS-4/4L chassis always be installed in the lowest cabinet row available (refer to Table 2.4-1).
CABINET MODELS CAB-A3 CAB-B3 CAB-C3 CAB-D3
CABINET ROWS 1 2 3 4
Table 2.4-1 Cabinet Size Information

Optional component placement guidelines are provided in Figure 2.4-1.
NIB-96 (Power-limited) Mounts in any one LIB position or any two CHS-4/4L positions.
UZC-256 (Power-limited) Mounts in any one LIB position or any two CHS-4/4L positions.
CCM-1 (Power-limited) Mounts in any one LIB position or any two CHS-4/4L positions.
NAM-232 (Power-limited) Mounts in either the left or right position of a CHS-4 by using four PEM studs on the CHS-4 chassis.
Figure 2.4-1 Component Placement Guidelines

1-18
Figure 2.4-2 depicts the LIB SLC numbering scheme for an AFP1010 in a CAB-B3 cabinet. If a CAB-A3 cabinet is used with LIB-400 modules exclusively, it may house a maximum four loop AFP1010 system (refer to Figure 2.4-4). One or two ICA-4L or ICA-4 chassis are required to mount the LIB modules depending upon the number and type of LIB modules employed. Refer to Figure 2.4-3 as an example of AM2020 applications. NOTE The installation of LIB modules resulting in duplicate LIB SLC numbers is never permitted.
Figure 2.4-2 AFP1010 LIB SLC Numbering Scheme
1-19
Figure 2.4-3 depicts the LIB SLC numbering scheme for an AM2020 in a CAB-D3 cabinet. Three ICA-4L chassis are required to mount the various types of LIB modules employed. Refer to Figure 2.4-2 as an example of AFP1010 applications. NOTE The installation of LIB modules resulting in duplicate LIB SLC numbers is never permitted.
Figure 2.4-3 AM2020 LIB SLC Numbering Scheme
1-20
10/22/99
Figure 2.4-4 depicts a CAB-A3 cabinet used with LIB-400 modules exclusively, which means it may house a maximum four loop AFP1010 system. An ICA-4L or ICA-4 chassis (neither of which is shown in the figure) is required for mounting the LIB-400.
Figure 2.4-4 LIB-400 Placement in an AFP1010

Figure 2.4-5 depicts the AFP1010 with a combination of LIB-400, LIB-200A, and LIB-200 modules installed in the first and second rows of a CAB-C3 cabinet. Two ICA chassis are required, but are not shown in the figure. The LIB-400 always occupies both addresses (refer to Figures 2.4-4 and 2.4-6). Various combinations of LIB boards may be installed (refer to Figure 2.4-3) as long as the following measures are taken: Do not install duplicate loop numbers. When installed in the ICA the LIB-200 or LIB-200A always occupies the lower number address for a given ICA position. Do not install LIB boards in the back right or back left positions of the second row. Do not install LIB boards in row three.
1-21
Loop 4 (LIB-400) Loop 1 (LIB-200) SIB CPU Loop 2 (LIB-400)
Loop 3 (LIB-200 or LIB-200A installed in left front position of ICA.)
CHS-4/4L A B C D
MPS-24A or MPS-24AE
Batteries
Figure 2.4-5 LIB Placement Example in an AFP1010
1-22
10/22/99
Figure 2.4-6 depicts a CAB-C3 cabinet used with LIB-400 modules exclusively, which means it may house a maximum ten loop AM2020 system. An ICA-4L or ICA-4 chassis (neither of which is shown in the figure) is required for mounting the LIB-400.
Figure 2.4-6 LIB-400 Placement in an AM2020
1-23
Figure 2.4-7 depicts the AM2020 with a combination of LIB-400, LIB-200A, and LIB-200 modules installed in the first and second rows of a CAB-C3 cabinet. Two ICA chassis are required, but are not shown in the figure. The LIB-400 always occupies both addresses (refer to Figures 2.4-4 and 2.4-6). Various combinations of LIB boards may be installed (refer to Figure 2.4-3) as long as the following measures are taken: Do not install duplicate loop numbers. When installed in the ICA the LIB-200 or LIB-200A always occupies the lower number address for a given ICA position.
Loop 1(LIB-200 or LIB-200A) SIB CPU
Loop 7 (LIB-400)
Loop 2 (LIB-400)
Loop 3 Loop 5 (LIB-400) Loop 8 Loop 10
Loop 4 (LIB-200 or LIB-200A) Loop 6 (LIB-200 or LIB-200A)
CHS-4/4L A B C D
MPS-24A or MPS-24AE
Batteries
Figure 2.4-7 LIB Placement Example in an AM2020
1-24
10/22/99
Section 2.5 Optional Chassis Mounting

When using an optional CHS-4/4L Chassis (refer to Figure 2.5-1), mount the chassis in the lowest available row in the cabinet, below previously mounted Interconnect Chassis Assemblies (ICA-4L). The CHS-4/4L is marked to identify the top of the chassis. Connect grounding wires of equipment to be placed in the CHS-4/4L to the PEM stud indicated. Secure the unit to the cabinet with the nuts and lock washers provided. NOTE The CAB-A3 Cabinet will not accept an additional chassis.
CHS-4 Chassis
To equipment mounted
in CHS-4/4L
Figure 2.5-1 Optional Chassis Mount
1-25
Section 2.6 Other Components

Display Interface Assemblies The Display Interface Assembly (DIA) includes a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), operator keypad, the Display Interface Board (DIB), hinged dress panel, and the CPU to DIB cable. Only one DIA is required per system. The DIA-2020 is included with the BE-2020N Basic Equipment Package for the AM2020. The DIA-1010 is included with the BE-1010N Basic Equipment Package for the AFP1010. Figure 2.6-1 shows elements visible from the cabinet front. Note that the DP-1 dress panel is not included in the BE-1010N or BE2020N.
BP-3 The Battery Dress Panel (BP-3) covers the Main Power Supply and the batteries in the cabinet. Only one BP-3 is required per system.
DP-1 The Dress Panel (DP-1) covers additional ICA-4L or CHS-4/4L assemblies in the cabinet.
Figure 2.6-1 Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm System
1-26
10/22/99
Section 2.7 Display Interface Connection

DIA-1010 and/or DIA-2020 provide access to the system CPU and the optional SIB, and an EIA-232 unsupervised printer interface (refer to Figure 2.7-1). When terminal supervision is not required and the terminal (if present) has no keyboard, the DIA-1010 and/or DIA-2020 provide an EIA-485 interface which may be used to connect an LCD-80 (in Terminal Mode). Display Interface Assembly (DIA-1010/DIA-2020) viewed from the rear.
6
NOTE The plug-in terminal block TB1 may be removed to facilitate field wiring the LCD-80 and remote printer connections (see below).
TB1 1 J3 J4 Display Interface Board (DIB)
DIB J3
TB1
All terminals are power-limited Connect ribbon cable 75226 from DIB J3 to CPU P3
Return (+) Out (-) Out (+) Return (-)
EIA-485 to LCD-80
NOTE If a supervised CRT or CRT with keyboard has been installed, this interface cannot be used. The CCM-1 Communications Converter Module must be employed to connect the LCD-80 in terminal mode. For details, refer to the LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Manual listed in the Related Document Chart in the front of this manual.
Connect ribbon cable 71046 from DIB J4 to SIB P4
DIB J4 EIA-232 to Notifier PRN or Keltron Printer #VS4095/5
All terminals are powerlimited
TB1
Transmit to Printer EIA-232 Reference
Outputs are power limited, but not supervised nor opto-isolated. Connections must be made with overall foil/braided-shield twisted paired cable suitable for EIA-232 and EIA-485 applications. The printer must be installed in the same room as the control panel. Terminate shield at cabinet entrance only.
Plug this DB-25 connector into the EIA-232 Port of either the PRN printer or the Keltron Printer Number VS4095/5.
Figure 2.7-1 Display Interface Assembly

1-27
Figure 2.7-2 depicts typical system cable placement.

71030 (to ICA) 71031
75226 71046
71033 71033
71072 71070
CAUTION! Be sure to allow for BP-3 Battery Dress Panel screw clearance between batteries here.
NOTE The battery charger output is not powerlimited. All wiring connected to these terminals must remain at least inch (6.35 mm) from all power-limited wiring. Refer to Figure 2.7-3 for wiring information.
Figure 2.7-2 Wiring Placement Diagram
1-28
10/22/99
Figure 2.7-3 depicts a typical AM2020/AFP1010 installation and is provided as a guide for proper wiring placement. The AC and battery wiring are not power-limited. A separation of at least inch (6.35 mm) must be maintained between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring. Install the tie wraps and adhesive squares as indicated in Figure 2.7-3.
Wire Channel (Model WC-2) Adhesive square and tie-wrap on top of power supply chassis affixing nonpower-limited wiring.
Adhesive square and tie-wrap on back of cabinet affixing power-limited wiring.
Figure 2.7-3 Power-Limited and Non Power-Limited Wiring

Figure 2.7-4 is provided as a guide for dress panel placement.
1-29
DIA-1010 or DIA-2020
DP-1 Dress Panel
DP-1 Dress Panel
BP-3 Battery Dress Panel

Figure 2.7-4 Dress Panel Placement Diagram
1-30
Section 2.8 Mounting the MOD-1 Module Plate

The MOD-1 allows a single MMX-1, MMX-2 or CMX module to mount in a CAB-3. It occupies one of the four positions available in a row on the CHS-4 or CHS-4L Chassis. The following five steps describe how to mount the MOD-1 in a chassis, and Figure 2.8-1 illustrates the five steps of this installation. 1. Firmly press the module to be installed into the square opening on the MOD-1 until it snaps into place. 2. Secure the module to the MOD-1 with the two screws provided. Make connections to the module at this time. 3. Angle the bottom edge of the MOD-1 into the slot on the bottom of a chassis position. Swing the MOD-1 assembly into the chassis. 4. Secure the assembly to the chassis by tightening the captive screws on the MOD-1. 5. To install the CHS-4L chassis, follow Steps 1 and 2 above. After completing Step 2, screw the two standoffs provided to the upper studs of a CHS-4L chassis position as shown in Step 5 of Figure 2.8-1. Then continue on with Steps 3 and 4.
1-31
MOD1Inst.
Figure 2.8-1 Mounting the MOD-1 into the CHS-4 and CHS-4L Chassis
1-32
Section Three Power Supplies

Section 3.1 The AC Primary Power Input
The AM2020/AFP1010 requires primary AC power. Connection to the light and power service must be on a dedicated branch circuit and the wiring for this circuit must be installed in conduit. The switch for this circuit must be labeled "Fire Alarm Circuit Control". Access to the switch must be limited to authorized personnel and the location of the switch must be identified inside of the AM2020/AFP1010 cabinet door. No other equipment may be powered from the fire alarm circuit. The AC circuit wire run must run continuously, without disconnect devices, from the power source to the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as well as local codes. Use 12 AWG (3.25 mm) wire with 600 volt insulation for this circuit. Use Tables 3.1-1 and 3.1-2 to calculate the total amount of current, in amps, that the AC service must be capable of supplying to the system.
Device Type APS-6R AA-30 AA-100/AA-120 Main Power Supply (MPS-24A)
# of Devices Multiply by Current in Amps [ [ [ ] ] ] X X X X 2.5 1.0 1.85 1.8
Total Current
[ 1 ]
1.8 Amps
Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required =
Table 3.1-1 120 VAC Fire Alarm Circuit

Device Type APS-6R AA-30E AA-100E/AA-120E Main Power Supply (MPS-24AE) # of Devices [ [ [ ] ] ] Multiply by X X X X Current in Amps 1.2 0.5 0.9 0.9 0.9 Amps Total Current
[ 1 ]
Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required =
Table 3.1-2 220/240 VAC Fire Alarm Circuit
Section 3.2 The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply

The Main Power Supply (MPS-24A or MPS-24AE) provides up to 3.0 amps of filtered current for operating the system in standby (non-fire alarm) and up to 6.0 amps during fire alarms. The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE contains battery charging circuitry and a 1-amp filtered output for powering 4-wire smoke detectors. Each MPS-24A or MPS-24AE also provides filtered, non-resettable 24V DC required for powering ACS Annunciator modules. If a voltmeter and ammeter are required on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE, order the MPM-2 Main Power Meter. Note: The battery charging circuitry on the MPS-24A can only operate under the control of the CPU-1010/2020, an XPP-1, or an MPS-TR. Without one of these controlling devices, the batteries will not be charged.
1-33
The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply must be capable of powering all internal system devices (and several external types of devices) continuously during non-fire alarm conditions. Use Table 3.2-1 to determine the non-fire alarm load on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE output when primary power is applied. A finite amount of additional current must be provided by the power supply during a fire alarm condition. For the MPS-24A or MPS24AE, use Table 3.2-2 to determine the additional current needed during fire alarms. The requirements for nonfire alarm and fire alarm current loads cannot exceed the capabilities of the power supply in either case. The following paragraphs provide additional information to the AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculation Table (Table 3.2-1). In the AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculation Table (Table 3.2-1) the primary power non-fire alarm current and the primary fire alarm current columns are not battery calculations. They are simply current calculations to confirm that the MPS-24A can output enough DC current to support the AM2020/ AFP1010 system during non-fire alarm and fire alarm conditions when operating from primary power. The word "primary" refers to the FACP's primary source of power, i.e. 120 VAC or 220/240 VAC power. The word "secondary" refers to the FACP's backup batteries (or any other 24 VDC uninterruptable, filtered power supply listed for Fire Protective Signaling and connected in place of the batteries). Specific columns within Table 3.2-1 are further defined as follows: Primary, Non-Fire This column allows the user to calculate the current that will be drawn from the MPS-24A or Alarm Current MPS-24AE during a non-fire alarm condition, with AC power applied. This current draw (amps) cannot exceed 3.0 Amps. Primary, Fire Alarm Current (amps) This column allows the system designer to determine the output current load that must be supported by the Main Power Supply MPS-24A or MPS-24AE during a fire alarm condition with primary power applied. The total current drawn from the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE during a fire alarm condition cannot exceed 6.0 amps. The last column of Table 3.2-1 allows the system designer to calculate the secondary non-fire alarm current. This is the current that will be drawn from the MPS-24A or MPS24AE power supply in a non-fire alarm condition during AC power loss. This figure is required to complete the standby battery calculations. After adding up all the individual current draws, the total current draw figure is then transferred to Table 3.2-3. NOTES Typically, a system should be designed around the capacity to activate all output circuits and relays, and support fire alarms on no less than 10 percent of initiating device circuits (subject to the requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (LAHJ). Concerning 4-wire detectors: In Table 3.2-1, the current to be entered for 4-wire smoke detectors is the manufacturer's rated fire alarm current minus the manufacturer's rated non-fire alarm current. Concerning notification appliances: The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE provides a filtered supply for notification appliance circuits, and is UL Listed as a Special Application power supply. Therefore, only notification appliances listed in the Notifier Device Compatibility Document (15378) should be used with this power supply. (Note: This restriction also applies to the APS6R and FCPS-24 power supplies). Enter into Table 3.2-1 the respective current draws of notification appliances and other external devices to be powered by the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE during a fire alarm. Do not add devices to be powered by an auxiliary power supply. No more than 3.0 amps of current can be drawn from Terminals 3 and 4 of TB3. Security Alarms are treated as trouble (non-fire alarm) conditions in the AM2020/AFP1010.
1-34
Secondary, Non-Fire Alarm Current (amps)
COLUMN A PRIMARY, NON-FIRE ALARM CURRENT (AMPS) (MPS-24A OR MPS-24E CATEGORY

OUTPUT CURRENT REQUIRED WHEN OPERATING FROM PRIMARY POWER
COLUMN B
COLUMN C
PRIMARY, FIRE ALARM CURRENT (AMPS) SECONDARY, NON-FIRE ALARM CURRENT (AMPS) QTY 1 [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ 1 ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] X [CURRENT DRAW]= x [0.162]= x [0.064]= x [0.006]= x [0.002]= x [0.100]= x [0.085]= x [0.170]= x [0.050]= x [0.060]= x [0.070]= x [0.035]= x [0.028]= x [0.033]= x [0.250]= x [0.031]= x [0.033]= x [0.028]= x [0.017]= x [0.00020]= x [0.00045]= x [0.00043]= x [0.00030]= x[ ]= x [0.00100]= x [0.01500]= x[ ]= x [0.00045]= x[ x[ ]= ]=
TOTAL
QTY BE-2020N or BE-1010N (CPU, DIA, & 1 ICA-4L) MPS-24A MPM-2 ICA-4L LIB-200 (10 max.) LIB-200A (10 max.) LIB-400 (5 max.) SIB-232 SIB-2048A SIB-NET MIB-W MIB-F MIB-WF INA RPT-W RPT-WF RPT-F RPT-485W/RPT-485WF SDX, CPX & FDX-551, SDX-551TH, MMX-1 IPX-751 MMX-101,CMX-1,BGX-101L CMX-2, NBG-12LX MMX-2 - See MMX-2 Instructions B601BH B501BH (Horn in Base) DHX-501,DHX-502 See instructions ISO-X 4-Wire Smoke Detectors See Device Compatibility Document RM-1/RM-1SA AMG-1, AMG-E, ATG-2 FFT-7, FFT-7S AA-30/AA-30E AA-30 w/ ACT-2 See Document 51118 AA-100/AA-100E, AA-120/AA-120E APS-6R ACM-16AT, ACM-32A AEM-16AT, AEM-32A LCD-80 ACM-8R (see Doc.15342) LDM Series (see Doc.15885) SCS Series (see Doc.15712) Number of annunciator LEDs illuminated during non-fire alarm conditions: ACM-16AT, AEM-16AT, ACM-32A, AEM-32A XPP-1 XPM-8 (8 zones) XPM-8 (4 zones) XPM-8L (8 zones) XPC-8 (8 circuits) XPC-8 (4 circuits) XPR-8 SUM EACH
COLUMN FOR SUBTOTALS, PREVIOUS PAGE" ROW ON NEXT PAGE THEN ENTER IN
X [CURRENT DRAW ]= x [0.162] =
TOTAL
QTY 1 [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ 1 ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
X [CURRENT DRAW ]= x [0.118] = x [0.104]= x [0.006]= x [0.002]= x [0.049]= x [0.085]= x [0.170]= x [0.045]= x [0.055]= x [0.070]= x [0.035]= x [0.028]= x [0.033]= x [0.250]= x [0.031]= x [0.033]= x [0.028]= x [0.017]= x [0.00020]= x [0.00035]= x [0.00030]= x [0.00030]= x[ ]= x [0.00100]= x [0.00100]= x[ ]= x [0.00045]= ]= ]=
TOTAL
1 [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ 1 ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
0.162 0.064
0.162 0.064
0.118 0.104
x [0.064]= x [0.006]= x [0.002]= x [0.078]= x [0.085]= x [0.170]= x [0.050]= x [0.060]= x [0.070]= x [0.035]= x [0.028]= x [0.033]= x [0.250]= x [0.031]= x [0.033]= x [0.028]= x [0.017]= x [0.00020]= x [0.00035]= x [0.00030]= x [0.00030]= x[ ]= x [0.00100]= x [0.00100]= x[ ]= x [0.00045]= ]= ]=
] x[ ] x[ ] ] ]
] x[ ] x[ ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
x [0.020]= x [0.060]= x [0.060]= NOT APPLICABLE
x (0.066]= x [0.060]= x [0.120]= NOT APPLICABLE
x [0.020]= x [0.060]= x [0.060]= x[0.045]= x[0.050]= x[0.025]= x[0.040]= x[0.002]= x[0.050]= x[ ]= x[ ]= x[ ]=
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [
[ [ [ [ [ [
] ] ] ] ] ]
x[0.040]= x[0.002]= x[0.100]= x[ ]= x[ ]= x[ ]=
[ [ [ [ [ [
] ] ] ] ] ]
x[0.056]= x[0.018]= x[0.100]= x[ ]= x[ ]= x[ ]=
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [
] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
x[0.016]= x[0.016]= x[0.023]= x[0.147]= x[0.086]= x[0.085]= x[0.033]= x[0.017]= x[0.004]= [ [ [ [ [ [ [ ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
INCLUDED ABOVE
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [
] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
x[0.016]= x[0.016]= x[0.025]= x[0.147]= x[0.086]= x[0.085]= x[0.033]= x[0.017]= x[0.004]=
x[0.032]= x[0.169]= x[0.108]= x[0.115]= x[0.042]= x[0.026]= x[0.013]=
"SUBTOTALS FROM
ALARM SUBTOTAL:
PRIMARY, NON-
PRIMARY, ALARM SUBTOTAL:
SECONDARY, NONFIRE ALARM SUBTOTAL:
Table 3.2-1 AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculations (1 of 2)

1-35
CATEGORY
COLUMN A PRIMARY, NON-FIRE ALARM CURRENT (AMPS ) (MPS-24A OR MPS-24E OUTPUT

CURRENT REQUIRED WHEN OPERATING FROM PRIMARY POWER
COLUMN B PRIMARY, FIRE ALARM CURRENT (AMPS)

QTY X [CURRENT DRAW]= TOTAL
COLUMN C SECONDARY, NON-FIRE ALARM CURRENT (AMPS)

QTY X [CURRENT DRAW]= TOTAL
QTY
X [CURRENT DRAW]=
TOTAL
XP5 Series Transponders XP5-M XP5-C Relay XP5-C NAC/telephone Miscellaneous CCM-1 A77-716B RA-400Z(when on) NIB-96 MBT-1 UZC-256 UDACT Notification Appliances 1 Other devices drawing power from MPS-24A terminals TB3-3 and TB3-4 SUBTOTALS FROM THIS PAGE SUBTOTALS FROM
PREVIOUS PAGE
[ [ [
] x[0.001651]= ] x[0.000840]= ] x[0.001481]= x[0.107]= x[0.020]= x[0.006]= x[0.022]= n/a x[0.035]= x[0.100]=
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [
] x[0.003000]= ] x[0.000840]= ] x[0.001481]= ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] x[0.107]= x[0.020]= x[0.006]= x[0.022]= x[0.017]= x[0.090]= x[0.100]= x[ x[ x[ x[ ]= ]= ]= ]=
[ [ [
] x[0.001651]= ] x[0.000840]= ] x[0.001481]= x[0.107]= x[0.020]= x[0.006]= x[0.022]= n/a x[0.035]= x[0.100]=
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] n/a [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] n/a [ ] [ ]
NOT APPLICABLE [ [ ] ] x[ x[ ]= ]=
NOT APPLICABLE [ [ ] ] x[ x[ ]= ]=
PRIMARY, NON-ALARM SUBTOTAL: PRIMARY, NON-ALARM SUBTOTAL: PRIMARY, NON-ALARM TOTAL:

CANNOT EXCEED 3.0 A
PRIMARY, ALARM SUBTOTAL: PRIMARY, ALARM SUBTOTAL: PRIMARY, ALARM TOTAL:

CANNOT EXCEED 6.0 A
SECONDARY, NON-FIRE ALARM SUBTOTOTAL: SECONDARY, NON-FIRE ALARM SUBTOTOTAL: SECONDARY, NON-FIRE ALARM TOTAL:
PLACE THIS TOTAL IN TABLE 3.2-3 TO DETERMINE A.H. REQUIREMENT
SUM
SUBTOTALS FROM EACH PAGE FOR TOTALS
INCLUDE ONLY THOSE DEVICES TO BE POWERED BY THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY, NOT AN SEE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR APPLICABLE POWER DRAWS.
AUXILIARY SUPPLY SUCH AS THE
AVPS-24
OR
APS-6R.
Table 3.2-1 AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculations (2 of 2)
1-36
10/22/99
Maximum Secondary Power Fire Alarm Current Draw Use Table 3.2-2 to determine the maximum current requirements of the secondary power source during fire alarm conditions. The total obtained in Table 3.2-2 is the amount of current that the batteries must be capable of supplying. This figure will be used in Table 3.2-3 to determine the size of the batteries needed to support five minutes of fire alarm operation. It is presumed, in a fire alarm condition, that the batteries must feed the main power supply and any additional supplies (APS-6R, AA-30, AA-30E, AA-100, AA-100E, AA-120, and AA-120E) with the maximum rated power each supply can provide (Table 3.2-2). NOTE Due to the maximum rating of 9 amps imposed when using PS-12250 batteries, it may be necessary to calculate the exact requirements of the secondary supply. In that case, add the secondary non-fire alarm load obtained in Table 3.2-1 to the total fire alarm current draw of all notification appliances in the system and substitute that figure in Table 3.2-2 for the MPS and any APS-6Rs.
Device Type Main Power Supply (MPS-24A or MPS-24AE) APS-6R AA-30 or AA-30E AA-100 or AA-100E AA-120 or AA-120E
# in Alarm (simultaneously) 1 [ [ [ ] ] ]
Multiply by
Current in Amps 6.0 6.0 3.0 7.3
Total Current
X X X X
6.0
Sum Column for Secondary Fire Alarm Load * =
Amps
* The secondary fire alarm load cannot exceed 9.0 amps with PS-12250 batteries, and 20 amps with PS-12600 batteries.
Table 3.2-2 Maximum Secondary Power Fire Alarm Current Draw
LOAD TOTALS
Enter Secondary Nonfire Alarm Load from Column C of Table 3.2-1 Enter Secondary Fire Alarm Load from Table 3.2-2
MULTIPLIED
BY
TIME
Enter Required Secondary Non-fire Alarm Standby Time (24 or 60 hours) Enter Required Fire Alarm Time (for 5 minutes, enter 0.084) for 15 minutes, enter 0.25)
EQUALS
SECONDARY AMP HOUR TOTALS
[ [
] ]
[ [
] ]
[ [
] ]
Non-fire Alarm Secondary Standby Amp Hours Secondary Fire Alarm Amp Hour Requirement
Sum column for Total Secondary Ampere Hours (AH) Calculated Multiply by the derating factor x 1.2 Total Secondary Ampere Hours Required
= = =
Table 3.2-3 Secondary Power Standby and Fire Alarm Load

1-37
Table 3.2-3 sums the non-fire alarm and alarm loads to arrive at the battery size, in Ampere Hours (AH), required to support the AM2020/AFP1010. The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE can charge batteries up to 60 AH in size. Select batteries from Table 3.2-4 that meet or exceed the total AH calculated :
Number Required Four Two Two Two
Battery Siz e 9.5 AH 12 A H 25 A H 60 A H
Voltage Rating 6 volts 12 volts 12 volts 12 volts
Model Number PS-695 PS-12120 PS-12250 PS-12600
Cabinet Siz e CAB-A3, B3, C3, D3 (AFP1010 Only) CAB-A3, B3, C3, D3 (AFP1010 Only) CAB-A3, B3, C3, D3 BB-55 Cabinet (Batteries Only)
Table 3.2-4 Battery Size Requirements

NOTE NFPA 72 Local and Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems require 24 hours of secondary non-fire alarm power followed by five minutes in alarm. NFPA 72 Auxiliary and Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems require 60 hours of secondary non-fire alarm power followed by five minutes in alarm. NFPA 72 Voice Evacuation Systems require 15 minutes of alarm time. Battery Testing You may need to test the standby batteries occasionally. Here are two testing procedures you can use to determine the charge condition and capacity of the batteries in the system. Quick Test - The quick test is a measure of charge condition; it is not a battery capacity test. Use it to identify the need to charge or replace the battery before it fails. If the battery has been part of an existing system, test results may indicate a faulty battery or a problem in the charging system. Follow this procedure: 1. Remove the fully charged battery from the sytem or charging network. 2. Place a load resistor across the terminals that limits the current flow to approximately one amp. For example, use a 12 ohm resistor with a minimum of 12 watts for a single 12 volt battery. If you have two 12 volt batteries connected in series, use a 24 ohm resistor with a minimum of 24 watts. 3. After 15 minutes, measure the voltage across the battery terminals with the resistor still in place. Be sure to use a digital meter. For a 12 volt battery, the meter reading should range between 13.8 to 12.0 VDC. For a 24 volt battery system, the range is 27.6 to 24 VDC. NOTE If the readings fall below these ranges, perform the 20-Hour Discharge Test, or replace the battery. 20-Hour Discharge Test - The 20-hour discharge test indicates the battery capacity at its amp hour rating. The advertised amp hour battery rating is based on a 20-hour discharge rate, which is the amount of current it delivers to a load for 20 hours while maintaining its terminal voltage above the levels described in Step 3 of this test. Follow this procedure: 1. Calculate the load resistor. a. Divide the amp hour rating by 20 hours. For the PS-12250 battery, the calculation would be 25/50=1.25 amps. b. We need 1.25 amps for 20 hours. Using Ohm's Law, R=E/I, therefore, R=12/1.25, or 9.6 ohms. P= I x E, so P=1.25 x 12, or 15 watts. Therefore we need a load resistor of 9.6 ohms at 15 watts.
1-38
2. Measure time of load. a. Take a fully charged battery and install the load resistor across the terminals. b. Measure the voltage across the battery for a period of 20 hours. If during the test the terminal voltage drops below the minimum acceptable levels (10.2 VDC for a 12 volt battery and 20.4 VDC for a 24 volt battery), note the number of hours that have elapsed when the battery voltage drops below its minimum operational level. 3. Calculate the battery capacity. CAPACITY = TIME x LOAD where: TIME (in hours) is equal to the measured duration the terminal voltage remained at the acceptable level and LOAD is equal to the load current value. If the battery maintained its voltage level above its minimum operational level for 15 hours, its capacity would be: 15 x 1.25, or 18.75 amp hours. Conclusion: The battery has only 18.75 amp hour capacity instead of its rated 25 amp hours.
Figure 3.2-1 depicts the two-step procedure of mounting the main power supply.
Step 1
Position the Main Power Supply over the support bracket in the lower left corner of the cabinet and carefully push the supply down until it engages the bracket securely.
Step 2
Secure the Main Power Supply to the cabinet with the two self-tapping screws provided.
Figure 3.2-1 Mount the Main Power Supply

1-39
Test of Ground Fault Detection Circuit If you have a persistent ground fault and suspect the MPS-24A ground fault detection circuit may be generating a false indication, use this test: 1. Remove the upper right circuit board mounting screw, just to the right of P2. 2. Insert an insulator (a piece of paper will do) between the power supply circuit board and the mounting standoff. If the ground fault indication remains, the problem is with the MPS-24A. Monitoring Remote Power Supplies The MPS-24A depends on the CPU-1010/2020 or the XPP-1 to control its battery charging circuit and to monitor the battery state approximately every four minutes. If you use the MPS-24A in a remote application from the main control panel or a transponder, add the MPS-TR to the power supply to prevent problems keeping the batteries charged. The MPS-TR has a trouble relay that should be monitored by a system monitoring device. Note that the CPU or the XPP-1 can control only one power supply.
Section 3.2.1 The MPS-TR Main Power Supply Monitor

The MPS-TR power supply monitor mounts on any of the MPS series power supplies. This add-on board mounts on the right side of the MPS series supply and it is fastened through the use of two extended length standoffs, making use of threads on the existing standoffs (Figure 3.2-1). The MPS-TR monitor provides supervision for remote power supplies and control of the power supply battery charger when there is no CPU-1010/2020 or XPP-1 to provide these two functions. The board is mounted and secured as described above. P1 on the MPS-TR is connected to P3 on the power supply via a power ribbon cable(part number 71085) supplied with the MPS-TR. The relay common and normally closed contacts of the MPS-TR are connected to a normally closed TROUBLE INPUT on the control panel trouble monitoring circuit. MPS-TR Installation 1. Remove the upper and lower screws on the right side of the power supply main board. 2. The MPS-TR mounts on these two holes. Thread the new longer screws and the standoff sleeves into the holes formerly occupied by the two screws removed in Step 1.
Figure 3.2.1-1 Threading the New Screws
1-40
10/22/99
Figure 3.2.1-2 Mounting the MPS-TR
System Common Terminal Connection MPS-24A TB3-4 MPS-24B TB2-4
Figure 3.2.1-3 System Common Terminal Connection

NOTE: Relay contacts are specified in the NORMAL (no trouble condition) state. The MPS-TR connects to any device with a trouble IN and a trouble OUT connector/terminal.
1-41
Section 3.3 Connecting the Main Power Supply

Table 3.3-1 provides the maximum output capacity of the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE main power supply. Figure 3.3-1 illustrates connections for primary and secondary power to the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE, as well as terminal and harness connections for the control panel. Connecting Primary AC Power With the circuit breaker at the main AC power distribution panel turned off, remove the plastic insulating cover from Terminal Block TB1 on the MPS-24A and connect the system primary power source. Connect the electrical system earth ground to TB1 Terminal 2 and ground the power supply assembly to the cabinet with a Chassis Ground cable (part number 71073) to TB1 Terminal 3. Connect the primary Neutral line to TB1 Terminal 4 and the primary Hot line (120 VAC for the MPS-24A or 220/240 VAC for the MPS-24AE) to TB1 Terminal 6. Do not route AC wiring in the same conduit with circuits in this control panel. After completion of these connections, reinstall the plastic insulating cover over the terminal strip. Leave the main circuit breaker off until installation of the entire system is complete. Connecting the Secondary 24V Power Source Secondary power (usually battery) is required to support the system during loss of primary power. The batteries may reside in the control panel cabinet, or in a separate BB-55 cabinet. When using a 24 VDC filtered power source other than batteries, this source must be of sufficient capacity and be listed for this purpose. Connect the Battery Positive Cable (part number 71071) to TB2 Terminal 1(+) and the Battery Negative Cable (part number 71072) to TB2 Terminal 2(-). Do not connect the Battery Interconnect Cable (part number 71070) at this time. This connection will be made just prior to initial system power-up. NOTE A separate cabinet may be required to house NiCad batteries due to battery size. Earth Ground Fault Detection The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE automatically detects ground faults in the system. To disable ground fault detection, cut Resistor R27 (refer to Figure 3.3-1). 24V DC Four-Wire Smoke Detector Power Up to one amp of power for four-wire smoke detectors can be drawn from TB3 Terminals 1(+) and 2(-). Power is removed from these terminals during system reset. This 24V DC filtered source is power-limited but must be supervised via an end-of-line Power Supervision Relay (refer to Figures 4.6-5 and 4.6-6). 24V DC Notification Appliance Power Up to 3 amps of filtered current for powering notification appliances can be drawn from TB3 Terminals 3(+) and 4(-). Power is not removed from these terminals during system reset. If additional 4-wire smoke detector power is required, this circuit can be converted to a two-amp resettable circuit by cutting JP5 on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE (refer to Figure 3.3-1). This 24V DC power is power-limited but must be supervised via an end-of-line Power Supervision Relay. Note: This power supply is UL listed as a Special Application Power Supply. Therefore, only notification appliances listed in the Device Compatibility Document (15378) should be used with this power supply. (This restriction also applies to the APS-6R and FCPS-24 power supply.) System Harness Connections The Power Harness (part number 71030) provides internal power for circuit boards installed in the ICA-4L. Connect this harness from P2 or P4 on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE to Plug A on the uppermost ICA-4L. The AM2020/AFP1010 monitor the power supply through connection of a Power Supply Supervision Cable (part number 71031) between MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Connector P3 and Connector P2 on the CPU (refer to Figure 3.6-1). If the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE is being used as a remote power supply, this ribbon cable should be plugged into the MPS-TR module. The MPS-TR provides a Form-C trouble contact that can be monitored by a monitor module with an "MTRB" Type ID. For connection of an MPS-TR, refer to the MPS-TR Product Installation Document listed in the Related Documentation Chart in the beginning of this manual.
1-42
NVRAMS User programming information and critical operating parameters of the AM2020/AFP1010 system are stored in Nonvolatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM). Improper cycling of power to the AM2020/AFP1010 can cause the NVRAMS to become inaccessible. The AM2020/AFP1010 software now verifies the state of the NVRAMs. If a NVRAM problem has been detected, the AM2020/AFP1010 will display one of the following two error messages depending on where the problem is located: TROUBL CATASTROPHIC CPU NONVOLATILE RAM FAILURE or TROUBL CATASTROPHIC DIA NONVOLATILE RAM FAILURE Other indicators of NVRAM problems by board are: Board Trouble Message Displayed Local Board Indicator SIB-NET TROUBL CATASTROPHIC ISIB COMMUNICATIONS FAULT ATXD LED blinking at 2 second rate. The correct power down procedure is to remove battery power, then disconnect primary power (AC) at the circuit breaker in the electrical distribution panel, then wait at least one minute before disconnecting or connecting any cables or circuit boards, or reapplying primary power. The correct power up procedure is to connect primary power, then connect the battery, and wait one minute before taking any further actions, especially pressing the acknowledge button, which can cause NVRAM problems if pressed during the first minute after power application. If this condition occurs, call the factory for immediate assistance.
Condition Maximum Circuit Load (Per Circuit) 3.0 amps Non-Fire Alarm with Battery Charger Enabled 1.0 amp 3.0 amps nonresettable 2.0 amps resettable 3.0 amps Non-Fire Alarm with Battery Charger Disabled (See Note 2) 1.0 amp 3.0 amps nonresettable External 2 2.0 amps resettable During a fire alarm condition, the battery charger is automatically disabled which makes the full 6 amp capacity of the power supply available to be shared between the internal and external output circuits for up to one hour (4 amps continuously). Internal External 1 Wh e n t h e I n t e r n a l MP S - 2 4 A / E b a t t e r y charger is not used, the full 6 amp capacity of the power suppl y can be shared between the internal and external circuits for up to one hour (4 amps continuously). 3.0 amps External 2 Total of power in columns to the left cannot exceed: Circuit Type (See Note 1) Description
Internal External 1
W h i l e t h e p o w e r s u p p l y c a n d e l i ve r 6 amps, 3 amps of the power supply c a p a c i t y a r e r e s e r ve d fo r t h e b a t t e r y charger when enabled. The remaining 3 amp capacity can be shared between the internal and external circuits during a nonfire alarm condition.
6.0 amps
1.0 amps
Internal
Fire Alarm 3.0 amps 3.0 amps nonresettable
6.0 amps External 1
External 2 2.0 amps resettable
Notes:
1 Internal
This power is used for all internal requirements modules, boards, etc. Connection: Power Harness from MPS-24A/E P2 or P4, to the CPU. Provides resettable power to 4-wire smoke detectors (and power supervision relays). Connection: TB3 Terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-). Power for devices (typically notification appliances) listed in the Notifier Device Compatibility Document (15378). Connection: TB3 Terminal 3 (+) and 4 (-). JP1 must be cut to install a CHG-120 remote battery charger and disable the MPS24A/E internal charger.
External 1
External 2 2 Remote Battery Charger
Table 3.3-1 MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply Loads

Filtered Supply
1-43
Four-Wire Smoke Detector Power Secondary Power

27.6 V DC, supervised and power-limited. Fast charge = 2 amps, trickle charge = 20 mA. 24V DC ( 200 mV ripple), 1 amp maximum. Filtered and resettable. Power-limited but must be supervised via a Power Supervision Relay.
+ + Notification Appliance/ Annunciator Power

Power-limited, filtered, non-resettable, 3 amps (in alarm) maximum. JP5 may be cut to convert this notification appliance power (TB3 Terminals 3 and 4) to a resettable, 2-amp maximum circuit. This output can also be used to power ACS series annunciators (do not cut JP5).
Battery Battery +
PRIMARY POWER Power Supply MPS-24A (maximum) AC 120V HZ 50/60 amps 1.8 0.9
MPS-24AE (maximum) 220/240V 50/60
Neutral Out Neutral In
Hot In Hot Out
Power Ribbon Connector

Connect to P2 on the CPU-2020 or CPU-2
Earth Ground
Connect to chassis via a Grounding Cable Assembly.
Power Harnesses (P2, P4)

Connect to Plug A on the top of the ICA-4/ ICA-4L (3 amps maximum, P2 and P4 combined) or any other module or board requiring internal power.
Not used with the AM2020/AFP1010. Make no connection here.

Battery Fuse (10A, 3AG)
Cut R27 to disable Earth Ground Fault Detection.
LED Indicators
Earth Ground Fault Battery Fail AC Power Fail NiCad High Charge Rate
JP5: Cut to make notification appliance power on TB3 Terminals 3 and 4 a resettable 2-amp maximum circuit. JP1: When employing a CHG-120, Remote Battery Charger JP1 must be cut.
MPM-2 Voltmeter/Ammeter Connector

3 amps maximum non-fire alarm load. 6 amps maximum fire alarm load. For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A.
1-44
JP2: must be cut otherwise a short on the notification appliance power circuit (Terminals 3 and 4) would register incorrectly as a loss of primary (AC) power.
Figure 3.3-1 Field Wiring the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Power Supply
10/22/99
Section 3.4 The Optional Main Power Meter

The optional Main Power Meter (MPM-2) may only be installed on the Main Power Supply, MPS-24A or MPS-24AE (refer to Figure 3.4-1).
Step 1
Remove the two screws in the bottom left corner of the MPS-24A or MPS24AE.
Step 2
Thread the two replacement screws through the MPM-2 bracket and through the two standoffs provided. Place the MPM-2 assembly over the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE and secure with the two screws.
Step 3
Complete the installation of the MPM-2 by plugging the female connector on the meter into Plug P7 on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE.
Figure 3.4-1 Installation of the Main Power Meter
1-45
Section 3.5 The CHG-120 Remote Battery Charger

The Notifier Remote Battery Charger, CHG-120 is capable of charging 25 to 120 ampere hour batteries. This unit is required if the MPS-24A must deliver more than 3 amps of current when no fire alarm signal is present. Batteries up to 120 AH can be housed with the charger in the BB-55 cabinet: Batteries up to 25 AH can be housed with the charger in cabinets CAB-A3, -B3, -C3, or -D3. Refer to Figure 3.5-1 for installation positions. The charger can be mounted up to 20 feet (6.096 meters) away from the control panel. To determine the battery size needed in a particular system, refer to the Non-Fire Alarm Power Requirements.
3.5-1a
3.5-1b
Figure 3.5-1 CHG-120 Installation into CAB-3 Series(3.5-1a) and BB-55 (3.5-1b) Cabinets
Connecting the Primary Power Source With the circuit breaker at the main AC power distribution panel turned off, connect the primary power source to the corresponding terminal on TB1 of the CHG-120. All connections between the AM2020/AFP1010 and the CHG-120 must be made in conduit, using 12 AWG (3.25 mm) wire. Do not route AC wiring in the same conduit as other control panel circuits. Leave the main circuit breaker off until installation of the entire system is complete. Refer to Figure 3.5-2. Connecting the Secondary Power Source Do not apply AC power or batteries until the system is completely wired and ready for testing. Refer to Wiring Diagram and Instructions for the CHG-120 Charger in the CHG-120 Charger Manual (Document 50641) for additional information.
1-46
10/22/99
Figure 3.5-2 CHG-120 Connections
Section 3.6 The APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply

The APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply is designed to power devices that require filtered, non-resettable power such as XP Transponder modules, Notification Appliance Circuit modules, and Control modules. It provides two 24 VDC (filtered) output circuits (3 A each, 6 A total, 4 A continuous). For more information on the APS-6R, refer to the APS-6R Manual (Document 50702)
Mounting an APS-6R in a CAB-3 Series Cabinet

An APS-6R can mount to a CHS-4 (Figure 3.6-1a) or a CHS-4L (Figure 3.6-1b) for use in a CAB-3 Series cabinet (CAB-A3, CAB-B3, CAB-C3, or CAB-D3). To mount the APS-6R, follow these instructions: Place the APS-6R onto the mounting studs of the CHS-4 or CHS-4L chassis. Insert a standoff through each of the APS-6R mounting slots; then thread each standoff to the mounting stud on the chassis. Tighten the standoffs until the APS-6R is securely fastened to the chassis. Mount the CHS-4 or CHS-4L to the cabinet backbox. Install the APS-6R plastic cover and press-fit terminal block cover over TB1 AC connections. (Refer to Figure 3.6-2)
1-47
3.6-1a 3.6-1b Figure 3.6-1 Mounting the APS-6R to a Chassis Field Wiring an APS-6R
Figure 3.6-3 shows typical field wiring for an APS-6R WARNING:
Use extreme caution when working with the APS-6R - high voltage and AC line-connected circuits are present in the APS-6R. Turn off and remove all power sources. To reduce the risk of electric shock make sure to properly ground the APS-6R.
J1 and J2 may be used in place of TB2 when the APS-6R is powering internal modules (such as the UZC-256, XPC-8) with compatible connectors
Figure 3.6-2 Cover Installations

Before field wiring, install the APS-6R plastic cover, and install the press-fit terminal block cover over TB1 when field wiring is complete (Figure 3.6-2).
Figure 3.6-3 Typical APS-6R Wiring

1-48
Connecting Multiple APS-6R Power Supplies

Figure 3.6-4 shows typical trouble bus connections for multiple APS-6R power supplies using trouble connectors J3 and J4. Notes: 1. Use Cable 71033 or 75098 (same cables, different lengths) for all wiring. 2. APS-6R J3 and J4 can be interchanged.
Figure 3.6-4 Trouble Bus Connections for Multiple APS-6R Power Supply Configuration
1-49
Section 3.7 The Central Processing Unit (CPU-2020, CPU-2)

The Central Processing Unit is the heart of the system (refer to Figure 3.7-1). This unit directs all communications between modules and monitors all modules in the system for removal or failure. The CPU maintains all programmable system parameters (except alphanumeric information) in nonvolatile memory to protect the data if primary and secondary power is removed (provided the board and all associated cabling is handled with proper precaution). The CPU executes all control-by-event programs for specific action in response to an alarm condition. A real-time clock provides time annotation on the display(s), history file, and printer. The CPU provides one set of Form-C general alarm contacts and one set of Form-C system trouble contacts. The Form-C general alarm contacts will transfer during the presence of one or more fire alarm signals. The Form-C system trouble contacts will transfer during any security alarm supervisory signal or trouble condition. The Form-C trouble contacts will not transfer when both primary and secondary power is lost. When such transfer is required, use a separate, listed power supervisory relay. Only one CPU is required per AM2020/AFP1010 system. Note: Due to the proximity of the alarm and trouble contacts to CPU-based system control functions, only circuits that are unlikely to produce any electrical noise should be connected to the contacts. If a noise-generating device is connected to these contacts, system operation problems might be encountered.
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 2 1
No connection No connection No connection Normally open contact Normally closed contact Common No connection Normally open contact Normally closed contact Common
System Trouble/ Supervisory/ Security Contacts
} General Alarm
Contacts
P4
See Appendix A for contact ratings
Connect Terminal 5 of P4 to chassis ground via cable (Part Number 71073)
Figure 3.7-1 CPU Alarm and Trouble Contacts

NOTE Contacts may be connected to power-limited or nonpower-limited sources of power. Refer to the power-limited information label located inside the door of the FACP. All circuits that are connected to nonpower-limited sources of power must be identified on this label.
1-50
10/22/99
Section Four Signaling

Section 4.1 The LIB Signaling Line Circuit
The AM2020/AFP1010 communicates with intelligent and addressable initiating, monitor, and control devices through a LIB Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). The Loop Interface Boards, LIB-200 and LIB-200A each control one SLC. The LIB-400 controls two SLC loops. For XP and XP5 Transponders connected to SLCs refer to the respective transponder manual (Refer to the Related Documentation Table in the beginning of this chapter for part numbers). Isolator Modules and Bases Isolator Modules (ISO-X) and bases (B524BI(A) and B224BI(A))permit a string of intelligent addressable devices and modules to be electrically "isolated" from the remainder of the SLC, allowing critical loop components to function in the event of a short circuit fault (refer to Figures 4.5-2, 4.5-3 and 4.10-2). Monitor Modules Addressable Monitor Modules MMX-1 and MMX-101 allow the AM2020/AFP1010 to monitor entire circuits of N.O. contacts, alarm initiating devices, manual pull stations, 4-wire smoke detectors, heat detectors, waterflow, and supervisory devices. In addition, the MMX-2 may be used to provide power to and monitor conventional 2-wire smoke detectors that are listed in the Device Compatibility Document (refer to Figures 4.6-2 through 4.6-6). The addressable BGX-101L pull station provides point annunciation of manual pull stations (refer to Figure 4.8-2). Control Modules Through addressable Control Modules (CMX/XPC), the AM2020/AFP1010 can selectively activate notification appliance circuits and Form-C output relays (refer to Figures 4.7-2 through 4.7-6). XP5-C Control Modules Each XP5-C Module allows the AM2020/AFP1010 to control a maximum of five individual circuits. The module can be configured as a NAC/telephone or relay circuit. Its function is similar to the function of the control modules described above. XP5-M Monitor Modules Each XP5-M Module allows the AM2020/AFP1010 to monitor a maximum of five individual circuits. Its function is similar to the function of the monitor modules described above. Intelligent Detectors Through the SLC loop, the AM2020/AFP1010 communicates with intelligent ionization (CPX), photoelectric (SDX), thermal (FDX), and combination (IPX) detectors (refer to Figure 4.10-1). Loop Interface Boards Signaling Line Circuit The LIB-200 and LIB-200A are single SLC boards. The LIB-400 is a dual SLC board. The capacity of each SLC on a LIB includes up to 99 intelligent detectors, and an additional combination of up to 99 addressable pull stations, and control and monitor modules. The AFP1010 will support a maximum of two LIB-400s (a total of four SLCs). The AM2020 supports up to ten SLCs. One to five LIB-400s, or one to ten LIB-200s or LIB-200As can be employed on the AM2020, depending on system requirements. NOTE: In Canada, ULC Standard S524, for the installation of fire alarm systems, refers to signaling line circuits as Data Communications Links (DCL). An NFPA Style 4 is equivalent to a DCLB, Style 6 to a DCLA, and Style 7 to a DCLR. NOTE: If you are experiencing excessive noise on speaker or phone circuits in the IFC-1010/2020, the LIB-200 SLC polling signal may be the source. To reduce noise, connect the SLC shields to main panel power supply system common of the MPS-24A, TB3, terminal 6, or use a LIB-200A/LIB-400.
1-51
Section 4.2 The Loop Interface Boards (LIB-200, LIB-200A, and LIB-400)
The Loop Interface Boards (LIBs) allow the AM2020/AFP1010 to communicate with the system's alarm initiating devices and to control the system's output devices. Through a communications loop (functions in accordance with the requirements for NFPA SLCs or SLC loops), the LIBs allow the control panel to communicate with addressable pull stations, and intelligent ionization, photoelectric, and thermal detectors. Through addressable control modules (CMX/XPC) connected along the communications loop, the control panel may selectively activate notification circuits or Form-C output relays. Through addressable Monitor Modules MMX-1 and MMX-101, the control panel may monitor entire circuits of N.O. contacts, alarm initiating devices such as manual pull stations, 4-wire smoke detectors, heat detectors, waterflow and supervisory devices. MMX-2 may be used to monitor conventional 2-wire smoke detectors. Through Isolator Modules (ISO-X) or isolator/detector mounting base, a string of intelligent addressable devices and modules may be electrically "isolated" from the remainder of the communications loop, permitting critical loop components to function in the event of a short circuit on the loop. The LIB boards are power-limited.
LIB-200
The LIB-200 (refer to Figure 4.2-1) is a single signaling line circuit board which supports up to 10,000 feet (3,048 meters) maximum of field wiring for Style 4 and up to 10,000 (3,048) maximum for Styles 6 and 7 on ports A and B. The maximum loop resistance for Style 4 is 40 ohms on ports A and B and 40 ohms total for Styles 6 and 7. If wiring for the LIB-200 leaves the building, one or more surge suppressors are required. Refer to the Surge Supression portion of this section for information on surge suppressors that are approved for use with this FACP.
P2 8
P2
8 7 5 3 1 Connect to Earth Ground Using Supplied Cable SLC Loop Port BSLC Loop Port B+ SLC Loop Port ASLC Loop Port A+
Figure 4.2-1 The LIB-200
1-52
10/22/99
LIB-200A
The LIB-200A field wiring is electrically isolated from the rest of the system so that any two ground faults on separate SLCs will not cause invalid replays from devices. A short to any other system circuit will not cause communication loss. The LIB-200A has an earth ground fault detection circuit with selectable high/low sensitivity and disable. Use only the high sensitivity setting as shipped from the factory. Port A and Port B of the LIB 200A can each support up to 12,500 feet (3,810 meters) of SLC wiring for Style 4. For Styles 6 and 7, Port A and Port B together will support 12,500 feet (3,810 meters) SLC wiring in total. The maximum loop resistance for style 4 is 50 ohms on ports A and B and 50 ohms total for Styles 6 and 7. The LIB-200A supports the Local Mode General Alarm Bus, a feature which permits limited alarm function in the unlikely event of a CPU failure. The LIB-200A has two LEDs; yellow displays earth ground fault trouble and red indicates initiated alarm condition during local mode only (refer to Figure 4.2-2). If wiring for the LIB-200A leaves the building, one or more surge suppressors are required. Refer to the Surge Supression portion of this section for information on surge suppressors that are approved for use with this FACP.
LIB-400
The LIB-400 field wiring is electrically isolated from the rest of the system so that any two ground faults on separate SLCs will not cause invalid replays from devices. A short on to any other system circuit will not cause communication loss. The LIB-400 has an earth ground fault detection circuit with selectable high/low sensitivity and disable. Use only the high sensitivity setting as shipped from the factory. Port A and Port B of the LIB 400 can each support up to 12,500 feet (3,810 meters) of SLC wiring for Style 4. For Styles 6 and 7, Port A and Port B together will support 12,500 feet (3,810 meters) SLC wiring in total. The maximum loop resistance for Style 4 is 50 ohms on ports A and B and 50 ohms total for Styles 6 and 7. The LIB-400 supports the Local Mode General Alarm Bus, a feature which permits limited alarm function in the unlikely event of a CPU failure. The LIB-400 has two LEDs per loop; yellow indicates an earth ground fault and red indicates an alarm condition during local mode only (refer to Figure 4.2-2). If wiring for the LIB-400 leaves the building, one or more surge suppressors are required. Refer to the Surge Supression portion of this section for information on surge suppressors that are approved for use with this FACP.
NEW LIB FEATURES

The following features are only present on the LIB-200A and the LIB-400: A Noise Control Module (NCM-1) is built in to reduce common mode noise on the SLC. Local Mode General Alarm Bus support (during a CPU board failure). During a CPU failure, if one of the initiating devices programmed to participate in local mode is activated, the following will occur: - The LIB will execute local mode, - which turns on the red alarm LED on the LIB-400 or LIB-200A, - and signals an alarm state through the general alarm bus (pin 16 of the ICA-4L) to other LIB-400/200As. - The LIB is capable of sensing the general alarm bus, and therefore will execute its own local mode action. - Reduced RF Emissions The use of conduit and shielded cable is no longer required for compliance with FCC Part 15 Class A Radiated Emissions Limits. The use of twisted pair cable is recommended to achieve the maximum wire lengths indicated. The use of shielded cable and/or untwisted cable will reduce the maximum wiring distance.
1-53
LIB-200A
SLC Port A+
SLC Port A-
SLC Port B+
SLC Port BConnect to Earth Ground using supplied cable NOTES: Only one earth ground connection is required on the LIB-400 at either TB1 or TB2. Silkscreen markings on TB2 of the LIB400 vary from the above illustration: twos instead of ones are used, so the markings are +L2A, -L2A, +L2B, and -L2B.
LIB-400
Figure 4.2-2 Loop Interface Boards
Surge Suppression
There are three (3) primary surge protectors that are approved for use with this FACP. DTK-2LVLP-F Diversified Technology Group, Inc. 1720 Starkey Rd. Largo, FL 33771 (727) 812-5000 SLCP-030 EDCO 1805 N.E. 19th Ave. Ocala, FL 34470 (352) 732-3029 PLP-42N Northern Technologies, Inc. 23123 E. Madison Ave. Liberty Lake, WA 99019 (800) 727-9119
Note: For detailed information refer to the installation documentation that was supplied with the unit.
One primary surge protector must be used with each SLC wiring pair whenever SLC wiring runs outside the building. Install primary protection only as shown in this document. Refer to NEC Article 800 and local building code requirements. Additional primary surge suppressors maybe added as required by the NEC. Add these additional suppressors in series with the SLC wiring at the building entry/exit. Wiring connected to the surge suppressor output must remain within the building while wiring connected to the surge suppressor input may be routed outside the building as shown in Building Entry/Exit Connections in Figure 4.2-3.
Suppressor Installation
Mounting is inside the FACP enclosure or in a separate enclosure listed for fire protective signalling use. Locate on an available stud and secure with nut. Unit is connected in series with the SLC Loop to protect the control panel. Provide a common ground to eliminate the possibility of a differential in ground potentials.
1-54
10/22/99
DTK-2LVLP-F Connections
2LV LP -F
SLC
+ + IN OUT
SLC Terminal Block
2LVLPconn3.cdr
Note: Do not connect shield to surge protector or fire panel.
PLP-42N Connections
P L P -4 2 N
SLC Terminal Block SLC

GRND
L4
O U TP U T
L3
IN PU T
L2
L1
L2
L3
L4
PLP-Nconn3.cdr
Note: Use 12 AWG (3.25 mm2) to 18AWG (0.75 mm2) wire with crimp-on connectors to connect the unit's ground terminal to equipment ground. Wire length must be minimized to provide best protection. Do not connect shield (if present) to surge protector or fire panel.
PLP-42N Connections
S L C P -30 SLC
L1
+ +
SLC Terminal Block
SLCP-30conn3.cdr
IN
OUT
Building Entry/Exit Connections

B u ildin g # 2
O U T IN IN O U T
B u ildin g # 1
S u rge S up pres so r O U T IN IN O U T
FA C P
SS-building.cdr
Figure 4.2-3 Surge Supressor/FACP Connections

1-55
Section 4.3 LIB SLC Loop Wiring Requirements

Branch Resistance With the SLC disconnected from the LIB terminals, short the termination point of one branch at a time and measure the DC resistance from the beginning of the channel to the end of that particular branch. The total DC resistance from the LIB-200 panel to branch end cannot exceed 40 ohms. The total DC resistance from the LIB200A panel or the LIB-400 panel to branch end cannot exceed 50 ohms. Repeat this procedure for all remaining branches. Refer to Figure 4.3-1 for Style 4 and Figure 4.3-2 for Style 6. For each channel Add the lengths of all the branches on one SLC Loop Channel. On the LIB-200, this sum cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3048 meters)per channel. On the LIB-200A or the LIB-400, this sum cannot exceed 12,500 feet (3810 meters) per channel. LIB-200: (Branch A) + (Branch B) + (Branch C) + (Branch D) + (Branch E) = 10,000 feet (3048 meters) or less LIB-200A or LIB-400: (Branch A) + (Branch B) + (Branch C) + (Branch D) + (Branch E) = 12,500 feet (3810 meters) or less
Branch B
LIB-400
SLC Loop Channel A Branch A
Branch D
LIB Branch C
Channel A or B
Branch
Branch NOTE: SLC Resistance Measurement When power is removed from the SLC, the positive side of the circuit is opened at each ISO-X isolation module or isolator detector base. To measure the SLC circuit resistance, temporarily place a jumper between Terminals 2 and 4 on each ISO-X while taking measurements. Remember to remove all the jumpers and test all isolator modules when you have finished taking the readings.
THE TOTAL OF ALL BRANCHES ON CHANNEL B: LIB-200 must be less than or equal to 10,000 feet (3048 meters) LIB-200A /LIB-400 must be less than or equal to 12,500 feet (3810 meters) THE TOTAL OF ALL BRANCHES ON CHANNEL A: LIB-200 must be less than or equal to 10,000 feet (3048 meters) LIB-200A /LIB-400 must be less than or equal to 12,500 feet (3810 meters)
Figure 4.3-1 SLC Loop Wiring Requirements (Style 4)

1-56
Channel B
LIB-400
Style 6 SLC Loop
Channel A LIB
When T-Taps are present they each represent a Style 4 branch. These Style 4 branches will not degrade the Style 6 loop and are permissible from an operation standpoint, but they will not comply with the NFPA standard for Style 6 SLC performance.
Total Length of the Style 6 SLC Loop Pair (including any Style 4 branches): LIB-200 - cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3048 meters) LIB-200A/LIB-400 - cannot exceed 12,500 feet (3810 meters)
The total DC resistance from the LIB-200 panel to branch end cannot exceed 40 ohms. The total DC resistance from the LIB-200A panel or the LIB-400 panel to branch end cannot exceed 50 ohms. In a simple Style 6 arrangement, this measurement may be made by disconnecting Channels A and B at the control panel, shorting the two leads at the input of Channel A, and metering the two leads of Channel B.
Channel B
Channel A
When Style 4 branches are present, complete the measurement by opening the short which was placed at the input of Channel A and perform the Style 4 measurement shown in Figure 4.3-1.
NOTE: SLC Resistance Measurement When power is removed from the SLC, the positive side of the circuit is opened at each ISO-X isolation module or isolator detector base. To measure the SLC circuit resistance, temporarily place a jumper between Terminals 2 and 4 on each ISO-X while taking measurements. Remember to remove all the jumpers and test all isolator modules when you have finished taking the readings.
Figure 4.3-2 SLC Loop Wiring Requirements (Style 6)
1-57
LIB Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loops can be wired to meet the requirements of an NFPA Style 4 (refer to Figure 4.3-3), Style 6 (refer to Figure 4.3-4) or Style 7 (refer to Figure 4.3-5) SLC. Pull Stations
2(+)
1(-)
NOTE Refer to Appendix A and installation drawings supplied with each loop device for rating and specification information.
Detectors
LIB
Modules
Connect to chassis via Cable 71073.
Modules Separate T-Tap to other Loop devices
LIB SLC Loop

Earth Ground Channel B (-) no connection Channel B (+) no connection Channel A (-) no connection Channel A (+)
ISO-X
ISO-X
Note: Isolator devices are not required for the Style 4 configuration. See "Device Loading and Isolator Power up". With Style 4 wiring multiple branches can be made at the LIB, each protected by an isolator device. This illustration depicts two independent Style 4 SLC loops. Removal of either of the two isolator modules results in a single Style 4 SLC loop.
All terminals are power-limited
Figure 4.3-3 Typical NFPA Style 4 SLC Loops
1-58
10/22/99
Pull Stations
LIB-400
Connect to chassis via Cable 71073
2(+) 1(-)
LIB SLC Loop Detectors

Earth Ground Channel B (-) no connection Channel B (+) no connection Channel A (-) no connection Channel A (+)
All terminals are power-limited Modules
Figure 4.3-4 NFPA Style 6 LIB SLC Loop

Functions in accordance with NFPA Style 6 SLC NOTE Refer to Appendix A and installation drawings supplied with each loop device for rating and specification information.
1-59
Style 7 Operation By flanking each SLC device with ISO-X isolator modules and/or isolator detector bases, each device is protected from an open or short on the SLC. In Figure 4.3-5 below, the MMX monitor module or XP transponder, the non isolator-based device, and the isolator-based device will continue to function if there is an open or short on the SLC. The isolator-based device pictured below requires only one ISO-X module, as the isolator bases B524B1(A) and B224B1(A) act as isolators. However, if the short circuit occurs on the wiring connected to terminals 2 and 3 of the isolator base, the smoke detector in that base will not be isolated. Therefore, the conduit and ISO-X is installed on this wiring. Refer to the isolator base wiring diagram in the figure.
ISO-X Isolator Module Non-isolator base ISO-X Isolator Module
ISO-X Isolator Module
SSD Isolator Base B524B1(A) or B224B1(A)
Conductors must be in conduit. Isolators must be within 20 feet ( 6.1m) of the addressable device.
MMX Monitor Module or XP Transponder
NO T-TAPPING PERMITTED
20 foot (6.1m) conduit maximum
Channel Channel A B LIB SLC Loop
Style 7 wiring for SSD Isolator Bases B524B1(A) and B224B1(A)
1-60
321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321
Note When more than 100 Isolator Modules/Isolator Bases are connected to an SLC Loop, decrease the 198 address capacity by two addresses for every isolator in excess of 100.
Figure 4.3-5 NFPA Style 7 SLC

Section 4.4 SLC Shield Termination

Shielded twisted pair cable can be used to minimize radiated emissions of radio frequency energy. The use of shielded twisted pair cable is required when using the LIB-200. Terminating shielded twisted pair cable at the cabinet is required for the LIB-200; shielded cable is not recommended for the LIB-200A and LIB-400. Use unshielded twisted pair cable only. Figures 4.4-1 through 4.4-3 illustrate the LIB-200 shield terminations required. Note: The use of shielded or untwisted cable in the LIB-200A and LIB-400 will result in shorter wire distances. If shielded cable is employed with the LIB-200A and LIB-400, the shield should remain unterminated and noncontiguous at each device for best system performance. For a LIB-200 SLC Loop that is not contained in any conduit: Do not allow the shield drain wire to enter the cabinet. Connect the drain wire to the outside of the cabinet via a BX type connector. Maintain the continuity of the shield wire throughout the loop but do not connect to any devices. Cabinet LIB Terminal Block
1 (+) SLC Channel A
2 no connection
3 ( - ) SLC Channel A
Figure 4.4-1 Shield Termination in No Conduit (LIB-200 only)
For a LIB-200 SLC that is contained entirely in conduit: The shield drain wire must be connected to the negative (-) side of the SLC. Do not allow the shield drain wire or the shield foil to touch the cabinet. Make no connections to Terminal 2. Note: For NFPA Style 6 field wiring of the SLC, connect each end of the shield to the negative side of the respective Channel. Chain the shield wire throughout the loop but do not connect to any devices. Cabinet LIB Terminal Block
1 (+) SLC Channel A 2 no connection 3 ( - ) SLC Channel A
Figure 4.4-2 Shield Termination in Full Conduit (LIB-200 only)

1-61
For a LIB-200 SLC that is partially contained in conduit (less than 20 feet {6.1 m}): Do not allow the shield drain wire to enter the cabinet or the conduit. Connect the drain wire to the termination point of the conduit run (such as a single-gang box as illustrated at left). The conduit cannot be longer than 20 feet (6.1 m) total.
LIB Terminal Block 1 (+) SLC Loop Channel A 2 no connection 3 (-) SLC Loop Channel A
Figure 4.4-2 Shield Termination in Partial Conduit (LIB-200 only)
1-62
10/22/99
Section 4.5 The Isolator Module

The Loop Isolator Module, ISO-X (refer to Figures 4.5-1 through 4.5-3), is used to protect critical elements of the SLC from short circuit faults on other branches or sections of the loop.
SLC SLC SLC SLC
Loop Loop Loop Loop
In ( In ( Out Out
- ) +) (- ) (+)
ISO-X
Figure 4.5-1 The Loop Isolator Module (ISO-X)

The ISO-X continuously monitors the circuit by pulsing the coil of an integral relay which is latched on at power up. Continuation of the SLC
SLC Loop
ISO-X
Shorts on this T-tapped branch of an NFPA Style 4 SLC will be isolated from all devices installed on the SLC connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the ISO-X. A short or open on the T-tapped branch will result in loss of communication to the devices on that branch. The Ttapped branch will be isolated from the remainder of the SLC.
T-Tapped Branch off the SLC
Figure 4.5-2 Isolating a Branch of a Style 4 SLC

The ISO-X sees this short and disconnects the faulted branch, effectively isolating the faulted branch from the remainder of the loop (refer to Figure 4.5-3). Once the fault is removed, the ISO-X reapplies power to the loop branch. Figures 4.5-1 through 4.5-3 illustrate the use of ISO-Xs on Style 4 SLCs. For an example of employing ISO-Xs on Class A SLCs (refer to Figure 4.3-5).
SLC Loop
ISO-X
Shorts on the remainder of this NFPA Style 4 SLC will be isolated from all devices installed upstream of the ISO-X.
Remainder of the SLC
Figure 4.5-3 Isolating the Remainder of a Style 4 SLC
1-63
Device Loading and Isolator Power Up Isolator modules are powered from the SLC. The internal relay is a latching-type relay to limit the isolator's power requirements. The contact will open when power is removed. During power up, the relay contact will close when the SLC voltage rises above 7 volts. If too many addressable devices are connected to one isolator branch (ttap) or segment (loop), the isolator will never reach 7 volts and thus remain open (activated) on power up. When no relay or sounder bases are used, a maximum load of 25 addressable devices can be connected to an isolator, or between a pair of isolators and/or isolator bases to insure that the isolators power up correctly. Note that IPX-751 detectors represent an exception, and only two of these detectors constitute a maximum load, not 25. When relay or sounder bases are used between isolator modules or isolator bases, the maximum number of addressable devices in between isolators is seven. Note that the same addressable device restrictions apply to isolator bases.
NOTE During a short circuit fault condition, the control panel will register a trouble (INVALID REPLY) condition for each device on the isolated SLC branch or loop segment.
1-64
10/22/99
Section 4.6 Monitor Modules

The MMX-1, MMX-2 and MMX-101 Monitor Modules are addressable modules that monitor normally open contact, shorting type and alarm initiating devices. The MMX-2 can also monitor conventional two-wire smoke detectors. The MMX-1 and MMX-2 Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) can be wired as an NFPA Style B or Style D Initiating Device Circuits; the MMX-101 Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) can be wired Style B only. There is no limit to the number of contact-type devices installed on a monitor module circuit (See NFPA 72 for possible code imposed limits. See the Device Compatibility document for the maximum number of 2-wire smoke detectors that can be connected to the MMX-2.) Refer to Figures 4.6-3 and 4.6-4 for MMX-1/MMX-2 wiring diagrams. The MMX-1 and MMX-2 Monitor Modules (Figure 4.6-1) SLC Loop Connections Connect the SLC Loop to MMX-1 or MMX-2 terminals 1(-) and 2 (+). The MMX occupies one module address on the SLC Loop. Set the rotary switches on the MMX to the particular SLC address required (each MMX requires a unique module address, 01-99). NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit Connect the alarm initiating devices to a single two-wire circuit. This circuit cannot be T-Tapped or branched in any fashion, and must be terminated across the last device by a listed ELR. Connect the circuit to MMX-1/MMX2 terminals 6 (-) and 7 (+). NFPA Style D Initiating Device Circuit Connect the normally open contacts of the alarm initiating devices as shown in Figure 4.6-4. This circuit cannot be T-Tapped or branched in any fashion. No external ELR is required for Style D wiring. MMX-2 Operating Power The MMX-2 requires connection of a Notifier 24V DC filtered and resettable power supply on Terminals 3(-) and 4(+). This power connection is supervised by the MMX-2. A maximum of 40 MMX-2 modules may be installed on a LIB due to increased power consumption over the MMX-1. Only use 2-wire smoke detectors which are UL compatibility listed. See the Notifier Device Compatibility Document 15378 for a listing of devices.
SLC Loop (-) SLC Loop (+) 24V DC (-) MMX-2 only 24V DC (+) MMX-2 only Style D (-) Style D (+) Style B (+) Style B (-)
Figure 4.6-1 MMX-1 or MMX-2 Monitor Modules

The MMX-101 Monitor Module (Figure 4.6-2) The MMX-101 Monitor Module is an addressable module that is functionally and electrically identical to an MMX-1 Monitor Module (configured for NFPA Style B), but offered in a smaller package for mounting directly in the electrical box of the contact-type device being monitored. Unlike the MMX-1, the MMX-101 does not have an LED indicating polling or alarm condition.
Set the module address with these switches
NOTE For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A.
IDC (-) (Yellow)
SLC Loop (+) (Red) IDC (+) (Violet)
(-) SLC Loop (Black)
NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit Terminate with an End-of-Line Resistor 47K, 1/2-watt (A2143-00)
Figure 4.6-2 MMX-101 Monitor Module

1-65
Figure 4.6-3 illustrates an MMX-1 monitoring normally open contact fire alarm initiating devices that do not require power and an MMX-2 monitoring powered two-wire smoke detectors and a normally open contact alarm initiating device. Refer to Figure 4.6-5 for circuits using four-wire detectors.
NOTES For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A. For connection of the initiating devices, refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions packaged with each device. For more information, refer to the MMX-2 Installation Instructions.
SLC Loop Channel A Supervised and power-limited
Heat Detector
LIB SLC Port A ( - )
Pull Station
MMX-1
LIB SLC Port A (+)
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ -
47K End-of-Line Resistor (A2143-00)
24 VDC Two-wire Smoke Detectors MMX-2
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ -
A-2143-10 3.9K Listed End-ofLine Resistor
Power-limited
UL-listed 24 VDC Filtered Regulated Power Limited Power Supply for Fire Protective Signaling or MPS-24A/E, TB3 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) APS-6R, TB2 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) Terminal 3 (+) and 4 (-)
Figure 4.6-3 NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit
1-66
10/22/99
Figure 4.6-4 illustrates an MMX-1 monitoring normally open contact fire alarm initiating devices that do not require power and an MMX-2 monitoring powered two-wire smoke detectors. Refer to Figure 4.6-6 for circuits using four-wire detectors.
NOTES For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A. For connection of the initiating devices, refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions packaged with each device. For MMX-2 mount the appropriate ELR across terminals 8 and 9. For more information, refer to the MMX-2 Installation Instructions.
SLC Loop Channel A

Supervised and power-limited
Heat Detector
Pull Station
LIB SLC Port A ( - )
MMX-1
LIB SLC Port A (+)
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ -
See third bulleted note above.
24 VDC Two-wire Smoke Detectors
MMX-2
+ -
+ -
+ -
+ -
Power-limited
UL-listed 24 VDC Filtered Regulated Power Limited Power Supply for Fire Protective Signaling or MPS-24A/E, TB3 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) APS-6R, TB2 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) Terminal 3 (+) and 4 (-)
Figure 4.6-4 NFPA Style D Initiating Device Circuit

24V DC Four-Wire Smoke Detector Power Up to one amp for four-wire smoke detectors can be drawn from TB3 terminals 1(+) and 2(-). Power is removed from these terminals during system reset. This 24V DC regulated source is power-limited but must be supervised via an end-of-line Power Supervision Relay (refer to Figures 4.6-5 and 4.6-6).
1-67
*
*47K ELR, 1/2-watt Part Number A2143-00
Red Black
Listed Power Supervision Relay Note: contacts shown in the energized condition.
IDC(+) IDC(-) 24V DC (+)
SLC Channel A
Common (-)
MMX-1
Software Type ID SCON UL listed 24V DC Four-Wire Smoke Detectors

IDC(+) IDC(-) 24V DC (+)
Software Type ID PWRC
CMX
Common (-)
Break tabs The CMX resets power to the detectors. It is not needed for power supplies using resettable smoke detector power. The RA400Z annunciates the reset of smoke detector power. It is optional. WARNING! Observe proper polarity on the RA400Z or device will be damaged.
RA400Z
NOTES Place End-of-Line Resistor in series with supervision relay contacts as shown on last detector in loop. The power supervision relay coil leads must be connected to the last detector base 24V screw terminal. For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A. The CMX shown (when properly programmed) performs the reset function for all smoke detectors connected to the IDC. Maximum of 30 PWRC modules per SLC. Calculation of the maximum allowable resistance in the 24V DC smoke detector power wiring: Rmax = (20.6 - Vom) (N)(Is) + (NA)(Ia) + (Ir)
+ Power-limited
UL listed 24 VDC Regulated Power Limited Power Supply for Fire Protective Signaling or MPS-24A/E, TB3 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) APS-6R, TB2 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) Terminal 3 (+) and 4 ()
where: Rmax- is the maximum Resistance of the 24V wires. Vom - is the minimum operating voltage of the detector or end-of-line relay, whichever is greater, in volts. Nis the total number of detectors on the supply 24V circuit. Is is the detector current in non-fire alarm. NA is the number of detectors on the 24V power circuit which must function at the same time in alarm. Ia is the detector current in alarm. Iris the end-of-line relay current.
Figure 4.6-5 Employing Four-Wire Smoke Detectors (Style B IDC)

All connections are supervised and power limited
1-68
Red Black
Listed Power Supervision Relay Note: contacts shown in the energized condition.
IDC(+) IDC(-)
SLC Channel A
24V DC (+)
Software Type ID SCON
Common (-)
MMX-1
UL listed 24V DC Four-Wire Smoke Detectors
IDC(+)
Software Type IDPWRC
IDC(-) 24V DC (+)
CMX
Common (-)
Break tabs The CMX resets power to the detectors. It is not needed for power supplies using resettable smoke detector power. The RA400Z annunciates the reset of smoke detector power. It is optional. WARNING! Observe proper polarity on the RA400Z or device will be damaged.
NOTES The power supervision relay coil leads must be connected to the last detector base 24V screw terminal. See Appendix A for additional ratings. The CMX shown (when properly programmed) performs the reset function for all smoke detectors connected to the IDC. See Section 4.4. Maximum of 30 PWRC modules per SLC. Calculation of the maximum allowable resistance in the 24V DC smoke detector Power wiring: Rmax = (20.6 - Vom) (N)(Is) + (NA)(Ia) + (Ir)
RA400Z
Power-limited
UL listed 24 VDC Regulated Power Limited Power Supply for Fire Protective Signaling or MPS-24A/E, TB3 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) APS-6R, TB2 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) Terminal 3 (+) and 4 ()
where: Rmax - is the maximum resistance of the 24V wires. Vom - is the minimum operating voltage of the detector or end-of-line relay, whichever is greater, in volts. N - is the total number of detectors on the supply 24V circuit. Is - is the detector current in non-fire alarm. NA - is the number of detectors on the 24V power circuit which must function at the same time in alarm. Ia - is the detector current in alarm. Ir - is the end-of-line relay current.
Figure 4.6-6 Employing Four-Wire Smoke Detectors (Style D IDC)

All connections are supervised and power limited
1-69
Section 4.7 The Control Module

The CMX Control Module is an addressable module that supervises and switches power to a Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). The CMX circuit can be wired as an NFPA Style Y or Style Z NAC. Alternately, the CMX can be employed as a Form-C relay (refer to Figure 4.7-1). Refer to Figures 4.7-2 through 4.7-6 for CMX wiring diagrams. NOTE The CMX refers either to the CMX-1 or CMX-2 through the remainder of this document, unless otherwise noted.
+ SLC Loop (-) SLC Loop (+) Power (-) Power (+) + Alarm polarity shown + NAC (+) Option Class A NAC (-) (Style Z) return NAC (-) Output NAC (+) SLC Loop (-) SLC Loop (+) N.O. Contact Common N.C. Contact
Break tabs
CMX Control Module (NAC)
CMX Control Module (Form-C Relay)
Figure 4.7-1 The CMX Control Module

SLC Loop Connections Connect the SLC Loop to CMX Terminals 1(-) and 2 (+). The CMX occupies one module address on the SLC Loop. Set the rotary switches on the CMX to the particular SLC Loop address required (each CMX must have a unique module address, 01-99). Breaking Tabs To configure a CMX as a Form-C relay, the two tabs must be broken off of the module. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to break off each tab. WARNING! The tabs must be broken before the connection of any power source to the Form-C terminals. Contact Connections Make connections to the common and the normally-open or normally-closed contacts on the CMX as needed. (Refer to Figure 4.7-6 for a wiring diagram.)
1-70
10/22/99
Notification appliance power can be supplied to CMX Control Modules by any one of the supplies illustrated in Figure 4.7-2. This power is unsupervised and must be connected to a Power Supervision Relay wired to a CMX Control Module (refer to Figures 4.7-3 through 4.7-5) or dedicated MMX module using the "MTRB" type ID. When a remote power supply is employed, it must also be supervised.
Shield Drain Wire does not connect to CMX but should continue to the next device
UL Listed 24V DC Filtered Power-limited Power Supply for use with Fire Protective Signaling Systems
Common
+24 VDC
To next CMX or to a Power Supervision Relay at the end of the line (refer to Figures 4.7-3 through 4.7-5).
An auxiliary power supply is needed to power a CMX notification appliance circuit when wiring losses due to long wire runs prevent the use of the MPS-24A/E or APS-6R in the AM2020/AFP1010 Refer to Appendix A and to the Device Compatibility Document. The power supply must have secondary power source (i.e. batteries) with a backup capability equal to the panel's backup (24 or 60 hours).
Remote Supply
24 VDC 3.0 amps (filtered and power-limited)
+ MPS-24A/E
Figure 4.7-2 Providing Power to Control Modules

1-71
CMX
+ + -
CMX
+ + Alarm polarity shown
No End-of-Line relay is required here
Notification Appliance +
* ** Listed Power Supervision Relay
CMX
+ + +
CMX
+ Alarm polarity shown
Notification Appliance +
Power-limited
No End-of-Line relay is required here
*
Listed Power Supervision Relay
TB3-4
+ TB3-3
**
MPS-24A/E
*End-of-Line Resistor, 47K, 1/2-watt (A2143-00) **Contacts shown in energized condition.
NOTE: To provide accurate supervision, the power circuit wires should be broken at terminals 3 and 4 of the CMX and not looped under the terminal hold-down clamp. Any time a power circuit is T-tapped, as seen immediately above the MPS-24A power supply, each 24 VDC power circuit branch must end with a listed power supervision relay.
Figure 4.7-3 Power Distribution

1-72
10/22/99

(Contacts shown in energized position)
*
47K ELR, 1/2-watt (A2143-00)
Alarm polarity shown!
Shield Drain Wire To next device on SLC Loop
SLC LOOP Channel A

LIB Channel
Terminal 3 ( - ) Terminal 1 (+)

_ +
_ +
Common +24 VDC Notification Appliance Power This power source must be power-limited. (Refer to Figure 4-17) Refer to the Device Compatibility Document
Red Black
*Contacts shown in energized position
NOTES To provide accurate supervision, the power circuit wires should be broken at terminals 3 and 4 of the CMX and not looped under the terminal hold-down clamp. Any time a power circuit is T-tapped, each branch must end with a listed power supervision relay. For connection of the notification appliances, refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions packaged with each device. For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A.
Figure 4.7-4 NFPA Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit

Supervised and Power-Limited
1-73
Alarm polarity shown!
Shield Drain Wire + To next device - on SLC Loop SLC LOOP Channel A
+ +
LIB Channel
Terminal 3 ( - ) Terminal 1 (+)
+ +
+ +

Common +24 VDC Notification Appliance Power This power source must be power-limited. (Refer to Figure 4-17) Refer to the Device Compatibility Document
Black Red
(Contacts shown in energized position)
NOTES Each audio/visual power loop must be supervised by a separate Power Supervision Relay. For connection of the notification appliances, refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions packaged with each device. For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A.
Figure 4.7-5 NFPA Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit

Supervised and Power-Limited
1-74
10/22/99
SLC Loop Channel A Power Limited and supervised. Shield Drain Wire
+ To next device - on SLC Loop

9 1 2 3
LIB Terminal 3 ( - ) Terminal 1 ( + )
(-) (+) CMX
8 7 6 5
Common Normally Closed Contact
Normally Open Contact
Tabs
Break off both tabs to enable Form-C operation WARNING! The tabs must be broken before the connection of any power source to the Form-C terminals (this is a permanent modification).
Figure 4.7-6 Using the CMX as a Form-C Relay

See Appendix A for device ratings.
Note: The circuit is supervised and power-limited. For UL listed and compatible devices, refer to the Device Compatibility Document.
Note: contacts shown in the energized condition.

Alarm Polarity Shown
Figure 4.7-7 Typical APS-6R Wiring to a CMX Module

1-75
Section 4.8 The Addressable Manual Pull Station

The NBG-12LX and BGX-101L are addressable manual pull stations with a key-lock reset feature (refer to Figure 4.8-1).
Figure 4.8-1 Addressable Manual Pull Station Installation

1) Connect the SLC Loop to the pull station. If additional devices are to be connected to the SLC Loop after the pull station, use the second pair of screw terminals to continue the loop. 2) The NBG-12LX and BGX-101L are factory preset with address "00". Set the address for the pull station by turning or using a screwdriver to turn the rotary address switches on the back of the unit to the appropriate settings. Each pull station must have a unique module address. Refer to Figure 4.8-2. Also refer to the NBG-12LX document listed in the related documentation chart at the beginning of this manual. NOTE During programming of the AM2020/AFP1010, this module requires software type "MPUL".
SLC Out
1
ST R IP GA U G E
SLC In
-+
Note: SLC wires should be installed under tabs, but are shown above them in this illustration to show the terminal connections.
+ -
NBG-12LX (back view)
75 2)6"""''
BGX-101L (back view)
Figure 4.8-2 Wiring Addressable Pull Stations

Supervised and power-limited. For SLC Loop ratings, refer to Appendix A.
1-76
10/22/99
Section 4.9 Intelligent Detectors

These intelligent, addressable detectors provide analog information to the control panel, which processes this analog information and continually makes decisions on the alarm, maintenance, or normal status of each device. Each detector head mounts to a B501,B710LP or BX-501 Base, B501BH sounder Base, B524BI or B224BI Isolator Base, or B524RB or B224RB Relay Base with sounder for ease of installation or replacement. Each detector responds to an SLC address that is set in the head via built-in rotary switches. An integral LED may be programmed to blink when in communication with the control panel and can be latched on when the unit enters an alarm condition. A different address is required for each detector (01-99) on an SLC. The panel distinguishes between detectors and modules so a detector and a module may be set to the same address without conflict. SDX-551/SDX-551TH An Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector that provides analog measurements of the optical smoke level in the chamber to the control panel. The SDX-551TH is an Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector with fixed thermal. SDX-751 The SDX-751 is a low-profile intelligent photoelectric smoke detector.
CPX-551 An Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector that measures the level of combustion products in the chamber using the ionization principle and provides this measurement to the control panel.
CPX-751 The CPX-751 is a low-profile intelligent ionization smoke detector.
IPX-751 The IPX-751 is an intelligent addressable, multi-sensing, low-profile smoke detector. The AM2020/AFP1010 does not perform drift compensation on this detector. FDX-551/FDX-551R The FDX-551 (135 degree Fahrenheit fixed temperature) and the FDX551R (Rate-of-Rise) Intelligent Thermal Sensors takes the temperature and provides it to the control panel. RA400Z A Remote Single LED Annunciator that can be wired directly to an addressable detector for annunciation of that detector's alarm status.
DHX-501 and DHX-502 Intelligent Detector Duct Housings designed to sample air currents passing through ducts and allows for detection of smoke in HVAC ducts. They will accommodate either the CPX-551 or the SDX-551. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the control panel.
WARNING!
The control panel will only operate with Notifier intelligent addressable devices installed.
1-77
Section 4.10 Smoke Detector Installation

The B501, BX-501, B210LP, and B501BH provide the connection between the control panels SLC Loop and SDX-551/551H/551HT/751, CPX-551/751, the IPX-751 and the FDX-551/551R intelligent detectors. Installation (refer to Figure 4.10-1) 1) Connect the SLC Loop to the base, Terminal 1 (-) and Terminal 2 (+). 2) If employing an RA400Z Remote LED Annunciator, connect the RA400Z positive terminal to base Terminal 3 and the negative terminal to base Terminal 1. 3) Before installing the appropriate intelligent detector head, set a unique detector SLC address on the head with a small flat-blade screwdriver. Mark this address on the base and on the head. 4) Fit the head over the base and applying light pressure, turn the head into the base until connection is made. 5) The sensor base includes a tamper-proof feature that, when activated, prevents the removal of the sensor without the use of a tool. Refer to the installation instructions, included with each base, for further details. The smoke detector base is supervised and power-limited. Refer to Appendix A for SLC ratings. Wiring examples of the B524BI/B224BI Isolator Base and the B524RB Relay Base are detailed in Figures 4.10-2 and 4.10-3, respectively. When no relay or sounder bases are used between a pair of B524BI(A) and/or B224BI(A) isolator bases, a maximum load of 25 addressable devices can be connected to insure that the isolators power up correctly. When relay or sounder bases are used between isolator bases, the maximum number of addressable devices in between the isolator bases is seven.
+
to next device
Channel (+) SLC Loop Channel ( -)
Channel (+)
+ SLC
Channel ( - )
to next device on SLC Loop
LIB
- SLC
Common
+ 24VDC
MPS-24A, FCPS, or APS-6R power supply RA400Z Remote LED Annunciator
B501 or BX-501 Detector Base
B501BH Detector Base
Figure 4.10-1 Wiring the Smoke Detector Base

1-78
Class A (Style 6) Figure 4.10-2 Wiring the B524BI(A)/B224BI(A) Isolator Base
Listed Compatible Control Panel
Class A (Style 6) Figure 4.10-3 Wiring the B524RB Relay Base

1-79
1-80
ISO-X
1 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5
CMX
1 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5
MMX
1 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5
MMX-101
BGX-101L ISO-X
1 2 9 8 7 6 5
LIB-400
3 4
SLC Loop Maximums: 99 Module Addresses 99 Detector Addresses 40 ohms total loop resistance (LIB-200) 50 ohms total loop resistance (LIB-200A/LIB-400) 10,000 feet (3048 meters) of loop (LIB-200) 12,500 feet (3810 meters) of loop (LIB-200A/LIB-400)
To next device on Channel A

AMSLC2a
BX-501 Base Figure 4.10-4 Two Independent Style 4 SLC Loops
XPP
Section 4.11 The XP Series Transponder

The XP Series Transponder provides the AM2020/AFP1010 system with an efficient multiplex subsystem capability and stand-alone operation in case of failure. The XP Transponder communicates directly with the control panel's CPU along the LIB communications loop. The XP Transponders are extremely effective in both high-rise and low-rise buildings where power losses over long wiring distances dictate the use of remote control equipment, amplifiers or audio/visual power supplies. Each XP Transponder may contain up to three expansion modules, each with up to eight initiating or notification circuits, or control relays. Each XP Transponder can occupy up to 27 SLC addressable points (of the module type). To the AM2020/AFP1010, XP Transponder circuits appear as individual monitor or control modules. BE-XP Transponder Starter Complement (Power-limited) The BE-XP includes the XPP-1 Transponder Processor Module, an XPDP dress panel (refer to Figure 4.11-1), a CHS-4 chassis, all required cables, and instructions. The XPP-1 module provides two field-programmable dual Form-C relays and one programmable addressable monitor point.
XP
SERIES
Figure 4.11-1 XP Dress Panel and XPP-1 Module

XP Dress Panel (XPDP)
TRANSPONDER
XPP-1 Module
1-81
XPC-8 Control Module (Power-limited) Provides eight Class B or four Class A notification appliance circuits. For audio evacuation applications, the XPC-8 can drive eight speaker circuits Style Y (Class B) or four Style Z (Class A), or can be alternately configured to drive fireman's telephone circuits. XPM-8/XPM-8L Monitor Module (Power-limited) Provides eight Style B (Class B) or four Style D (Class A) initiating device circuits. Supports conventional two wire smoke detectors and normally-open contact devices such as pull stations, waterflow and supervisory switches, and 4-wire smoke detectors; XPM-8L supports contact devices and Style B wiring only. XPR-8 Relay Module (May be power-limited or nonpower-limited depending on relay connection) Provides eight form-C relays. The XPR-8 may be configured to provide four dual form-C relays for use in dual channel audio selection applications. For more information, refer to XP Series Transponder System Manual.
1-82
10/22/99
Section Five Serial Communications

5.1 Optional Serial Interface Boards
The AM2020/AFP1010 uses serial communication to move data between printers, CRT terminals and annunciators. The various components used are described here. Two optional serial interface boards are available for the AM2020/AFP1010. Only one may be used in the system, and the particular board chosen depends on the specific needs of the installation. Refer to Figure 5.1-3. SIB-2048A The SIB-2048A has two printer and two terminal serial interfaces. The first printer interface supports a PRN Fire Protective Signaling System Printer. The second printer interface is intended for connection to UL 1950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment printers. The first CRT interface is for use with the CRT or Fire Protective Signaling System listed terminal. The second CRT interface is intended for connection to UL 1950 terminals. The SIB-2048A ACS interface is electrically isolated. Devices connected to the annunciator control interface may be used to activate modules (points) or display up to 2048 points/zones. SIB-NET The SIB-NET contains all of the features of the SIB-2048A. When used with a Media Interface Board (MIB), the SIB-NET can also communicate with NOTIFIRENET. This allows the AM2020/ AFP1010 to transmit alarm and trouble events through the network to other network nodes for display and recording. The network allows the NRT/INA to perform reset, acknowledge, and signal silence functions at the AM2020/AFP1010. The SIB-NET replaces SIB-232, SIB-2048, and SIB-2048A in existing systems which later require connection to NOTIFIRENET. The SIB-NET supports all features of the SIB-2048A including ACS annunciators, printers, and CRTs.
WARNING!
The entire network must contain the same version of NOTIFIRENET software. Improper system operation will result if the versions are not the same. All software part numbers are not compatible with each other. Improper mixing of software part numbers can compromise life safety functions. If unsure about the compatibility of a particular software combination, consult the factory. PRN Printers UL Fire Protective Signaling System listed printer employing EIA-232 serial interface. CRT Terminals UL Fire Protective Signaling System listed terminal employing EIA-232 serial interface and Notifier protocol. Cabling and Connections Male DB-25 connectors (Figure 5.1-1) are supplied with remote printers and display terminals. Use these connectors to wire the interface between the peripherals and the Serial Interface Board (SIB) as illustrated in Figures 5.2-1, 5.3-1, and 5.3-2.
Male DB-25 Connector (solder-cup view)
Figure 5.1-1 Male DB-25 Connector

1-83
Shield Terminations Wiring to the display monitors, remote annunciators, other peripherals, and printers must be twisted shielded pairs. Refer to Figure 5.1-2 for pair connections illustrations.
SHLDTRM.CDR
Figure 5.1-2 Guidelines for Terminating the Shield
1-84
10/22/99
To ICA-4L
EIA-485 Reference Earth Ground EIA-485 (+) EIA-485 (-) EIA-485 (+)
P3 Connections Terminals 1-4: Provide wiring for one PRN printer to this unsupervised circuit. Terminals 5-8: Provide connection to the Keltron VS4095/ 5 printer or any UL EDP-listed printer. Connection is not supervised. EDP listed printers serve in an ancillary capacity only. Terminals 9-12: Provide connection for 125 CRTs to this supervised circuit. Terminals 13-16: Provide connection to UL EDP-listed display monitors. Devices are not supervised and serve in an ancillary capacity only.
EIA-485 (-) EIA-232 Reference Transmit to Printer EIA-232 Reference Receive from Printer EIA-232 Reference Transmit to AUX Printer EIA-232 Reference Ready/Busy from Keltron Printer EIA-232 Reference Transmit to CRT EIA-232 Reference Receive from CRT EIA-232 Reference Transmit to AUX Monitor EIA-232 Reference CTS from AUX Monitor
Figure 5.1-3 SIB-NET/SIB-2048A Terminal Designations
1-85
Section 5.2 The CRT-2 Terminal

The CRT-2 Terminal with keyboard features an 80-column, 25-line display. Function keys allow all control panel commands to be executed from the keyboard. Since the system control function keys (Acknowledge, Signal Silence, and Reset) are not protected against unauthorized use by key switch or password, in order to comply with the UL listing and applicable NFPA standards, the keyboard should be disconnected from the CRT-2 and locked in a secure location when not being used for programming/troubleshooting of the system, or the modem function should be enabled in System Programming to prevent the operation of the system control function keys.. (Refer to the TPI-232 Manual, Document 50372, for additional CRT-2 options.) The keyboard may remain connected when the system is configured and operated in compliance with the NFPA standard on Proprietary Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems and the CRT-2 is located in the Supervising Station. No keyboard may be connected to any remote CRT-2 unless the modem function is enabled in System Programming. Primary and Secondary Power The CRT-2 requires 120-240 VAC, 50/60Hz primary power. A secondary power source (battery backup) is not provided; the use of a separate Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS), UL listed for Fire Protective Signaling is recommended. A UPS is required for NFPA 72 Proprietary Protected Premises Receiving Unit applications. Electrical Specifications CRT-2 90 - 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz 0.5 - 0.2 A
Voltage: Frequency: Current:
Installation Connection between the AM2020/AFP1010 and the CRT-2 is provided through an EIA-232 interface on the Serial Interface Board (refer to Figure 5.2-1). A custom cable must be assembled for connection to the CRT-2 EIA port. Additional CRT-2s are connected with installer provided cables (AUX on first CRT-2 to EIA port on second CRT-2, etc.). Refer to Figure 5.3-1 for wiring instructions. Multiple Terminals The AM2020/AFP1010 will support up to 25 terminals installed on the EIA-232 circuit of the Serial Interface Board. Each CRT-2 is shipped from the factory with a keyboard. This keyboard is used to program the control panel and can only be used on one CRT-2 installed in the chain. The keyboard must either be removed or locked after programming (except NFPA 72 Proprietary Protected Premises and Central Station Receiving Units, where the keyboard must remain installed and functional) unless the modem function is enabled in System Programming. NOTE The CRT-2 is factory programmed.
PAR
SER2-AUX SER1-EIA
The PAR (Parallel), AUX, and EIA ports are located on the back of the CRT Monitor.
CRT Function Keys The function keys on the CRT are labeled with special AM2020/AFP1010 commands. These keys function identical to the keys on the DIA. For a description of these commands, refer to the Operating Chapter.
1-86
10/22/99
50 feet (15.24 meters) typical Wiring distance limited by cable capacitance. See EIA-232E standard.
SIB-2048A or SIB-NET
CRT with Keyboard

One maximum - If using the CRT-2, the keyboard may be located remotely with any CRT-2 in the chain. If using the CRT-1, the CRT with keyboard must be first in the chain and must be in same room as the AM2020/AFP1010. SIB (Connector P3) Twisted Pair Twisted Pair 9 10 11 12 EIA-232 Reference Transmit to CRT EIA-232 Reference Receive from CRT
Twisted Pair nc
Twisted Pair
to AUX Port of CRT
to EIA Port of CRT with keyboard
nc
to EIA Port of next CRT
CRT without keyboard

Up to 24 maximum in chain. 50 feet (15.24 meters) maximum (typical) between CRTs.
Figure 5.2-1 CRT to SIB Connections
NOTES Outputs are power limited (for device/circuit ratings, refer to Appendix A). Connections must be made with overall foil/braided-shield twisted pair cable. Apply power to the CRTs prior to start-up of the system, beginning with the last CRT in the chain. A total of 25 CRTs may be installed. Only one keyboard (shipped with each CRT) may be used in the entire system and it may be installed with any CRT in a chain. For all applications EXCEPT NFPA 72 Proprietary Protected Premises Receiving Units, the keyboard is used only to program the control panel and must be removed or kept in a locked enclosure after programming the system unless the modem function is enabled in System Programming.
1-87
Section 5.3 Remote Printers

The AM2020/AFP1010 can employ PRN Remote Printers. This printer provides a hard-copy printout of all status changes within the system and timestamps the printout with the current time-of-day and date. The PRN provides 80 columns of data on standard 9 inch by 11 inch tractor-feed paper. Installation Remote printers require 120 VAC, 50/60Hz primary power. A secondary power source (battery backup) is not provided; the use of a separate Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) 50 watt minimum, UL listed for Fire Protective Signaling is recommended. A UPS is required for NFPA 72 Proprietary Protected Premises Receiving Unit applications. Connection between the control panel and PRN is provided through an EIA-232 interface on the Serial Interface Board. An installer provided cable must be assembled for connection to the printer's EIA-232 port. Refer to Figure 5.3-2 for wiring instructions. Using a special print feature, the PRN allows all information programmed into the panel to be printed out (including system configuration and addressable device parameters).
NOTE The PRN is factory programmed.
Printer Configuration Refer to the documentation supplied with the PRN for instructions on the printers menu controls. Set the printers options as follows:
L/R ADJUST: FONT: LPI: ESC CHARACTER: BIDIRECTIONAL COPY: CG-TAB: COUNTRY: AUTO CR: LANGUAGE: AUTO TEAR: COLOR OPTION: FORMLEN: LINES: STANDARD: CPI: SKIP: EMULATE: I/O: BUFFER: SERIAL: BAUD: FORMAT: PROTOCOL: CHARACTER SET: S1. ZERO: AUTO LF: MENLOCK: PAPER: BIN 1: BIN 2: SINGLE: PUSH TRA: PULL TRA: PAP ROLL: PAPOPT: 0 HS DRAFT 6 CPI ESC ON GRAPHIC E-USA ASCII OFF ENGLISH 1S NOT INSTALLED 6 LPI=60 EXECUTIVE 10.5" 10 CPI 0.5" EPSON 36K FOR PRN-4 40K FOR PRN-5 2400 7 BIT, EVEN, 1 STOP XON/XOFF STANDARD ON OFF ALL 12/72" 12/72" 12/72" 12/72" 12/72" 12/72" NO
PRN Remote Printer
50 feet (15.24 meters) (typical) Wiring distance limited by cable capacitance. See EIA-232E standard.
SIB (Connector P3) Twisted Pair 1 2 3 4 EIA-232 Reference Transmit to Printer EIA-232 Reference Receive From Printer
Twisted Pair
nc
Plug this DB-25 connector into the EIA-232 Port of the printer.
NOTES Outputs are power limited but not supervised. Make connections with overall foil/braided-shield twisted pair cable. Near Letter Quality (NLQ) mode cannot be used on this printer.
Figure 5.3-1 Remote Printer to SIB Connections

1-88
Keltron Printer Model VS4095/5
50 feet (15.24 meters) maximum (typical) Wiring distance limited by cable capacitance. See EIA-232E standard.
SIB Connector P3 (Power-limited)

Twisted Pair nc EIA-232 Reference 5 Transmit to Printer 6 EIA-232 Reference 7 Ready/Busy 8 from Printer
Twisted Pair
Plug this DB-25 connector into the EIA-232 Port of the printer.
Main Power Supply
MPS-24A:
TB3- 3 (+) and TB3-4 (-)
Power-limited
DC IN -
+ DC IN
Keltron Remote Printer Model VS4095/5
Figure 5.3-2 Keltron Printer Connections

NOTES Outputs are power limited and are not supervised. Connections must be made with overall foil/braided-shield twisted paired cable suitable for EIA-232 applications. The SIB can employ two printers. Set the DIP switches as follows:
SP1-1 SP1-2 SP1-3 SP1-4 SP1-5 SP1-6 SP1-7 SP1-8 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF SP2-1 SP2-2 SP2-3 SP2-4 SP2-5 SP2-6 SP2-7 SP2-8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
1-89
Section 5.4 Annunciator Modules

ACM-16AT* The Annunciator Control Module-16AT contains 16 red alarm and 16 yellow trouble LEDs, 16 momentary keypad switches for controlling each point, a system trouble LED, an ON LINE/POWER LED, and a local piezo sounder with a silence/acknowledge switch for audible indication of alarm and trouble conditions at each annunciator. AEM-16AT* The Annunciator Expander Module 16AT expands the ACM-16AT by 16 annunciator points. Up to three of these expander modules can be supported by an ACM-16AT, to a maximum of 64 annunciator points. The ACM-32A* The Annunciator Control Module-32A contains 32 red alarm LEDs, a system trouble LED, an ON LINE/ POWER LED, and a local piezo sounder with a silence/acknowledge switch for audible indication of alarm and trouble conditions at each annunciator. AEM-32A* The Annunciator Expander Module-32A expands the ACM-32A by 32 annunciator points. One expander module can be supported by an ACM-32A, providing a maximum of 64 points.
*Additional models exist that have different letter designations for different color LEDs: however, all functions described are consistent for all models. For more details on the Annunciator Control System (ACS), refer to the ACS Manual.
The LDM-32 The LDM-32 Lamp Driver Annunciator Module provides 32 alarm or 16 alarm and 16 trouble lamp driver outputs, corresponding to 32 annunciator points which can be connected to external devices such as a custom graphic annunciator. When configured to provide 16 alarm and 16 trouble outputs, 16 switch inputs are available for control of system functions such as signal silence, system reset, and control module activation. The LDM-E32 The Lamp Driver Annunciator Expander Module LDM-E32 expands the LDM-32 by 32 annunciator points (maximum of 64 points). The LDM-R32 The LDM-R32 Relay Expander Module LDM-R32 provides the LDM-32 or LDM-E32 with 32 dry Form-A (normally open) contacts. The relay module replaces the lamp driver outputs with relay outputs; one LDM-R32 for each LDM-32 or LDM-E32. For more details on the LDM-32 Series Lamp Drivers, refer to the LDM Manual.
SCS-8** The Smoke Control Station (SCS-8) module uses eight groups of four annunciator points for fan shutdown control or other heating, ventilation or air conditioning functions. SCE-8 The Smoke Control Expander (SCE8) is used to expand the SCS-8 by an additional eight groups of four annunciator points. Only one expander can be used per SCS-8.
LOCAL ACKNOWLEDGE/ LAMP TEST
ALL AUTO MANUAL
ON
ON AUTO OFF TROUBLE
FAN FLOOR 1
AUTO OFF TROUBLE
EXHAUST FAN AHU FLOOR FLOOR 5 1
ON
ON AUTO OFF TROUBLE
FAN FLOOR 2
AUTO OFF TROUBLE
FAN FLOOR 6
ON
ON AUTO OFF TROUBLE
FAN FLOOR 3
AUTO OFF TROUBLE
FAN FLOOR 7
ON
ON
FAN FLOOR 4
AUTO OFF TROUBLE
AUTO OFF TROUBLE
FAN FLOOR 8
SCS-8L** The Smoke Control Lamp Driver Station (SCS-8L) module uses eight groups of four annunciator points for fan shutdown control or other heating, ventilation or air conditioning functions. Must be mounted in custom graphic annunciator panel. SCE-8L The Smoke Control Expander (SCE-8L) is used to expand the SCS-8L by an additional eight groups of four annunciator points. Only one expander can be used per SCS-8L. Must be mounted in custom graphic annunciator panel. For more details on the SCS Smoke Control System, refer to the SCS Manual. ** The SCS-8 and SCS-8L firmware has been updated in conjunction with Software Release M2.8. The new SCS firmware is not backward compatible with older revisions of software.
1-90
R-120 resistor
Figure 5.4-1 EIA-485 to SIB Connections

Refer to Appendix A for EIA-485 circuit ratings and limitations. NOTE If the SIB is not the first device on the EIA-485 circuit, set SW1 on the SIB to the ''out'' position. The EIA-485 Reference (P5-1) for the SIB must be connected to any ACS device which is not within the same cabinet. Connect P5-1 of the SIB to: AMG-1 at P4-6 ACM-16AT at TB1-4 LDM-32 at TB1-4 NIB-96 or AMG-1/E using an MPS-24A remote from the SIB, connect to TB2 terminal 2 on the MPS-24A SCS-8/L at TB1-4 LCD-80 at P1-4 RPT-485W Reference A at TB1-5 RPT-485W Reference B at TB2-5 RPT-485WF Reference A at TB1-5
1-91
Section Six Standard-Specific Requirements

The Notifier AM2020/AFP1010 is an expandable multiplex Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) designed for use in commercial, industrial, and institutional applications. These panels meet the requirements for service under the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards outlined in this chapter. The minimum system components required for compliance with the appropriate standard are listed in each section. Each system requires (at a minimum) the following equipment: Cabinet (CAB-3 Series) BE Basic Equipment Package (BE-2020N for the AM2020; BE-1010N for the AFP1010) containing the Central Processor Unit (CPU-2020 for the AM2020; CPU-2 for the AFP1010), Display Interface Assembly (the DIA-2020 for the AM2020; DIA-1010 for the AFP1010), Interconnect Assemblies (ICA-4L), BP-3 Battery Panel and cables. MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply and batteries (refer to primary power requirements). One of the following Loop Interface Boards: LIB-200, LIB-200A, or LIB-400. Initiating Devices - MMX Monitor Modules, XP5-M Transponder Modules, manual pull stations, heat detectors, and Intelligent Detectors such as the SDX-551/751, FDX-551, CPX-551/751, and IPX-751. In addition, each NFPA standard requires the following specific equipment: UL 916 AM2020/AFP1010 installations requiring UL 916 Signal System Unit Category UDTZ or UL 864 Process Management Category QVAX listings must be installed according to the following requirements: Connect noncritical process management signals to the AM2020/AFP1010 using shorting or opening contact devices on monitor module points (MMX-1, MMX-101, XPM-8, or XPM-8L). Use software type "MTRB". NFPA 72 Protected Premises (Local) Fire Alarm Systems CMX Control Module installed on SLC Loop 1 and set to module address 96. This unit must be installed as outlined in Figures 4.7-2 through 4.7-6 (notification appliances). NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip. CMX Control Module installed on Loop 1 and set to module address "97." Power Supervision Relay. These items must be installed as outlined in Figure 6.1-1. NFPA 72 Remote Supervising Station Fire Alarm System and NFPA 72 Central Station Fire Alarm Systems (Protected Premises Unit) Initiating Devices - MMX Monitor Modules, XP5-M Transponder Modules, manual pull stations, heat detectors, and Intelligent Detectors such as the SDX-551/751, FDX-551, CPX-551/751, and the IPX-751. For applications not requiring security functions, refer to The UDACT Manual. For security applications, refer to Chapter 4 of this document. NOTE The use of a DACT (NFPA 72 Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems) is not permitted when one or more of the following are present in the system: XP Transponder with separate power supply, AA-120/E, AA-100/E, AA-30/E or a second (remote) MPS-24A or MPS-24AE power supply.
1-92
10/22/99
NFPA 72 Proprietary Supervising Station Fire Alarm System PROTECTED PREMISES SYSTEM NUMBER ONE (refer to Figure 6.4-1): Transmitter - Network Interface Board (NIB-96). PROTECTED PREMISES SYSTEM NUMBER TWO (refer to Figure 6.4-2): The Receiving Unit is an AM2020/AFP1010 with an MMX-1 or MMX-101 Monitor Module for receipt of fire alarms and one MMX-1 or MMX-101 Monitor Module for receipt of trouble signals from the Protected Premises Unit. PROTECTED PREMISES SYSTEM NUMBER THREE - UDACT (refer to Note 1.) Transmitter - UDACT. Not suitable for security applications. (refer to The UDACT Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter manual). NFPA 72 Central Station Receiving and Proprietary Protected Premises Receiving Units (refer to Notes 1. and 2.) CRT Video Display Terminal with Keyboard, PRN Printer, and an Uninterruptable Power Supply listed for Fire Protective Signaling Use. For use with Systems Number One and Two. For System Number Three applications, refer to The UDACT Manual. This unit must be installed in accordance with the following requirements: Monitor modules located within the protected premises which are responsible for supervising the state of the protected premises control unit may be programmed for Tracking (non-latching) operation. Notification appliances and control relays will "follow" the tracking devices programmed to activate them. Once a tracking device input circuit is restored to normal, the fire alarm condition clears from that device, all output devices assigned to the tracking device will return to their non-fire alarm state. This action will occur without activation of the system reset button. The display terminal CRT and printer must be located in the same room as the AM2020/AFP1010. The display terminal CRT and printer must be powered by an Uninterruptable Power Supply UL listed for Fire Protective Signaling. This power source must be supervised by the control panel. The keyboard connected to the display terminal must not be removed or made inaccessible at any time. Loop Interface Board Requirements: LIB-200 10,000 feet (3048 meters) at 12 AWG (3.25 mm) maximum distance between the Central Station/Receiving Unit and the NIB-96 or MMXs. 12,500 feet (3810 meters) at 12 AWG (3.25 mm) maximum distance between the Central Station/Receiving Unit and the NIB-96 or MMXs. 12,500 feet (3810 meters) at 12 AWG (3.25 mm) maximum distance between the Central Station/Receiving Unit and the NIB-96 or MMXs.
NOTES 1. The use of a DACT (NFPA-72 Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems) is not permitted when one or more of the following are present in the system: SIB-NET, XP Transponder with separate power supply, AA-120/E, AA-100/E, AA30/E or a second (remote) MPS-24A or MPS-24AE power supply. 2. All LIBs are power-limited. If the wiring connected to the LIB-200 leaves the building it must be in conduit. It can not exceed 1000 meters (1093 yards), must not cross any power lines, and must not be in the vicinity of any high voltage. These outdoor wiring restrictions do not apply to the LIB-200A or the LIB-400. Refer to Section 4.2 of this chapter and the Device Compatibility Document listed in the Related Documentation Chart of this manual for information on surge suppressors approved for use with this FACP.
1-93
LIB-200A
LIB-400
Section 6.1 NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems

For connection of initiating devices and modules in this system, refer to Figures 4.6-2 through 4.6-6. This application is not suitable for separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory or trouble conditions. For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A.
NOTE During programming, NFPA menu option "72B" must be chosen.
Braided-shield/Drain Wire + To next device - on SLC Loop
This CMX must be programmed as: Software Type ID GAS Address L1M97 SLC LOOP Channel A off Loop Interface Board Number 1
CMX P2
Do not break tabs!
Fire Alarm polarity shown! White Wire (Contacts shown in energized position)
MBT-1
Brown Wire
LIB-200 LIB-200A LIB-400

24V DC Common
Red Wire Black Wire Listed Power Supervision Relay
Connect wires to two red terminals on box
NOTE 10 ohms maximum loop resistance wiring from power supply to municipal box.
Gamewell Model M34-56 Local Energy Municipal Box
MPS-24A
Figure 6.1-1 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System

(Fire Alarm Signal Transmission) NOTE Wiring between the MBT-1 and the Municipal Box cannot exceed 1000 meters (1093 yards), it must not cross any power lines and must not be in the vicinity of any high voltage.
1-94
10/22/99
Section 6.2 Generating Event-Pending Signals at a Remote Location
Printer
PRN
Uninterruptable Power Supply

UL Listed for Fire Protective Signaling Must be supervised by control panel
CRT with keyboard. Do NOT remove or lock up keyboard.
Control Module (CMX) programmed for Software Type ID "TPND". This module will be activated for all pending trouble conditions. The module is silenced upon acknowledgment of all troubles.
Spectralert Horn used to signal a pending trouble condition. Select a sound (via jumper clips) that is separate and distinct from any alarm signal in the installation. The sounder must be installed in the same room as the CRT with keyboard.
Control Module (CMX) programmed for Software Type ID "APND". This module will be activated for all pending alarm conditions. The module is silenced upon acknowledgment of all alarms.
Spectralert Horn/Strobe used to signal a pending alarm condition. Select a sound (via jumper clips) that is separate and distinct from the trouble signal selected above. The sounder must be installed in the same room as the CRT with keyboard.
NOTES When terminal supervision has been selected, the terminal itself will beep repeatedly while any state change is awaiting acknowledgment. For field wiring, refer to Figure 4.7-3 Power Distribution for CMX Control Modules. Any number of the event-pending module types may be used in the system. If individual signals for alarm and trouble are not desired, one control module (CMX) with one listed notification appliance can be used to indicate both alarm and/or trouble pending. Program this module for Software Type ID "GPND".
1-95
Section 6.3 Supervising an Uninterruptable Power Supply

All connections are supervised and power limited. The MMX-1 Software Type ID "MTRB" may be used to monitor either normally closed or normally open supervisory contacts, as illustrated in Figure 6.3-1(A). An open or a short condition on the circuit will produce the message "POINT TROUBLE" on the display. Figure 6.3-1(B) depicts the MMX-1 Software Type ID "MTRB" used to monitor Supervising the Normally Closed Contacts of an Uninterruptable Power Supply with a CRT-2 Terminal. NOTE The CRT-2 must be Revision H or Higher.
A
SLC Loop + -
Type ID "MTRB"
MMX-1
Type ID "MTRB"
Uninterruptable Power Supply UL Listed for Fire Protective Signaling with normally closed supervisory contacts
Do not break tabs!
SLC Loop + -
Type ID "MTRB"
MMX-1
Type ID "MTRB"
Uninterruptable Power Supply UL Listed for Fire Protective Signaling with normally open supervisory contacts.
Do not break tabs!
ELR 47K, 1/2-watt Part Number A2143-00
Figure 6.3-1 Uninterruptable Power Supply

1-96
Section 6.4 NFPA 72 Proprietary Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems

Fire Alarm, Security Alarm, and Trouble Signal Transmission
All LIBs are power-limited. If the wiring connected to the LIB-200 leaves the building it must be in conduit. It can not exceed 1000 meters (1093 yards), must not cross any power lines, and must not be in the vicinity of any high voltage. These outdoor wiring restrictions do not apply to the LIB-200A or the LIB-400. Refer to Section 4.2 of this manual and the Device Compatibility Document listed in the Related Documentation Chart of this manual for information on surge suppressors approved for use with this FACP. Refer to Figures 6.4-1 and 6.4-2. Table 6.41 is a minimal configuration for a NIB-96 with base SLC address=01 and may be used when programing the NIB-96. For further information, refer to the NIB-96 Network Interface Board Manual.
Master Software Type ID MON not used CON not used SARM SSYM NOA CON Master SLC Address L1M1 not used L1M3 not used L1M5 L1M6 L1M7 L1M8 Slave Annunciator Address A6P1 A6P2 A6P3 A6P4 A6P5 A6P6 A6P7 A6P8 Slave Software Type ID AAST AMON ARST AMON AMON AMON AMON ACON Function General Trouble not used Slave Reset not used Security Alarm (typical) Security Tamper (typical) Non-alarm Input (typical) Control Output (typical)
Table 6.4-1 NIB-96 (Minimal Configuration)
1-97
EIA-485 Loop OUT To additional EIA-485 devices, if installed, or 120 ohm at the end of the circuit. Term. 5 (+) EIA-485 Loop IN Term. 6 (-)
SIB-2048A/SIB-NET in Protected Premises Control Unit (slave)
SLC Loop IN (From Master FACP LIB at Central Station)
NOTES This arrangement can be employed for Central Station and Proprietary (NFPA 72) service. This application is not suitable for separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory conditions. For connection of alarm initiating devices, refer to Figures 4.6-2 through 4.6-6. During system programming, NFPA menu option "72D" must be chosen.
SLC Loop OUT No connection on P2 or P3 if ICA-4L chassis is used.
Terminal Assignments SLC Loop IN: From: Master LIB-200, LIB-200A, or LIB-400 P2 terminals 1(+) and 3(-) To: NIB-96 P5 terminals 1(+) and 3(-)
P2
NIB-96
P3
SLC Loop OUT: From: NIB-96 P5 terminals 5(+) and 7(-) To: Next device on SLC Loop EIA-485 Loop IN From: SIB P5 terminals 5(+) and 6(-) To: NIB-96 P4 terminals 5(+) and 3(-) EIA-485 Loop OUT From: NIB-96 P4 terminals 6(+) and 4(-) To: Next device on EIA-485 Loop.
Figure 6.4-1 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems

1-98
Fire Alarm and Trouble Signal Transmission

The application provided in Figure 6.4-2 is not suitable for separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory signals. All circuits are supervised and power limited. 18 AWG (0.75 mm) is the minimum. There is a maximum loop resistance of 40 ohms for the LIB-200, and 50 ohms for the LIB-200A and LIB-400. The maximum distance between the Central Station/Receiving Unit and the MMXs is 10,000 feet (3048 meters) at 12 AWG (3.25 mm) for the LIB-200 and 12,500 feet (3841 meters) at 12 AWG (3.25 mm) for the LIB200A and LIB-400. For initiating device connections, refer to Figures 4.6-2 through 4.6-6.
LIB-400 in NFPA 72 Proprietary and Central Station Receiving Unit SLC Loop
Channel
(-) (+)
CPU in NFPA 72 Protected Premises Unit P4
ELR R-47K
11 10 9
Normally Closed Trouble Contacts* Normally Open Fire Alarm Contacts

1
MMX-1
Programmed with the software type ID "MRTB"
(contacts shown in their normal state)
NOTE The MMX-1 and MMX-101 are interchangeable in this example.
* Trouble contacts will transfer during any supervisory, security alarm or other trouble condition.
MMX-101
Programmed with the software type ID "MON"
Figure 6.4-2 NFPA 72 Proprietary and Central Station Protected Premises Unit/Proprietary and Central Station Receiving Unit Interface
1-99
Section 6.5 Applying/Removing Power to the Fire Alarm System

After completing the proper installation of all boards, cables and components, apply power in the following manner: Apply AC power Connect the battery/secondary power terminals (refer to Connecting the Main Power Supply, Section 3.3 of this manual). Do not take any actions, especially do not activate the acknowledge button, for at least one minute after power is applied. Do not connect any releasing devices until the releasing circuits have been tested using simulated loads. Test system in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7. When servicing the panel, perform the following steps before removing or connecting any power or supervisory cables: Disconnect any releasing devices Remove all EIA-485 connections Remove battery/secondary power Remove AC power Wait 60 seconds CAUTION! Never remove or install boards, internal cables or components with power applied. Failure to follow the procedure outlined above can result in irreparable damage to the system components. This damage may adversely affect the operation of this control unit but its effect may not be readily apparent.
Both AC and battery power is required for proper operation.
Note System will not function without power applied.
1-100
10/22/99
AM2020 AFP1010
CHAPTER TWO OPERATION
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-1
Introduction
About the operation of the panel Use of intelligent and addressable detectors and modules provide the operator with precise information on the location of the alarm or trouble, as well as what type of device is reporting the activity. WARNING The AM2020/AFP1010 control panel will only operate with Notifier intelligent addressable devices installed. All operating power, as well as data communications to and from intelligent and addressable devices, is transmitted on a two-wire LIB Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) that may be wired to meet the requirements of either NFPA Style 4 (Class B) or Style 6 or 7 (Class A)operation. The AM2020 system can be configured with up to 10 LIB SLC Loops and the AFP1010 system with up to 4 Loops, each of which is capable of supporting up to 99 intelligent detectors and up to 99 addressable control or monitor modules. Note: The term "loop" is used in a general way throughout this document and does not necessarily mean that the circuit is a Class A configuration, unless a reference is made to Style 6, Style 7, Style D, or Style Z circuit performance. A fire alarm in the AM2020/AFP1010 is initiated by activation of any of the following devices: Intelligent smoke or heat detectors (SDX-551/751, SDX-551-TH, CPX-551/751, FDX-551, or IPX-751, etc.). Addressable Manual Pull Stations (BGX). Conventional normally-open or normally-closed contact fire alarm initiating devices connected to addressable MMX Monitor Modules (or equivalent XPM or XP5-M circuits) along a LIB SLC. During an alarm condition, LEDs on as few as six and as many as 99 addressable initiating devices (smoke detectors, heat detectors, MMX modules etc.) and/or output modules may be latched on. A latched-on LED on an initiating device indicates that the device has caused an activation signal to be transmitted to the AM2020/ AFP1010. A latched on LED on an output module indicates that the module has been activated. An activation signal on the AM2020/AFP1010 includes fire alarms, security alarms, supervisory conditions, or non-alarm inputs.
NOTE
During loss of primary (AC) power, when the AM2020/AFP1010 is operating under secondary power, only LEDs on intelligent detectors (including DHX-501/DHX-502 duct detectors) will be latched on during a fire alarm. The AM2020/AFP1010 can be programmed to latch the LEDs on up to 99 addressable devices (MMX, CMX, etc.). This software feature can be used only if ALL installed addressable devices are stamped with the code R4 on the product marking label (purchased from Notifier after April 1, 1991.) Use of this feature under any other circumstances can cause the LIB SLC Loops to shut down during a fire alarm condition. RA-400 Remote LEDs are not permitted for use with this feature (excluding those wired to DHX-501/DHX-502 Duct Detectors). Use only the RA-400Z Remote LED when extending the number of latched-on LEDs beyond six. SDX-551 Photoelectric Detectors can also have an H code after their model numbers. NOTE Detectors have priority over modules. Detectors that come into alarm will assume LED-latch priority over previously-latched module LEDs. Output devices (alarm notification appliances, output relays, etc.) are controlled by activation of CMX Control Modules (or equivalent XPC or XPR circuits) connected along the LIB SLC. A control module may serve as a Form-C output relay or as a Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). About this Chapter This chapter covers the operation of the AM2020/AFP1010 Combination Fire/Security Protective Signaling System and the control features available to the operator presented through the perspective of the Display Interface Assembly (DIA-2020 or DIA-1010). 2-2
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
TE R M
To the right are general terms and their associated specific part numbers as referenced in this manual:
PART Number PRN-4, PRN-5 CRT-2 MMX-1 MMX-101 MMX-2 CMX-1 or CMX-2
PRN CRT MMX CMX
This chapter refers to CMX Control Modules and MMX Monitor Modules. If XP or XP5 Series Transponders are used, unless otherwise stated, the following substitutions may be made: MMX Monitor Modules can be substituted with XPM or XP5-M circuits. CMX Control Modules configured as Form-C contacts (tabs broken), can be substituted with XPR circuits or XP5-C circuits (in relay mode). CMX Control Modules not configured as Form-C contacts can be substituted with XPC circuits or XP5-C circuits (in NAC/telephone mode). NOTE See warning regarding XP Transponder operation at the beginning of Chapter Three, Section Three. For more information, refer to the XP Series Transponder System Manual. About the passwords The AM2020/AFP1010 functions in one of three levelsOperational Level, Level One, and Level Two. In Operational mode, the operator may perform the following keypad or menu-displayed functions: Acknowledge alarms, troubles, and restorations (clears) View acknowledged alarms, troubles, and restorations Silence the sounding of fire alarm notification appliances Reset the AM2020/AFP1010 System Test all intelligent addressable detectors in the system Test the panel's LED indicators, Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), terminal and printer Read the status of the entire AM2020/AFP1010 system, including the addressable devices Print out a report on the status of the system or access the history buffer
Access to keypad or menu levels one and two require entry of specific passwords. These levels allow an authorized programmer to initialize or alter the programming of the AM2020/AFP1010. Level One and Level Two entry requirements are defined as follows: Alter Status Programming Level One password required. Level Two password required.
If the main operator of the system requires access to a function which is password protected, contact the distributor who installed the system for the required password(s). For more information on programming or altering the status of the AM2020/AFP1010, refer to Chapter Three of this manual. Whenever the operator selects a menu, the AM2020/AFP1010 begins a one-minute timer. If no key is pressed during this minute, the function selected will be aborted and control will return to the state the panel was in prior to selection of that menu. NOTE Unacknowledged points must be acknowledged prior to being reprogrammed. Any new trouble or alarm reports reviewed during programming may disrupt the programming process. Do not change the program parameters of any addressable point that is in alarm or trouble. About the software Depending on the particular release of software in your system, some menu functions and system features may not be operable. If you attempt to execute a function not operable, the panel will respond with the message "FUNCTION NOT ENABLED."
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-3
About addresses For certain functions such as READ STATUS, the operator must enter a device, software zone, or annunciator point address. Leading zeroes are not required. The address assumes the following format:
LXX(D/M)YY,
ZXXX
or
AXXPYY
SLC Loop
Enter "L" followed by 1 to 10 for AM2020. Enter "L" followed by 1 to 4 for AFP1010.
Software Zone
Enter "Z" followed by 1 to 240.
SLC Loop Device

Enter "D" for an intelligent detector or "M" for an addressable module followed by an address in the range 1 to 99.
Annunciator Point
Enter "A" followed by 1 to 32 for the annunciator module address, then "P" followed by the module point 1 to 64.
For example, L3M44 must be entered as the address for the 44th module on LIB SLC Loop 3. About the Backspace Key The backspace key serves two purposes: 1) At a menu prompt:
BACK SPACE
PRESS@1=SYS,2=PTREAD,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS, 6=MONON,7=CTLON : the backspace key "aborts" the selection of that menu.
2) When entering data or making a selection from a menu: ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT. STATUS@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@:@L4D3 the backspace key erases the last character, or menu choice entered.
2-4
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
About entering alphanumerics Most of the keys on the DIA keypad serve more than one function. For instance, the 3 key is used to enter the digit 3 or the letter D when entering the address of a detector. The AM2020/AFP1010 toggles which character is displayed on the LCD with each successive keypress of that same key. This allows the operator to press a particular key until the desired character is displayed. That character is entered into the display whenever the next, different, key is pressed. If two of the characters contained on a particular key (for instance, the D and the 3) need to be entered in succession, the ALPHA ENTER key must be used (see example that follows). After the full address has been entered into the display, press ENTER to transfer the display contents to the system for processing. Example: To enter L8D3, Press
K L SIGNAL SILENCE
and the letter K will be displayed.
Press
K L SIGNAL SILENCE
again and the K will change to L.
Press
8
O
and the letter O is displayed to the right of the displayed letter L.
Press
8
D
again to change the letter O to the digit 8.
Press
3
ALPHA ENTER
and the letter D will be displayed to the right of the displayed characters L8. The partial address displayed now reads L8D.
Press
to enter the letter D into the display.
Press
3
D
and a second letter D will be displayed to the right of the displayed characters L8D. The partial address displayed now reads L8DD. again to change the second D to the digit 3. The completed address now reads L8D3.
Press
3
ENTER
Press
to transfer the display contents to the AM2020/AFP1010 system for processing.
About Walk Test The Walk Test function is a service feature that allows one-man testing of devices on any selected LIB. The Walk Test feature will automatically abort after 15 minutes of inactivity if inadvertently left enabled by the service representative.
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-5
About the display time The AM2020/AFP1010 has a separate time field in the display for each event that occurs in the system. All Systems Normal: During periods of no activity, the time field reflects the current time. For AM2020/AFP1010 systems with NOTIFIRENET, the time is synchronized every hour by the network master clock (last AM2020/AFP1010, INA, or NRT node on network to have its time changed). Single, unacknowledged event: When an event has occurred but has not been acknowledged, and no other event has occurred, the CRT terminal and the DIA display the time this event occurred. Multiple, unacknowledged events: The display will show the actual time that the first unacknowledged event occurred. After the first event is acknowledged, the time shown on the display does not represent the time at which the event occurred, but instead indicates the time at which the event is displayed. Single/multiple previously acknowledged events: The time shown for an acknowledged event is the time at which that event was last placed in the display by activation of the ack/step key (not the time at which the event occurred). About the print time Output from the printer, as well as to the panel's history file, for a particular event (alarm, trouble, acknowledgment, etc.) includes the time the event was sent to the printer, which, in most cases, is identical to the time the event occurred. In extreme cases, when many events have occurred within a few seconds, the time printed for a particular event may differ from the actual event time by up to one minute. After events have been acknowledged, only the event history file (if enabled) and the system printer will provide a record of the time at which events occurred. About priorities Every event the AM2020/AFP1010 displays is prioritized. This includes the processing of incoming alarm and trouble events, acknowledging events, the clearing of events, and acknowledging the clearing of events (receiving unit operation only). Security alarms will increment the trouble counter on the terminal status line of the CRT. NOTE Security alarms are processed like fire trouble conditions in the AM2020/AFP1010. The AM2020/AFP1010 processes and displays events under the following priorities, highest priority first: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Fire Alarms Security Alarms Supervisory Signals Device Troubles Disabled Zones System Troubles Annunciator Troubles 8) Cleared Fire Alarms 9) Cleared Security Alarms 10) Cleared Supervisory Signals 11) Cleared Device Troubles 12) Cleared Disabled Zones 13) Cleared System Troubles 14) Cleared Annunciator Troubles
In addition, detectors have a higher priority than modules within each detector/module category; the lower the address, the higher the priority (see list below). The display of certain events can be pre-empted by others at the time they are acknowledged. Pay careful attention to the display when acknowledging events. Node 1, Loop 1 Detector 1, Loop 1 Detector 2, Loop 1 Detector 3 Loop 10 Detector 99 (followed in priority by) Node 1, Loop 1 Module 1, Loop 1 Module 2, Loop 1 Module 3 Loop 10 Module 99 (followed in priority by) Node 1, Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3 Zone 240 (followed in priority by) Node 1, System Trouble Indices (in Hex) T00, T01, T02 TFF (followed in priority by) Node 1, Annunciator Trouble Indices (in Hex) N00, N01, N02 NFF Note: Node numbers are applicable only if the panel is connected to NOTIFIRENET 2-6
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
About System Test System Test, or "Detector Test" as it is often referred to, is a manually initiated test of all intelligent detectors installed in the system. When the user presses the system test key the fire panel performs a chamber test of each intelligent detector to ensure its proper operation. System test can take up to one minute before displaying its results. There are two types of display:
01+05+00+02+00+80 DETECTOR TEST:ALL OK +25+00+06+00 TOT=119 05:00P 05/22/00
Each LIB displays the total number of intelligent devices installed on it, as well as the overall system total.
DETECTOR TEST FAIL: 110,119,211,213,605, 617,799,815,015,020+ 05:30 05/22/00
Each failed device is represented by a three digit number. The first digit indicates the LIB number (0=10), and the last two the device address. If more than ten devices have failed a "+" is shown after the last detector number. If more than ten detectors failed, the serviceman would have to repair, replace or disable the ten listed, and then rerun System Test in order to locate the remaining ones. About Periodic Test The fire panel performs a periodic automatic chamber test of all intelligent detectors installed in the system to ensure their proper operation. When a detector has failed its automatic chamber test, it will generate a trouble message as in Section 5.1 with "DET FAILED TEST" in the type of trouble field. The service man would then have to repair or replace the indicated device.
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-7
Section One The Display Interface Assembly

Section 1.1 Normal Operation
During normal fire alarm operation when no alarms or troubles exist, the system will display the following:
Custom 40-Character User Label
NOTIFIER A PITTWAY COMPANY ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL 04:32P 03/01/00
Current Time and Date Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year
The operator can perform the functions associated with the following keys without having to enter a password:
A READ STATUS
ACK STEP
SIGNAL SILENCE
(a description of the READ STATUS and the SPL FUNCT keys follows)
SYSTEM RESET
S ( SPL FUNCT
SYSTEM TEST
LAMP TEST
2-8
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
PIEZO SOUNDER - The local panel piezo sounder provides an audible indication of the system alarm or trouble conditions. The sounder will pulse to indicate the detection of at least one fire alarm condition in the system, and will sound steadily when the system is in trouble. The sounder is silenced when all conditions have been acknowledged. If the sounder sounds steadily, and it cannot be silenced by the acknowledgment of all system alarm/trouble conditions, CALL YOUR SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY. 80 CHARACTER LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY - The LCD displays the current status of the entire AM2020/ AFP1010 system. While programming the AM2020/ AFP1010, the LCD provides various system configuration menus and prompts. This display also is illuminated when the AM2020/AFP1010 is under AC power. The display will remain illuminated for one minute after the loss of AC power; any keypad or system activity will re-illuminate the display for one minute.
AC POWER - A green LED will illuminate to indicate that the system is operating from the primary power supply. FIRE ALARM - A red LED will flash to indicate that the panel has detected at least one fire alarm in the system. The red LED will light steadily when all fire alarms have been acknowledged. The panel display will provide detailed information on any alarms received. TROUBLE/SECURITY ALARM - A yellow LED will flash to indicate any unacknowledged change of status in the system. The panel display will provide detailed information about each change of status signal received. After all change of status conditions have been acknowledged, and while at least one trouble condition still exists, the Trouble/Security Alarm LED will illuminate steadily. Note: Security alarms are treated as fire trouble conditions in this combination fire alarm/security system. DISPLAY TROUBLE - A yellow LED will illuminate when a trouble condition is detected in the display assembly. If this LED is illuminated the contents of the display must be considered invalid. Call your service representative immediately. SIGNAL SILENCE - A yellow LED will illuminate steadily when all the control modules in the system which can be silenced have been silenced. A flashing yellow LED indicates a partial signal silence condition (some of the control modules that can be silenced have been silenced.)
ACK STEP - This key is used to acknowledge system alarm or trouble conditions. When depressed, the operator acknowledges the new status of the device indicated on the display. Depression of this key will also step the display to the next device in alarm or trouble. After all such system alarm and trouble conditions have been acaknowledged, the ACK STEP key may be used to step the display through the existing system alarm and trouble conditions. SIGNAL SILENCE - This key, during a fire alarm condition, will deactivate all activated control modules that have been programmed to permit signal silencing. SYSTEM RESET - This key is used to clear all system alarm and trouble conditions. If an alarm or trouble condition still exists after System Reset, that alarm/trouble condition will resound. Note: The function of this key is inhibited until all alarms and troubles have been acknowledged. SYSTEM TEST - The System Test button is not functional. System testing is automatic. LAMP TEST - this key is used to perform a test of LEDs on the control panel and to test the panel display. The test will illuminate the panel LEDs in sequence for a timed period and flash the panel display. When the test has been completed, the panel LEDs and the panel display will return to their prior status.
NOTE - These keys and their functions are duplicated on the alphanumeric keypad of the DIA.
AUTO STEP - During READ STATUS, this function key automatically scrolls the display through a list of system conditions such as devices that are in alarm or trouble. PRIOR, NEXT - During READ STATUS, these keys allow the user to step forward or backward through a list of system conditions such as devices that are in alarm or trouble. READ STATUS - Allows the status of the entire system to be read, including the status of the Loop Interface Boards, the addressable detectors, and the control and monitor modules. ALTER STATUS - Provides access to "Level One" functions, such as setting the FACP clock. PROG - This "Level Two" function key provides access to Programming Mode, for configuring the AM2020/AFP1010. SPL FUNCT - This key generates system and installed point reports. ALPHA ENTER - During Programming Mode, pressing ALPHA ENTER stores the character displayed and permits the alternate character on that key to be entered next (see page 2-5). BACK SPACE - Erases the last alphanumeric keypress, or serves as an "escape" key during programming. ENTER - Menu selections are entered and programming data is stored in AM2020/AFP1010 memory upon pressing this key.
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-9
Section 1.2 Read Status

The Read Status feature of the AM2020/AFP1010 allows the operator to display the status of the entire system. To execute READ STATUS:
Press
A READ STATUS
The display will show:
PRESS@1=SYS,2=PTREAD,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS, 6=MONON,7=CTLON @@@ :
Enter 1 for Display System Configuration. This selection provides information on any of the system parameters programmed into the AM2020/AFP1010 - the number and style of the Loop Interface Boards, the AVPS-24s and APS-6Rs, the Software Zone Boundary, the system time delays, annunciator modules installed, etc. Enter 2 for Point Read. This selection provides information on the status of any intelligent detector, addressable module, software-defined zone or annunciator point in the system. Enter 3 for Alarm. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed device or zone in a fire alarm state. Enter 4 for Trouble. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed device or zone in trouble. Enter 5 for Disable. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed device or zone disabled. Enter 6 for Monitor On. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed non-fire or security monitor module activated. Enter 7 for Control On. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed control module activated.
NOTES Read Status options 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 use the same format as the Point Read option to display their indicated point information. For Read Status options 3,4,5,6, and 7, use the ACK/STEP key to view any other devices in the alarm, trouble, disabled, or active state. See Prior/Next/Autostep in Section Two. For an AM2020/AFP1010 FACP on the NOTIFIRENET system, programming and read status operations should always be performed from a Network Reporting Terminal (NRT). Never attempt to perform programming or read status operations from a local panel when the NRT is simultaneously attempting to do so.
2-10
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
Display System Configuration
READ STATUS Menu Option 1
Selecting 1 from the Read Status Menu allows the operator to review the various system parameters entered into the AM2020/AFP1010. The System Configuration Menu:
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND, 6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM, 0=CONT :
Note that when 4 is chosen from the menu, the total number of AVPS and/or APS-6R power supplies will be displayed.
Enter Menu Choice:
Status Displayed:
1 2
THESE@LIB@BOARDS@ARE@INSTALLED:@@ 1=Y,2=Y,3=Y,4=Y,5=N,6=N,7=N,8=N,9=N,10=N Y=installed N=not installed
THE@SLC@LOOP@STYLES@ARE@AS@FOLLOWS: 1=6,2=6,3=6,4=6,5=4,6=4,7=4,8=4,9=4,10=4 The default value for SLC Loops not installed is NFPA Style 4
VER=60,SIL=045,CUT=0000
VER = Alarm Verification Time (in seconds) SIL = Signal-Silence Inhibit Time (in seconds) CUT = Signal Cut-out Time (in seconds) THERE@ARE@CURRENTLY@04@AVPS-24@INSTALLED @IN@THE@SYSTEM NOTE: The number "04" in the above display represents the total number of AVPS and/or APS-6R power supplies installed in the system. ZONES 001 - 200 ARE FORWARD ACTIVATED ZONES 201 - 240 ARE REVERSE ACTIVATED
5
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-11
Enter Menu Choice:
Status Displayed:
TS=N@@@@@@@SL=N@@@@@@@APM=N,CMR=N,NAR=N, LEDL=N,PEC=N,BC=N,PTI=N RPT=N
TS = Is the connection to the terminal supervised? (If TS=N, the terminal will not audibly indicate state changes [i.e., no Bell characters will be sent]). SL = Is the Status Line option enabled? APM = Is the connection to the auxiliary printer monitored? CMR = Is control module state reporting enabled? NAR = Is "NONA"/"NOA" monitor module state reporting enabled? LEDL = LED latches on more activated addressable devices? PEC = Continue to transmit under printer error conditions? BC = Is bidirectional copy enabled? PTI = Is the primary printer trouble inhibited? RPT = Are printer reports directed to terminal output?
DPZ=N,LMD=45,LMM=20,LMC=90,72ABCD,71,RC, BTYP=N,BCAP=12,BSBY=24,ERM=N,BLN=N,PAL=N
DPZ = Is the piezo disabled during programming? LMD = Local Mode detector address. LMM = Local Mode monitor module address. LMC = Local Mode control module address. 72A = Protected premises fire alarm system. 72B = Auxiliary fire alarm service. 72C = Do not use (see Chapter 2, section 1.1.7) 72D = Do not use (see Chapter 2, section 1.1.7) 71 = Do not use (see Chapter 2, section 1.1.7) RC = Proprietary supervising station or central station receiving unit. BTYP = Type of battery installed in the system. BCAP = Ni-cad battery capacity. BSBY = Ni-cad battery standby time. ERM = Is event reminder enabled? BLN = Is device blinking enabled? PAL = Is pre-alarm option enabled?
PRESS 1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT
Option 8 provides you with a Read Status sub-menu for viewing the status of the intelligent SIB, installed annunciators, external interface, or DACT. This menu is described on the next page.
HIZNDET=Z150,LOZNDET=Z001,DVTCNTR=15 SER=Y,DFT=Y,PGR=Y,MDM=Y,NAM=N,RP=Y,SUP=Y
HIZNDET = High zone for day/night detector sensitivity. LOZNDET = Low zone for day/night detector sensitivity. DVTCNTR = Detector verification trouble counter limit. SER = Is "SACM"/"SEQM" monitor module state reporting enabled? DFT = Is drift compensation enabled? PGR = Is PAGE-1 enabled? MDM = Is modem enabled? NAM = Is the NAM-232 enabled? RP = Is rapid polling enabled? SUP = Is supervisory ACS reporting enabled?
0
2-12
PRESS 1=IDO
Option 0 provides you with a Read Status Sub-menu for viewing the status of the International Display Option. Pressing 1 will display IDO=0 for normal display. ID)=Y will be shown when IDO is enabled for countries requiring it (China).
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
Menu Choice 8:
Enter Option Choice: Status Displayed:
ISIB=Y
ISIB = Is the Intelligent Serial Interface Board installed? NOTE ISIBs available for the AM2020/AFP1010 system include the SIB-2048A and SIB-NET. For an AM2020/AFP1010 connected to a NOTIFIRENET system however, the only ISIB that can be used is the SIB-NET. If a SIB-NET is not installed, NOTIFIRENET specific functions can not be programmed or read under Read Status (see Chapter One).
THESE ANNUNCIATORS ARE INSTALLED: (PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE UNTIL DONE)

Due to its size, the Annunciator Read Status display is separated into two screens, illustrated below. Pressing <ENTER> invokes the next display.
1=Y, 2=N, 3=N, 4=N, 5=Y, 6=Y, 7=N, 8=N, 9=Y,10=N,11=N,12=Y,13=Y,14=Y,15=N,16=N,
17=Y,18=Y,19=Y,20=N,21=N,22=N,23=N,24=N, 25=N,26=N,27=N,28=N,29=N,30=N,31=N,32=N
UPDN=N,ADDR=010,DBID=BC00D148 MIBA=H,MIBB=H,PORTS=2 ASRD=N
ASRE=N
UPDN = Is the ACS Port upload/download enabled? * ADDR = FACP NOTIFIRENET address. * DBID = Database identifier. * MIBA = MIB-W/WF threshold for Channel A. (On the MIB-WF, only the Channel A threshold setting is used.) * MIBB = MIB-W threshold for Channel B. * PORTS = Number of data ports monitored. * ASRD=ACK/SIL/RES disabled at panel. * ASRE=ACK/SIL/RES re-enabled on LAN Fail * These items are NOTIFIRENET specific functions and are only displayed when a SIB-NET is installed.
4
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
DACT=01
DACT = Base address of the UDACT (blank for none installed).
2-13
Point Read
Selecting 2 from the Read Status Menu allows the operator to review the various detector, module, software zone or annunciator point parameters entered into the system. The system prompts the operator for the address of the point to be read: ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT. @STATUS (BCKSPC TO ABORT) @@@@: Upon entering the address, the system will display a distinct screen format, depending on the particular type of device being read, as illustrated below: NOTE After a one-minute timeout, the Control-By-Event (CBE) and the annunciator point mapped address is displayed for devices and zones. Cooperative Control-By-Event (CCBE) is displayed for reverse zones and are only used as part of the NOTIFIRENET operation. To display this information immediately, press ENTER after the status line appears.
Detectors
Status: DISABL, ALARM:, TROUBL, NORMAL. Software Type I.D.20-Character Custom Label
NORMAL@SMOKE(ION)@@@@COMPUTER@ROOM@SMOKE @D@@@A@T@K@@@@@@@SH@V000@H@034@@@@@L02D26
Device Disabled Device in Alarm Tracking Selected Device in Trouble Day/Night Detector Sensitivity Setting: Low, Medium, High. Verification Counter Percentage of Alarm Threshold Address
Sensitivity Selection: Low, Medium, High.
Detector Verification If verification is enabled for this point, the V indicator appears and the 3-digit counter shows the number of times the verification timer was activated for the point without going into alarm. The counter returns to zero when power is cycled to the AM2020/AFP1010 or by following the procedure in the Resetting Sensor Verification Counters section of this document. If you disable verification, the counter will retain its last value. If verification is not enabled for this point, the V indicator does not appear; however, the 3-digit number still appears. Note that the counter does not increment unless verification is enabled. NOTE A detector may be in periodic test during a read status. In this case, the detector status will be normal but the percentage of alarm threshold will be greater than 100%. If this happens, wait one minute, then perform another read status. 2-14 Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
Control Modules
Status: DISABL, ON, TROUBL, OFF, *OFHOOK, NORMAL. Software Type ID 20-Character Custom Label
DISABL@CONTROL@@@@@COMPUTER@ROOM@BELL @D@CF@A@T@@@W @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@S@@L01M36

Device Disabled Control Module CO = On CF = Off
Device Activated
Device in Trouble
Walk Test Selected
Address Signal Silence Enabled
*An OFHOOK status indicates that a telephone off-hook (ring-in) signal has been received, but has not been answered by the operator at the fire fighter telephone ACS switchboard.
Monitor Modules
Fire Status: DISABL, ALARM:, TROUBL, NORMAL. Non-fire and Security Status: DISABL, ON, TROUBL, OFF. Software Type ID 20-Character Custom Label
NORMAL@MONITOR@@@@@@BASEMENT@SMOKES @D@MO@A@T@K@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@L05M12
Device Disabled Device in Alarm Device in (Active in a non- Trouble fire mode) Tracking Selected Address
Monitor Module On (Non-fire and security types only)
Software Zones
Status: DISABL, ALARM:, TROUBL, NORMAL. Software Type ID 20-Character Custom Label
ALARM:@FORWARD@ZONE@@ATTIC@DEVICE@ZONE @D@@@@A@T@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@Z023
Zone Disabled
Zone in Alarm
Zone in Trouble
Address
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-15
Annunciator Points
Status:
ON, TROUBL, OFF, REQEST*, or blank.
20-Character Custom Label
OFF@@@@ANN@CONTROL@@@ANNUNCIATOR@ONE @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P23
Software Type ID
Address
*A REQEST status indicates that a telephone off-hook (ring-in) signal has been received and answered by the operator at the fire fighter telephone ACS switchboard, but has not been connected to the telephone line.
Special Status
Read Status Menu Options 3 - 7
Option 3 provides information on devices or zones in a fire alarm state. Option 4 provides information on devices or zones in a trouble state. Option 5 provides information on disabled devices or zones. Option 6 provides information on activated non-fire or security monitor modules. Option 7 provides information on activated control modules. Selecting 3, 4, or 5 from the Read Status Menu prompts the operator to choose between zones and devices. The following example performs a search for the lowest device in a fire alarm state.
PRESS 1=SYS,2=PTREAD,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS, 6=MONON,7=CTLON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3
DO@YOU@WANT@ZONE@OR@DEVICE@STATUS? (Y=ZONE,N=DEVICE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT))@@:@N
ALARM:@SMOKE(ION)@@@COMPUTER@ROOM@SMOKE @@@@@@A@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@M@034@@@@@L02D26
NOTE The control-by-event and the annunciator point mapped address is displayed for devices and zones after a one minute timeout. In a NOTIFIRENET system, cooperative control-by-event equations are displayed for reverse zones. To display this information immediately, press ENTER after the status line appears. 2-16
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
Section Two Prior/Next/Auto Step

The Prior, Next, and Autostep keys are used in conjunction with options 2 through 7 of the Read Status Menu. Upon selection of one of these options an address range is defined by the AM2020/AFP1010 for which similar searches can be performed using the Prior, Next and Autostep Keys. These functions enhance and speed up the search process, because they eliminate having to re-enter the Read Status Menu for the same function being repeated. PRIOR - Searches the database in a reverse direction from the current address (refer to note). NEXT - Searches the database in a forward direction from the current address (refer to note). AUTOSTEP - Performs an automatic search of the database in the forward direction from the current address with a two second display of status line, followed by a two second display of the CBE and annunciator point mapped address, for each of the points found. (The CCBE equation is displayed for reverse zones on the NOTIFIRENET system.) NOTE The control-by-event and the annunciator point mapped address is displayed for devices and zones after a one minute timeout. The cooperative control-by-event is displayed for reverse zones. To display this information immediately, press ENTER after the status line appears.
Starting Search Address
PRIOR < Current Address >
NEXT / AUTOSTEP
Ending Search Address
The Autostep key can be used as an alternate method for generating special reports.
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-17
Section Three Special Function

The Special Function feature of the AM2020/AFP1010 allows the operator to generate AM2020/AFP1010 status reports or view the AM2020/AFP1010 History File.
S
Press
SPL FUNCT
The display will show:
PRESS@1=RPTS,2=HIS @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
Reports
SPL FUNCT Menu Option 1
PRESS@1=SYS,2=POINT,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS, 6=MONON,7=CTLON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
Enter 1 for a System Configuration report, 2 for an Installed Point report, 3 for a Fire Alarm report, 4 for a Trouble report, 5 for a Disable report, 6 for a Monitor Module On report (including non-fire and security monitor modules), or 7 for a Control Module On report. The display will show:
PRESS 1=REQUEST,2=ABORT @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
Enter 1 to execute the report or 2 to abort a report already in progress.
NOTE Only one report can be conducted at any one time. The reports are not displayed on the DIA. Reports are either displayed on the CRT and/or printed by the printer depending on whether or not printer reports are redirected to the CRT during programming. An example of a report printout is illustrated in Figure 3-1. 2-18
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
The special function report printouts (refer to Figure 3-1) assume the same display format as the Point Read option under Read Status. For a description of the various report fields, refer to Point Read. Note: APS-6Rs will be counted as AVPSs in the Special Function Report Printout.
PRESS@1=RPTS,2=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 press@1=SYS,2=POINT,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS,6=MONON,7=CTLON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 PRESS 1=REQUEST,2=ABORT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 **@SYSTEM@CONFIGURATION@REPORT@BEGIN@**@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00 THESE@LIB@BOARDS@ARE@INSTALLED:@@@@@@@@@1=Y,2=N,3=N,4=N,5=N,6=N,7=N,8=N,9=N,10=N THE@SLC@LOOP@STYLES@ARE@AS@FOLLOWS:@@@@@1=4,2=4,3=4,4=4,5=4,6=4,7=4,8=4,9=4,10=4 VER=05,SIL=005,CUT=0504 THERE@ARE@CURRENTLY@00@AVPS-24@INSTALLED@IN@THE@SYSTEM ZONES@001@-@200@ARE@FORWARD@ACTIVATED@@@ZONES@201@-@240@ARE@REVERSE@ACTIVATED TS=N@@@@@@SL=Y@@@@@@@@APM=Y,CMR=Y,NAR=Y,@LEDL=N,PEC=N,BC=N,PTI=N@@@@@@@@@@ RPT=N DPZ=N,LMD=20,LMM=20,LMC=20,72ABCD,71,RC,BTYP=N,BCAP=12,BSBY=48,ERM=Y,BLN=Y,PAL=N ISIB=Y THESE@ANNUNCIATORS@ARE@INSTALLED:@@@@@@@(PRESS@ENTER@TO@CONTINUE@UNTIL@DONE) @1=N,@2=N,@3=N,@4=N,@5=N,@6=N,@7=N,@8=N,@9=N,10=N,11=N,12=N,13=N,14=N,15=N,16=N, 17=N,18=N,19=N,20=N,21=N,22=N,23=N,24=N,25=N,26=N,27=N,28=N,29=N,30=N,31=N,32=N UPDN=N,ADDR=010,DBID=BC00d148, @@@@MIBA=H,MIBB=H,PORTS=2,ASRD=N,ASRE=N DACT=01 HIZNDET=Z150,LOZNDET=Z001,DVTCNTR=15 SER=Y,DFT=Y,PGR=Y,MDM=Y,NAM=N,RP=N,SUP=Y ***@SYSTEM@CONFIGURATION@REPORT@END@***@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00 PRESS@1=RPTS,2=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 PRESS@1=SYS,2=POINT,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS,6=MONON,7=CTLON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2 PRESS@1=REQUEST,2=ABORT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 *****@INSTALLED@POINT@REPORT@BEGIN@*****@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00 ALARM:@FORWARD@ZONE@FIRST@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@Z001 ()@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P01 DISABL@REVERSE@ZONE@SECOND@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@D@@@@@T@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@Z202 OR()@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P02 OR() ALARM:@SMOKE@(ION)@@OFFICE@ARea@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A@@@@@@@SH@@V010@H@045@@@@@@L01D01 (Z01)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P03 TROUBL@SMOKE(PHOT0)@FACTORY@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@T@@@@@@@@@@V000@H@045@@@@@@L01D02 (Z202)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P03 NORMAL@HEAT(ANALOG)@MAINTENANCE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@V000@H@045@@@@@@L01D03 (Z01)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P03 NORMAL@MONITOR@@@@@@FIRST@AID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@K@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@L01m01 (Z01)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P04 ON@@@@@CONTROL@@@@@@FIRST@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@@CO@@@@@W@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@s@L01M02 OR(Z01)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P05 OFF@@@@CONTROL@@@@@@SECOND@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@CF@@@@@W@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@S@L01M03 OR(Z202)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P06 ON@@@@@ANn@ZONE@@@@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P01 DISABL@ANN@ZONE@@@@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P02 ON@@@@@ANN@DETECTOR@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P03 OFF@@@@ANN@MONITOR@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P04 ON@@@@@ANN@CONTROL@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P05 OFF@@@@ANN@CONTROL@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P06 ******@INSTALLED@POINT@REPORT@END@******@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
Figure 3-1 AM2020/AFP1010 Special Function Report Printout
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-19
The History File
PRESS@1=PRINT,2=DISPLAY,3=STEP,4=RANGE/ STATUS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
Choices 1, 2, and 3 will prompt the user for the beginning and end of the History File range. The maximum number of events that the system can save in the History File is 400. Enter "1" to produce a printed report of the History File. An example of a History File printout is illustrated in Figure 3-2. Enter "2" to perform an automatic display of the History File on the DIA and CRT terminal (if employed). Enter "3" to perform a manual display of the History File on the DIA and CRT. Use the ENTER key (on DIA) or RETURN key (on CRT) to advance the display. Enter "4" to display the History File range (the number of entries contained in the file), and current status (active/inactive).
2-20
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
To differentiate between history file printouts (refer to Figure 3-2) and system printouts (refer to Figure 3-1), the colon (:) in the time field has been replaced by the semicolon (;).
PRESS@1=RPTS,2=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2 PRESS@1=PRINT,2=DISPLAY,3=STEP,4=RANGE/STATUS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 ENTER@FIRST@EVENT@(1@-@008)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 ENTER@LAST@EVENT@(001@-@008)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@8 *********@HISTORY@REPORT@BEGIN@*********@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00 ALARM:@SMOKE@(ION)@DETECTOR@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00@101 ACK@AL@SMOKE@(ION)@DETECTOR@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00@101 @@@SIGNAL@SILENCE@@@@@@@@REQUESTED@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;23P@03/01/00 @@@SYSTEM@RESET@@@@@@@@@@ACTIVATED@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00 CLR@AL@SMOKE@(ION)@DETECTOR@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00@101 ACL@AL@SMOKE@(ION)@DETECTOR@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00@101 NOTIFIER@TEST@SYSTEM@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ALL@SYSTEMS@NORMAL@@@04;32P@03/01/00 DETECTOR@TEST:ALL@OK@@@02+00+00+00+00+00+00+00+00+00@TOT=002@04;32P@03/01/00 **********@HISTORY@REPORT@END@**********@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
Figure 3-2 AM2020/AFP1010 Special Function History File Printout

2-21
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
Section Four Fire Alarms

The following example illustrates the system format used to display fire alarm conditions: Device Type (relates to Software Type ID) Detectors: Modules: FIXED PHOT D MON NORM CLD FIXED THER D MON PULL STA HEAT(ANALOG) MONITOR ION DUCT DET PULL STATION SMOKE (ION) SMOKE (CONV) SMOKE ION HP WATER FLOW SMOKE ION LP SMOKE(COMBO) SMOKE(PHOTO)
Device Status
Custom Device Label that was entered during programming.
ALARM:@SMOKE(PHOTO)@@@COMPUTER@ROOM FOURTEENTH@FLOOR@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00@124
Software Zone Label of the first software zone that the device was mapped to during programming.
Device Address in the range 01-99. Time and Date Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year SLC Loop Number in the range 1-9, with 0= SLC 10.
NOTE The piezo sounder will pulse for fire alarm conditions.
2-22
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
Section 4.1 Acknowledging a Fire Alarm

To acknowledge a fire alarm condition at the panel:
Push
ACK STEP
and the ALARM: device status will change to ACK AL (Acknowledged Fire Alarm).
When the fire alarm condition clears (either automatically in the case of devices programmed for Tracking, or by depression of the SYSTEM RESET key), the panel will display CLR AL and the piezo will resound. To acknowledge the clearing of a fire alarm:
Push
ACK STEP
and the CLR AL status will change to ACL AL (Acknowledged Clear Fire Alarm).
When multiple events have occurred, the system will display the first event that occurred (with the exception that the first fire alarm will always override any previous trouble). When the ACK STEP key is pushed, the operator will have acknowledged the highest priority event, not necessarily the event that is being displayed on the CRT Monitor and DIA. The acknowledged message for the first prioritized event will be displayed for several seconds, followed by display of the next priority unacknowledged event. NOTES The piezo sounder will be silenced only after all events have been acknowledged. Security alarms are treated like fire trouble conditions in the AM2020/AFP1010. Reset the system using the System Reset Key after all alarms have been investigated and subsequently cleared. Alarm signals from devices not selected for tracking need a system reset in order to clear.
For an AM2020/AFP1010 panel on the NOTIFIRENET system, acknowledgment of any event may be accomplished from the local fire alarm panel, intelligent network annunciator (INA), or network reporting terminal (NRT). Acknowledging alarms and events from any of these locations automatically provides acknowledgment at all locations. Fire alarm signals are acknowledged individually at the local fire alarm panel, NRT, or INA. If the same event on the same point occurs on multiple nodes, the event on the node with the lowest node address has the highest priority. For more information on priorities and acknowledging events on the NOTIFIRENET system, refer to the INA Manual, Document 15092, or the NRT Manual, Document 15090.
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-23
Section Five Troubles

Section 5.1 Trouble ................. with SLC Loop Devices
The following example illustrates the format used to display device trouble conditions:
Device Type (relates to Software Type ID):

Detectors: FIXED PHOT D FIXED THER D HEAT(ANALOG) ION DUCT DET SMOKE (ION) SMOKE ION HP SMOKE ION LP SMOKE(COMBO) SMOKE(PHOTO) Modules: ACCESS MONTR ALARMS PEND AREA MONITOR CMX CONTROL CMX FORM C CONTROL DACT CONNECT EQUIP MONITR FORMC MANUAL FORM C RELAY GENERAL PEND GN ALARM GN ALARM EVC GN ALARM FORC GN SUPR FORC GN TRBL FORC GN WAT FORC GN WATER FLW MON NORM CLD MON PULL STA MONITOR MONITOR PAGE NON ALARM NON ALM MON PAGE POWER (CONV) PULL STATION SMOKE (CONV) SPEAKER SPRNKLR MNTR SPRVSRY MNTR SYSTEM MONTR TELEPHONE TRBL MONITOR TRBLS PEND TROUBLE TROUBLE FORC WATER FLOW Custom Device Label that was entered during programming.
Device Status
TROUBL@SMOKE(PHOTO)@@COMPUTER@ROOM Z087@MAINTENANCE@REQ@@04:32P@03/01/00@124
Software Zone The first zone that the device was mapped to during programming.
Device Address in the range 01-99. Time and Date Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year SLC Loop Number in the range 1-9, with 0=Loop 10. SECURITY NO COM SECURITY TAMPER SHORT CIRCUIT SPRNKLR TROUBLE SUPRVSRY SIGNAL
Type of Trouble:
For Detectors: DET FAILED TEST DEVICE DISABLED DRIFT TOLERANCE INVALID REPLY LOW CHAMBER VAL MAINTENANCE REQ PRE-ALARM ALERT VER COUNT OVFLW For Modules: DEVICE DISABLED INVALID REPLY OPEN CIRCUIT POINT TROUBLE SECURITY ALARM SECURITY ALERT
NOTE The piezo sounder will sound steadily for unacknowledged trouble conditions. 2-24
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
Section 5.2 Trouble .................. with Disabled Zones

The following example illustrates the format used to display disabled zone trouble conditions:
Device Status
Device Type: FORWARD ZONE REVERSE ZONE
Custom Zone Label that was entered during programming.
TROUBL@FORWARD@ZONE@@@FIRST@FLOOR @@@@@ZONE@DISABLED@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00 Z001
Type of Trouble (Fixed)
Time and Date Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year
Zone Address in the range Z001-Z240.
NOTE The piezo sounder will sound steadily for unacknowledged trouble conditions.
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-25
Section 5.3 Trouble ...........................with the AM2020/AFP1010 System

The following example illustrates the format used to display system trouble conditions. For an explanation of some trouble messages, refer to Section Seven.
Device Status
Specific Trouble Message
TROUBL@CATASTROPHIC@LOOP@INTERFACE@BOARD @2@COMMUNICATION@FLT@04:32P@03/01/00@T19
Trouble Index Provide this index to your Notifier Representative for troubleshooting.
Section 5.4 Trouble ..............................with the Annunciators

The following example illustrates the format used to display trouble conditions with the Annunciator Control System modules. For an explanation of some trouble messages, refer to Section Seven.
Device Status
Annunciator Module
Specific Trouble Message
TROUBL@ANNUNCIATOR@01@INSTALLATION@ERROR MAIN@LOBBY@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00@N00
Custom Annunciator Label User defined during programming.
Trouble Index Provide this index to your Notifier Representative for troubleshooting.
NOTE The piezo sounder will sound steadily for unacknowledged trouble conditions.
2-26
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
Section 5.5 Block Acknowledge

The function of block acknowledge gives the user the ability to acknowledge multiple trouble conditions with a single depression of the ACK STEP key. The AM2020/AFP1010 block acknowledge function is normally enabled. With block acknowledge enabled, the AM2020/AFP1010 will function as follows: Fire Alarm conditions including clears (tracking devices only) must be acknowledged individually as described on the preceding pages. Fire Alarm conditions restored by depression of the system reset key do not require acknowledgment. All current unacknowledged conditions must be processed by the system before block acknowledge is executed (events will be acknowledged individually until then). No acknowledged event messages are recorded for individual troubles once the block acknowledge message has been displayed. Trouble clears will be recorded for individual troubles that have not been initiated by a system reset. Trouble clears no longer have to be acknowledged. Troubles may come and go without being acknowledged. Upon completion of block acknowledge the AM2020/AFP1010 will enter its display acknowledged events mode of operation (see displaying current alarms and troubles section). To disable the block acknowledge function, refer to the local parameters NFPA programming section in Chapter Three of this manual. If the AM2020/AFP1010 block acknowledge function is disabled, the AM2020/ AFP1010 will process alarm and trouble conditions in Receiving Unit Mode as described on the preceding and following pages respectively. See caution note below for restrictions.
Push
ACK STEP
to execute block acknowledge. The following message will appear:
**********@BLOCK@ACKNOWLEDGE@*********** @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
CAUTION For an AM2020/AFP1010 connected to a NOTIFIRENET system which also includes an NRT or an AFP-200 panel, receiving mode is not supported and block acknowledge should be enabled. Enabling receiving mode in this situation will prevent the panel from functioning properly and alarms will not be acknowledged. A NOTIFIRENET system is not listed for proprietary receiving unit operation. If no NRT or AFP-200 is present on the network, the AM2020/AFP1010 may be configured for receiving mode or block acknowledge, provided that all other nodes (INAs, AM2020/AFP1010s) on the system are configured in the same manner.
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-27
Section 5.5A Acknowledging Troubles in Receiving Unit Mode (Block Acknowledge Disabled)
The receiving unit mode of operation is required for all NFPA proprietary supervising station and central station receiving units. To acknowledge a device, zone, system or annunciator module trouble condition:
Push
ACK STEP
and the TROUBL status will change to ACK TB (Acknowledged Trouble).
When the trouble condition clears, the panel will display CLR TB and the piezo will sound again. To acknowledge the clearing of a trouble condition:
Push
ACK STEP
and the CLR TB status will change to ACL TB (Acknowledged Clear Trouble).
When multiple events have occurred, the AM2020/AFP1010 will display the first event that occurred (with the exception that the first fire alarm will always override any previous trouble). When the ACK STEP key is pushed, the operator will have acknowledged the highest priority event, not necessarily the event that is being displayed on the CRT Monitor and DIA. The acknowledged message for the first prioritized event will be displayed for several seconds, followed by display of the next priority unacknowledged event. NOTE The piezo sounder will be silenced only after all events have been acknowledged.
Section 5.6 Displaying Current Alarms and Troubles

To display alarms and troubles that have been acknowledged but not cleared:
Push
ACK STEP
and the next event in AM2020/AFP1010 memory will be displayed on the LCD. All events in memory can be reviewed by repeated depression of the ACK STEP key.
2-28
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
Section Six Remote Peripherals

The AM2020/AFP1010 will support the installation of optional remote Video Display Terminals and printers. The CRT Terminal The CRT displays all system information. The CRT can also display system reports if printer reports are redirected to the CRT during programming. The CRT is provided with a keyboard that can be used to program the AM2020/AFP1010. Local Applications Since the system function/control keys (acknowledge, signal silence, and reset) on the CRT keyboard are not key lock or password protected against unauthorized use, in order to comply with the UL listing and the NFPA standards, the keyboard may not be connected to the CRT, with the following exceptions: during programming and maintenance of the system if the system is operated in compliance with the NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling System configuration and the AM2020/AFP1010 panel is the Primary Supervising Station if the modem selection is enabled in System Programming Refer to the TPI-232 Manual for additional CRT-2 options. Receiving Unit Applications If employed under NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System (Receiving Unit) applications, the keyboard cannot be removed or locked up. The keyboard must remain connected and operationally functional in the system. The Printer The printer can be used to provide a permanent record of all system events. Alarms, troubles, and acknowledgments are recorded as they occur in the system. In addition, the printer can be used to print out status information and system reports.
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-29
Section Seven Trouble Messages

Many of the AM2020/AFP1010 device, zone, system and annunciator trouble messages are self-explanatory. Those messages needing further clarification are listed below. If the system is displaying a message that is not self-explanatory and is not listed here, refer to the AM2020/AFP1010 Trouble-shooting Guide (Document 50432) and/or contact your Notifier distributor. .
CAT. COMM. FAULT Catastrophic communications failure - the annunciator associated with this message is no longer functioning. The connection may be broken. CAT. FAIL. INCOMPATIBLE SOFTWARE OR INVALID CBE The panel is operating under an earlier version of software after newer software features have been programmed into the system. Contact the factory to establish valid software compatibility. Complete reprogramming of system CBE equations may be required. CATASTROPHIC LOOP INTERFACE BOARD "X" COMMUNICATION FLT Communication has failed between the AM2020/AFP1010 and the LIB Board specified in the "X" field of the message. This failure may be due to several reasons: the LIB Board has failed electronically; the LIB Board is programmed but not installed in the system; the LIB Board is installed but is not programmed into the system; or a poor connection has been made between the CPU and the LIB Board. COMMUNICATION LINK FAILURE IN PORT A* Data is not being received on network (MIB) Port A. This trouble is only reported if the node is configured for dual port monitoring. COMMUNICATION LINK FAILURE IN PORT B* Data is not being received on network (MIB) Port B. This trouble is only reported if the node is configured for dual port monitoring. DET FAILED TEST This detector failed its periodic detector test. The periodic detector test verifies the alarm operation of the detector. This trouble will also be generated when non NOTIFIER devices are detected on the SLC. The detector should be removed and replaced by an authorized service representative. DRIFT TOLERANCE This detector's drift compensation value is outside the allowable range. This detector can no longer be compensated and should be replaced. EXPANDER MODULES The number of annunciator expander modules for this annunciator is less than the number indicated by its DIP switch settings. EXT EQP ANN "XX" OR AUDIO/TELEPHON External equipment connected to the trouble contacts of an annunciator, AMG or FFT-7 has failed. INSTALL. ERROR Installation error with an Annunciator Control System module. An annunciator has been physically installed in an AM2020/AFP1010 system, but has not been programmed; or has been programmed, but not installed.
INVALID REPLY The AM2020/AFP1010 has received either no response or an invalid response from an addressable LIB SLC Loop device. Confirm that the LIB SLC Loop is connected properly to the device and that the device address has been set correctly. 2-30
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
LAN COMMUNICATION FAILURE* The specific network node (panel) can no longer communicate with the rest of the network, indicating a problem with the network connections. LOW CHAMBER VAL The chamber value of the detector is too low for operation. This indicates a malfunction in the detector. The detector must be removed and replaced by an authorized service representative. MAINTENANCE REQ The chamber value of the detector has exceeded 80 percent of the Alarm Threshold (determined by the sensitivity selection of Low, Medium, or High), and has remained there for at least a 26-hour period. This condition may be due to a dirty detector. The detector should be inspected and cleaned as necessary by an authorized service representative. Failure to do so may eventually result in false alarms. MANUAL CONTROL This annunciator is being controlled manually. PRE-ALARM ALERT The chamber value of the detector has exceeded 80% of the alarm threshold (determined by the sensitivity selection of Low, Medium or High), and has remained there for at least a 60-second period. This condition may be due to a dirty detector. The detector should be inspected and cleaned as necessary by an authorized service representative. Failure to do so may eventually result in false alarms. POINT TROUBLE A monitor module dedicated to monitoring trouble conditions has been activated. SECURITY ALARM A security device programmed as SARM has been activated indicating a burglary or security violation. This condition should be checked immediately. SECURITY ALERT A security device programmed as SACM has been activated indicating that a monitored event has occurred. SECURITY TAMPER A security device programmed as SSYM or SEQM has been activated indicating that monitored equipment has been tampered with. This condition should be checked immediately for a SSYM device because it may be due to a burglary or security violation. SECURITY NO COM The AM2020/AFP1010 has received either no response or an invalid response from an addressable SLC loop device programmed for security operation. This may be the result of a burglary, other security violation, the failure of a device, an improperly addressed device, or failure of the field wiring. SPRNKLR TROUBLE A supervisory condition that indicates sprinkler equipment supervised by a monitor module is in an abnormal state (i.e. a sprinkler valve has been closed). Note that a break in the wiring of a supervisory circuit is a trouble condition that yields OPEN CIRCUIT, not SPRNKLR TROUBLE. SUPRVSRY SIGNAL A supervisory condition that indicates equipment supervised by a monitor module is in an abnormal state (i.e. low pressure indication). Note that a break in the wiring of a supervisory circuit is a trouble condition that yields OPEN CIRCUIT, not SUPRVSRY SIGNAL. VER COUNT OVFLW This detector has exceeded the allowed detector verification limit. This condition may be due to a dirty detector. The detector should be inspected and cleaned as necessary by an authorized service representative. Failure to do so may eventually result in false alarms.
* NOTIFIRENET-specific trouble messages
Operating 15088:J 10/22/99
2-31
Section Eight Drift Compensation

Drift Compensation AM2020/AFP1010 software is designed to automatically compensate for chamber sensitivity drift due to detector contamination in SDX-551/751 photo detectors and CPX-551/751 ion detectors. This software-based compensation meets NFPA 72, Chapter 7 "Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance" periodic sensitivity testing and maintenance requirements without removing and testing each smoke detector in an installed system. This does not eliminate the need for visual inspection or testing for smoke entry. Alarm sensitivity in a detector chamber tends to increase over time. This increase is caused by chamber contamination. In time, if the clean air level exceeds the alarm threshold a false alarm occurs. Drift compensation eliminates this problem by increasing the alarm threshold as needed to maintain constant sensitivity. When the detector is too dirty to compensate, a trouble is indicated automatically. No additional programming is required for drift compensation. Every detector has three sensitivity levels: low, medium, and high. These levels assign specific "percent obscuration per foot" values for each device.
Low Sensitivity Medium Sensitivity High Sensitivity (% obscuration per foot) (% obscuration per foot) (% obscuration per foot) Photo Detector Ion Detector 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.0
Drift compensation is executed when: The system powers up. A non-communication INVALID REPLY clears. Every 120 hours based on at least four samples. Whenever a detector is replaced, an immediate compensation must be forced. The installer should remove the existing detector, wait for at least three minutes, and then install the new detector. After servicing a system containing drift compensation software, some detectors may cause a drift compensation trouble indication within 15 minutes after reapplication of power. These detectors may have undergone several drift sensitivity adjustments in the past and may not be properly compensated during power up compensation. A second compensation may be required before the trouble condition clears. This second compensation will be completed automatically after 120 hours. If a trouble condition for a detector still exists after a second compensation, clean and/or replace it. If power has not been removed and reapplied recently and drift compensation trouble is indicated for a particular device, clean and/or replace the detector immediately.
2-32
Operating 15088: J 10/22/99
AM2020 AFP1010
CHAPTER THREE PROGRAMMING
Programming 15088:J 10/22/99
3-1
3-2
Introduction
This chapter covers the programming options of the AM2020/AFP1010 Combination Fire/Security Protective Signaling System and the features available to the operator. This chapter is presented through the perspective of the CRT-2 Monitor. The prompts are displayed on the CRT screen in the order that they appear (top to bottom) on the pages that follow. For programming the control panel from the built-in keypad, an overview of the panels Display Interface Assembly (DIA-2020 or DIA-1010) is illustrated in Chapter Two, Operation. Installation information for the CRT is located in Chapter 1. Menus At the top of each sub-menu in this programming guide, a string of keys are displayed to illustrate the sequence of keys needed to reach a particular menu. For example:
D } X
Select Programming Mode
1 X 7 X
OR
Select Partial Point Programming Select MESSAGE option to change Custom User Label.
Passwords Access to keypad or menu levels one and two require entry of specific passwords. These levels allow an authorized programmer to initialize or alter the programming of the AM2020/AFP1010. Level One and Level Two entry requirements are defined as follows: Alter Status Programming Level One password required. Level Two password required.
If the main operator of the system requires access to a function which is password protected, contact the distributor who installed the system for the required password(s). The AM2020 and AFP1010 are shipped with initial Level One and Level Two passwords of five zeroes (00000). NOTE Unacknowledged points must be acknowledged prior to being reprogrammed.
Backspace key
The Backspace key serves several purposes. At a menu prompt, the Backspace key aborts the selection of that option:
ENTER@40@CHARACTER@USER@LABEL:
When entering data, the Backspace key erases the last character or digit entered:
ENTER@40@CHARACTER@USER@LABEL:@NOTIFIER
At certain points during operator or programming functions, the Backspace key aborts all the data just entered. For instance, during Full Point Programming, a particular point must be fully programmed before the control panel can use the information. If the Backspace key is pressed at a prompt ( : ) before all parameters (i.e. address, Type ID, equation, etc.) for that point are entered into the control panel, then all previous entries for that point will be ignored. About Transponder Rapid All-Call When the All Call button is pressed on an AMG connected to an AM2020/AFP1010 panel, an All Call activation signal is received by the panel. Upon receipt of the All Call signal, the AM2020/AFP1010 panel will immediately activate all specially programmed XP Transponder "SPKR" (programmed Software Type ID) circuits. Programming is performed in the XP Transponder using the XRAM-1 (see XP Transponder System Manual).
3-3
About SIB-NET The SIB-2048A and SIB-NET serial communications boards are available for use on the AM2020/AFP1010 system (see Chapter One). For the AM2020/AFP1010 with NOTIFIRENET system, only the SIB-NET may be used. If a SIB-NET board is not installed, specific NOTIFIRENET functions can not be programmed or viewed under Read Status. NOTES When a Network Reporting Terminal (NRT) is present on the NOTIFIRENET, programming and read status operations should always be performed from the NRT . If an INA is present on the NOTIFIRENET and no NRT is employed, programming and read status operations should be performed from the INA. Never attempt to perform programming or read status operations from the local panel when the same operations are being performed from the NRT or INA. For more information on performing read status operations on the NRT or INA, refer to the NRT manual, Document 15090 and the INA manual, Document 15092. When changing system programming on NOTIFIRENET, it may be necessary to power down the control panel to synchronize the network.
3-4
The Initial Programming Outline

For initial programming of the AM2020 or AFP1010, or for major changes and additions, the following basic procedure is recommended to prevent errors resulting in reprogramming and wasted time. Make copies of the Program Work Sheets (contained in the Glossary) in the back of this manual. Use these Work Sheets to record the exact information for every detector, module, annunciator point and software zone in the system. Pay special attention to the Software Type IDs listed in Section Three. For voice systems, pay close attention to AMG annunciator point commands as described in Voice Alarm Multiplex-2020 manual. If a CRT is to be used, configure it as described in Chapter 1. Assemble and apply power to the control panel as described in the Installation Chapter (also the VAM2020 manual, if appropriate). All system boards (including all LIBs) must be physically installed. The Level 1 and Level 2 passwords can be changed. The AM2020/AFP1010 is delivered from the factory with passwords of 00000. Write down or memorize your passwords! To change the passwords, enter the following:
D 00000 X 6 X (1 2) X
OR If the control panel is to be programmed before installation of LIB SLC Loop devices, the panel will exit programming and sound the piezo when each programmed device is not detected. To avoid the piezo from sounding, use the following key sequence (after entering the password):
1X7XyXyXyXV
When the first device has been programmed into the system, the control panel will report a trouble condition and will exit programming mode. Important: Do not acknowledge this trouble. Reenter programming mode and the control panel will no longer exit programming or sound the piezo for subsequent trouble conditions. (When programming is complete, remember to enable the piezo sounder for normal system operation.) For initial system programming, read Full System Programming and answer all the questions in that section before entering programming mode. Then, enter Full System Programming and load all the answers into the control panel. Enter Full Point Programming. Use the work sheets developed in the second step of this outline and enter information on all points in the system. Program points in the following order: 1) Annunciator Points 2) Zones 3) Detector Points 4) Module Points When devising Control-By-Event equations for a particular device, remember that the label of the first software zone in the equation will appear on the panel display, along with the label of the device, when an alarm condition occurs. See Label option in Partial Point Programming section for more information. Enter the System Message. Install all devices and thoroughly test the entire system. The Walk Test feature can be used to test devices and their programming. Make a hard-copy record of the program on the printer. If desired, upload the program to store on an external device (computer hard drive or floppy), see Intelligent Serial Interface Board Programming.
3-5
3-6
Section One Main Programming

The Programming Mode is accessed by entering the following (level 2 password required):
D } X
After entering the Programming Mode, the display will show the Main Programming menu:
PRESS@1=PSYS,2=FSYS,3=PPRG,4=FPRG,5=REMV,6=PSWD,7=MSG,8=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The Main Programming menu has eight options, where: 1=PSYS Partial System Programming - Selective programming of system-wide functions (number of LIBs, AVPS-24/AVPS-24E*, ISIB, Signal-Silence Inhibit and Cut-out, Alarm Verification, number of annunciator modules, etc.). Full System Programming - Complete programming of system-wide functions (number of LIBs, AVPS-24/AVPS-24E*, ISIB, Signal-Silence Inhibit and Cutout, Alarm Verification, number of annunciator modules, etc.). Partial Point Programming - Selectively altering the operating parameters of LIB SLC Loop devices, software-defined zones and annunciator points. Full Point Programming - Complete programming of addressable LIB SLC Loop devices, software-defined zones, annunciator points and their respective operating parameters. Remove - Permits the selective removal (from control panel memory) of any of the system's addressable SLC Loop devices, software-defined zones or annunciator points. Password - Allows the programmer to assign custom five-digit Level One and Level Two passwords. Message - Allows the Level Two programmer to define the custom 40-Character User Label displayed on the CRT Monitor and the panel's Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). History - Allows the programmer to enable or disable storage of events and the clearing of stored events. * The number of APS-6R power supplies should be included in the AVPS count. The Main Programming Menu flow chart is located in Figure 1-1. Detailed information on the Main Programming options follows.
2=FSYS
3=PPRG
4=FPRG
5=REMV
6=PSWD
7=MSG
8=HIS
3-7
Press PROG key
Enter Level 2 Password
Valid Password?
No
Error Message
Yes
Select Main Programming Menu Option 1-8
1 = PSYS (partial system programming)
see Figure 1-2
2 = FSYS (full system programming)
see Section 1.2
3 = PPRG (partial point programming)
see Figure 1-10
4 = FPRG (full point programming) 5 = REMV (selective removal of devices, zones, etc.) 6 = PSWD (assign or alter passwords) 7 = MSG (assign or alter message displayed on control panel) 8 = HIS (enable, disable, or clear history buffer)
see Figure 1-13
see Section 1.5
see Section 1.6
see Section 1.7
see Figure 1-14
Figure 1-1 Main Programming Menu Flow Chart

3-8
Section 1.1 Partial System Programming
D }X1X
1=PSYS Option 1 from the Main Programming menu allows the programmer to change the programming of systemwide functions such as Alarm Verification of detectors, Signal-Silence Inhibit, Signal Cut-out, disabling the piezo sounder, enabling Rapid Polling, and enabling supervision of peripheral equipment in the system. Additional system parameters, such as the number of APS-6R, LIBs, Annunciators and ISIB in the system. The LIB SLC Loops can also be changed in Partial System Programming. After selecting option 1 from the Main Programming menu, the display will show the Partial System Programming submenu:
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@@@@@:
NOTE: Submenu option 4 includes APS-6R as well as AVPS power supplies. The Partial System Programming submenu has nine options, where: 1=INST 2=STY 3=TDLY Installation - Installation or removal of the Loop Interface Boards from memory. Style - Changing (in memory) the NFPA style of the SLC Loops. Time Delays - Setting the time delays for Alarm Verification, Signal-Silence Inhibit, and Signal Cut-Out. Audio/Visual Power Supplies - Telling the AM2020/AFP1010 how many Audio/Visual Power Supplies and APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supplies are installed in the system. Zone Boundary - Setting the zone boundary for the software memory map. External Equipment - Changing the external equipment options, such as electrical supervision of the CRT Monitor. Local Parameters - Setting local parameters, such as enabling or disabling the piezo sounder during point programming of SLC Loop devices, LIB Local Mode and NFPA programming. Intelligent Serial Interface Board - Installation or removal of the Intelligent Serial Interface Board (SIB-2048A or SIB-NET) or annunciator modules (see Chapter One, Serial Communications, for a description of annunciator modules). Also used to enable the external interface for upload/download, and Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter selection. Additional System Parameters - Selection of additional system parameters such as the detector day/night sensitivity settings, rapid polling, etc.
4=AVPS
5=ZBND 6=EXTEQ
7=LOCP
8=ISIB
9=PARM
The Partial System Programming Menu flow chart is located in Figure 1-2. Detailed information on the Partial System Programming options follows. NOTES When removing loop interface boards, all installed points on the affected LIBs are automatically removed upon cycling power to the system. Programming information for installed points can be stored in a VeriFire database prior to removal of the LIB. Use of the VeriFire application for the reprogramming of previously removed points is highly recommended. When removing annunciator modules, all installed points on the affected annunciators must be removed first for proper system operation.
3-9
1= PSYS
Select Partial System Programming Submenu Option 1-9 1 = INST (install/remove loop interface boards) 2 = STY (choose NFPA style for SLC loops) 3 = TDLY (setting of alarm verification, signal silence, etc.) 4 = AVPS (program # of supplies for system) 5 = ZBND (set the boundary for software memory map) 6 = EXTEQ (select options for CRT monitor and/or printer) 7 = LOCP (enable/disable piezo sounder, LIB local mode, & NFPA prog)
see Figure 1-3
see Figure 1-4
see Figure 1-5
see Section 1.1.4 Note: Include the number of devices employing the trouble bus. see Section 1.1.5
see Figure 1-6
see Figure 1-7
8 = ISIB (install/remove ISIB)
see Figure 1-8
9 = PARM (day/night sensitivity settings, etc.)
see Figure 1-9
Figure 1-2 Partial System Programming Submenu Flow Chart
3-10
Section
1.1.1
LIB
Installation
}X1X1X
D
1=INST Option 1 from the Partial System Programming submenu allows the installation or removal of LIB SLC Loops from memory. The LIB boards must still be physically installed or removed from the system to prevent a system trouble condition. The Installation Option flow chart is located in Figure 1-3. The AM2020 is capable of a maximum of ten LIB Signaling Line Circuits (1980 devices total in the system). The AFP1010 is capable of a maximum of four LIB Signaling Line Circuits (792 devices total in the system). The following programming example illustrates the installation of Loop Interface Board number 3.
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@@@@@:@1 ENTER@THE@LIB@BOARD@NUMBER@TO@CHANGE@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3 IS@LIB@BOARD@03@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@STYLE@OF@SLC@LOOP@03@(6@OR@4)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@ANOTHER@LIB@BOARD?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N PROGRAMMING@COMPLETE@@-@@POWER@DOWN@TO@MAKE@APPROPRIATE@CHANGES
Refer to Chapter One of this manual for information on LIB-400 and its correct slot address. See notes in Section 1.1, Partial System Programming.
Section 1.1.2 LIB SLC Loop Style
D }X1X2X
2=STY Option 2 from the Partial System Programming submenu allows the programmer to change in AM2020/ AFP1010 memory the NFPA style for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) connected to each LIB. The SLC must still be field wired in accordance with the style set in memory (Chapter One-Installation). The Style Option flow chart is located in Figure 1-4. The following programming example illustrates setting SLC Loop number 5 as an NFPA Style 6 circuit. The CRT screen prompts are displayed in the priority that they appear (top to bottom).
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@@@@@:@2 ENTER@THE@SLC@LOOP@NUMBER@TO@CHANGE@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@5 ENTER@THE@STYLE@OF@SLC@LOOP@05@(6@OR@4)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@ANOTHER@SLC@LOOP?@(Y=YES,N=N0)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
Change another LIB?
1 = INST
Enter LIB board # (1-10)
Install/Remove LIB selected
Enter Style of SLC Loop
No
Yes
(Exit Prog Mode)
Figure 1-3 Install Option Flow Chart

Change Another Style? Yes
2 = STY
Enter Loop #
Enter NFPA Style for loop (6 or 4)
No
(Exit Prog Mode)
Figure 1-4 Style Option Flow Chart

3-11
Section 1.1.3 Time Delays
D }X1X3X
3=TDLY Option 3 from the Partial System Programming submenu allows the programmer to enable/disable Alarm Verification of detectors, Signal-Silence Inhibit and Signal Cut-out for control modules, as well as setting the appropriate time delays for these functions. For a full description of these functions, see the Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations at the end of this manual.
3 = TDLY
Change Detector Verification Time? No
Yes
Enable Detector Verification Time? No
Yes
Enter Detector Verification Time (5-50 sec)
Change Signal Silence Inhibit Time?
Yes
Enable Signal Silence Inhibit Time
Yes
Enter Signal Silence Inhibit Time (1-255 sec)
No
No
Change Signal CutOut Time?
Yes
Enable Signal CutOut Time?
Yes
Enter Signal CutOut Time (1-2040 sec)
No
No
(Exit Prog Mode)
Figure 1-5 Time Delay Option Flow Chart

The following programming example illustrates enabling all three functions:
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@ DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME?@(Y=YES,N=NO) DO@YOU@WANT@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME@(5@-@50@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS) DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME?@(Y=YES,N=NO) DO@YOU@WANT@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) ENTER@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME@(1@-@255@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS) DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME?@(Y=YES,N=NO) DO@YOU@WANT@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) ENTER@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME@(1@-@2040@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS) :@3 :@Y :@Y :@35 :@Y :@Y :@240 :@Y :@Y :@600
3-12
General Considerations The capability of the control panel to provide the functions of Alarm Verification, Signal Cut-out, and SignalSilence Inhibit can be enabled/disabled by the programmer in both Full and Partial System Programming. However, to make use of these functions, the Signal Silence option (for silenceable control modules) and the Alarm Verification option (for addressable detectors) must still be enabled/disabled individually for each SLC Loop device under Full or Partial Point Programming. For instance, when programming Alarm Verification: Under Full or Partial System Programming, the programmer turns Alarm Verification ON and sets the verification time period. Under Full or Partial Point Programming, the programmer individually selects Alarm Verification for each detector: Detector 1 = YES Detector 2 = NO Detector 3 = YES Detector 4 = YES and so forth for each detector in the system. For signal cut-out, the data can be entered in one second increments: however, the AM2020/AFP1010 will round up to the nearest value/increment of 8. For example, if 7 is entered, the displayed value will be 8. If 9 or 15 is entered, the displayed value is 16. If 60 is entered, the value is 64.
Section 1.1.4 Enabling the Trouble Bus
D }X1X4X
4=AVPS The presence of auxiliary power supplies (formerly the AVPS-24) and other optional devices employing the trouble bus connector at P5 on the CPU must be programmed into memory by selecting option 4 from the Partial System Programming submenu. At the prompt "ENTER THE NUMBER OF AVPS-24 INSTALLED IN THE SYSTEM (0-16)", enter the total number of devices employing the trouble bus. The devices must be physically installed and connected to P5 on the CPU to prevent creating a system trouble condition. The example below illustrates the software installation of two AA-30 amps, one AA-120 amp, and two APS-6R power supplies.
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@@@@@:@4 ENTER@THE@NUMBER@OF@AVPS-24@INSTALLED@IN@THE@SYSTEM@(0@-@16)@@@@@@@@:@5
Section 1.1.5 Zone Boundary
D }X1X5X
5=ZBND The AM2020/AFP1010 can make use of up to 240 software-defined zones. These zones can be either forwardactivated (FZON) or reverseactivated (RZON), depending upon the particular installation requirements. These forward and reverse zones must be grouped separately, with the forward group always preceding the reverse group. The highest forward-activated zone in the system is the Zone Boundary, which must be in the range of Z001 - Z239. For a full description of Forward and Reverse Activating Software Zone, see the Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations at the end of this manual. Unless the use of complex Control-By-Event or Cooperative Control-By-Event Equations is required in the system, set the Zone Boundary to Z200 (default). (For more information, see Control-By-Event Programming and Cooperative Control-By-Event Programming). Forward Zones Z001 Reverse Zones Zone Boundary Z240
The following programming example illustrates setting the Zone Boundary for zone 200.
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@@@@@:@5 ENTER@ZXXX@OF@HIGHEST@FORWARD@ACTIVATED@ZONE@IN@SYSTEM@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z200
3-13
Section
1.1.6
External
Equipment
}X1X6X
Terminal Supervision -

6=EXTEQ Option 6 from the Partial System Programming Menu allows the changing of any optional features associated with the CRT Monitor or Printer(s). Electrical supervision of the CRT Monitor. Unless terminal supervision is selected, the CRT will not beep (i.e., no bell characters will be sent) when unacknowledged troubles or unacknowledged alarms are present. The bottom line of the CRT will display the number of unacknowledged alarms and troubles, and the total number of alarms and troubles in the system. The Terminal Status Line appears on the CRT display only. The AM2020/AFP1010 will monitor the auxiliary printer's Ready/Busy line for error conditions. Note: The P40 is a special internal 40-column printer. This option should not be enabled for external 80-column printers. Control module state changes will be printed out. Module state changes for modules with the Software Type ID NONA or NOA will be printed out. See Software Type IDs for further information on all Software Type IDs. Enables 99-device LED latching. See restrictions under LED Latching. Data will be transmitted to the printer under Printer Error conditions (Paper Out or Printer Off Line generates an error condition under which data may be lost). Enable for special applications only. The CRT will process data received through its AUX port. Enable for special applications only (see the CCM-1 Product Installation Document). The AM2020/AFP1010 monitors the primary printer's Rx line for error conditions. This option inhibits the generation of a trouble message for Paper Out or Printer Off Line. Enable for special applications only (see the VGAS Installation manual). System reports will be echoed to the CRT interface. Enable for special applications only (see the VGAS Installation Manual and the NAM-232 For Use With AM2020/AFP1010 Manual, Document 50424).
Terminal Status Line -
Auxiliary Printer Monitoring -
Control Module Reporting NONA/NOA Module Reporting -
LED LATCH -
Printer Error Continue -
Bidirectional Copy -
Printer Trouble Inhibit -
Printer Reports Redirected to CRT-
The External Equipment Option flow chart is located in Figure 1-6.
3-14
6 = EXTEQ
Change Terminal Supervision?
No Change Terminal Status Line?
Yes Enable/Disable Terminal Supervision
No Change Aux Printer Prog?
Yes Enable/Disable Terminal Status Line
No Change Control Module State Reporting? Enable/Disable Aux Printer
Yes Enable/Disable Aux Printer
Yes
No
No All devices purchased after 4/1/91?
Change NONA/ NOA Module State Reporting?
No
Yes Enable/Disable NONA/NOA State Reporting
Yes
Change Bidirectional Copy?
No
Change Printer Error Handling?
Enable/Disable LED Latching
Yes Yes No
Enable/Disable Data Transmit During Printer Error
Enable/Disable Bidirectional Copy
Change Primary Printer Prog?
No Change Printer Report Handling?
Yes Enable/Disable Primary Printer Trouble
No
Yes Enable/Disable Printer Reports Redirected to CRT
(Exit Prog Mode)
Figure 1-6 External Equipment Option Flow Chart
3-15
The following programming example illustrates enabling of all external equipment functions except transmit of data during printer error conditions, bidirectional copy, primary printer trouble error reporting, and redirecting printer reports to the CRT.
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@@@:@6 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@TERMINAL@SUPERVISION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@TERMINAL@SUPERVISION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@TERMINAL@STATUS@LINE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@TERMINAL@STATUS@LINE@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@AUXILIARY@PRINTER@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO): @@@@;@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@AUXILIARY@PRINTER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@CONTROL@MODULE@STATE@REPORTING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@CONTROL@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@"NONA"/NOA"@MODULE@STATE@REPORTING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@"NONA"/NOA"@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@ :@Y WERE@ALL@ADDRESSABLE@DEVICES@FACTORY-PURCHASED@AFTER@4/1/1?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@"LED@LATCHING"@FOR@MORE@DEVICES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PRINTER@ERROR@HANDLING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@TRANSMIT@DATA@UNDER@PRINTER@ERROR@CONDITIONS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@:@N DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@BIDIRECTIONAL@COPY@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@BIDIRECTIONAL@COPY@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PRIMARY@PRINTER@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PRIMARY@PRINTER@TROUBLE@INHIBITED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PRINTER@REPORT@HANDLING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REDIRECT@PRINTER@REPORTS@TO@THE@TERMINAL?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@:@N NEW@ALM:@0000@@@TOT@ALM:@0000@@@NEW@TBL:@0000@@@TOT@TBL:@0000
Terminal Status Line The terminal status line also displays signal silence information in the same manner as the Signal Silence LED. The Signal Silence field displays the messages ALL SILENCED, PARTIAL SILENCE or is blank for a non-silenceable system.
ALARM:@SMOKE(PHOTO)@COMPUTER@ROOM@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@03:58P@03/01/00@101 @@@SIGNAL@SILENCE@@@@@@@@REQUESTED@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@03:58P@03/01/00@101 NEW@ALM:@0001@@@TOT@ALM:@0001@@@NEW@TBL:@0000@@@TOT@TBL:@0000@@@ALL@SILENCED
LED Latching The AM2020/AFP1010 offers an LED-latching option:

DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@"LED@LATCHING"@FOR@MORE@DEVICES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:
If you respond N for no, the control panel will employ a default latching algorithm, which limits the number of addressable device LEDs that will illuminate when the device is in alarm. With this option programmed NO, after six alarm initiating addressable devices are in alarm any additional devices going into alarm will not light their integral LED, nor any remote annunciator such as the RA400Z. This situation could impact system operation if DHX-501 duct detectors are configured to control fan systems or other building equipment from their integral relay because the relay is controlled by the detector's LED. If the duct detector is not one of the first six addressable devices reporting an alarm, then it can not control its integral relay. However, if the programming option is set YES, then their integral LED will light when the duct detector is in alarm and the relay will transfer. If you respond Y for yes, optional latching for more devices will be employed. Default Latching Maximum of six devices can be latched at once (five modules maximum). Detectors have priority over modules. After six devices have been latched, detectors that come into alarm will assume LED-latch priority over previously-latched module LEDs. Under secondary (DC) power, only intelligent detectors (including DHX-501 Duct Detectors) will be latched.
3-16
Optional Latching for More Devices The control panel will latch up to 99 devices, subject to the limitations outlined below. All devices in the system must be of the R4 variety (see below). No RA-400 Remote LEDs can be installed on any device, excluding the DHX-501 Duct Detectors. Due to a finite amount of 24 VDC power available for devices on each SLC Loop, illumination of only a certain quantity of LEDs will actually be visible under conditions where large numbers of LEDs have been latched on. Note that remote LEDs off of DHX-501 Duct Detectors will always illuminate since they are powered from a source other than the SLC Loop. Under primary (AC) power, 99 devices can be latched. Detectors have priority over modules. After 99 devices have been latched, detectors that come into alarm will assume LED-latch priority over previously-latched module LEDs. Under secondary (DC) power, only intelligent detectors (including DHX-501 Duct Detectors) will be latched. Due to a finite amount of 24 VDC power available for devices on each SLC Loop, illumination of only a certain quantity of LEDs will actually be visible under conditions where large numbers of LEDs have been latched on. Note that remote LEDs off of DHX-501 Duct Detectors will always illuminate since they are powered from a source other than the SLC Loop.
MORE LED latching can only be employed if ALL installed addressable devices were purchased from the Notifier factory after April 1, 1991. Use of this feature under any other circumstances can cause the SLC Loops to shut down. Devices compatible with more LED latching will have the code R4 stamped on the product marking label. SDX-551/751 Photoelectric detectors can also have an H code after the model number.
NOTES Modules refer to monitor and control modules, and XP Transponder circuits. Devices are defined as intelligent detectors and modules. Software Type IDs PWRC, NCMN, SCON and NOA will never latch under Default Latching.
3-17
Section 1.1.7 Local Parameters
D }X1X7X
7=LOCP Option 7 of the Partial System Programming Menu allows the changing of Local Parameters, such as enabling/ disabling the panels piezo sounder (for trouble conditions while programming SLC Loop devices into memory), LIB Local Mode, NFPA listings, battery parameters, event reminder, device blink, and pre-alarm programming.
7 = LOCP
Change Piezo Condition?
No Chane LIB Local Mode? Yes Program Local Mode? Yes Enter Max Address For Detector (1-99) Enter Max Address For Monitor Module (1-99)
Yes Enable/Disable Silencing of Piezo during Prog No No Local Mode Addresses Cleared Enter Max Address for Control Module (1-99)
Enter Battery Type NICAD Battery?
Yes
Change Battery Prog?
No
Change NFPA Listing?
Yes Enter Battery Cpacity (9-32 AHR) No Yes
Select NFPA Listing
Program/ Remove Listing
Enter Battery Standby Time No
Enable/Disable High Rate Charge
Change Event Reminder?
No Change Device Blink?
Yes
No Change Pre-Alarm Function?
Enable/Disable Event Reminder
Yes
No
(Exit Prog Mode)

Enable/Disable Device Blink Yes Enable/Disable Pre-Alarm Function
Figure 1-7 Local Parameter Option Flow Chart

3-18
The following programming example illustrates the disabling of the panels piezo sounder, programming LIB Local Mode, modifying NFPA listings, programming the battery parameters, changing the event reminder, device blink and pre-alarm programming. NOTE The sounder must be enabled upon completion of programming!
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@:@7 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PIEZO@TROUBLE@CONDITION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PIEZO@SOUNDER@SILENCED@WHILE@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@LIB@LOCAL@MODE@PARAMETERS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@LOCAL@MODE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@DETECTOR@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@99 ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@MONITOR@MODULE@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@:@99 ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@CONTROL@MODULE@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@:@99 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y SELECT@NFPA@LISTING@-@1=72A,2=72B,3=72C,4=72D,5=71,6=RCV@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@OR@REMOVE@THIS@LISTING?@(Y=PRG,N=RMV)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y SELECT@NFPA@LISTING@-@1=72A,2=72B,3=72C,4=72D,5=71,6=RCV@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@OR@REMOVE@THIS@LISTING?@(Y=PRG,N=RMV)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@BATTERY@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@TYPE@OF@BATTERY@INSTALLED@(L=LEAD-ACID,N=NICAD)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@BATTERY@CAPACITY?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@BATTERY@CAPACITY@(9@-@32@IN@1@AHR@INCREMENTS)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@12 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@BATTERY@STANDBY@TIME?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@BATTERY@STANDBY@TIME@(4,@24,@48@OR@60@HR)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@48 DO@YOU@WANT@24@HOUR@HIGH@RATE@CHARGE@FOR@BATTERY?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@EVENT@REMINDER@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@EVENT@REMINDER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@DEVICE@BLINK?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@DEVICE@BLINK@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PRE-ALARM@FUNCTION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PRE-ALARM@FUNCTION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
General Operation of the Piezo Sounder The piezo sounder provides feedback each time a key is pressed on the DIA. The piezo sounder sounds for unacknowledged alarm conditions. The piezo sounder sounds steadily for unacknowledged trouble or supervisory conditions. The piezo sounder chirps periodically (approximately every 12 seconds) for acknowledged conditions remaining in the system upon selection of the Event Reminder option.
3-19
Local Mode Operation Local Mode operation allows the LIB-200, LIB-200A, and LIB-400 boards to run independently of the CPU if CPU to LIB communications should fail. Local Mode is programmed in the Local Parameters portion of System Programming. The programmer identifies all of the SLC addressable control points (modules and transponder points) at and below the boundary address programmed, that are to be activated upon alarm. Detector and monitor module Local Mode addresses are no longer supported. All detectors and monitor modules participate in Local Mode. The programmer should enter 99 for detector and monitor module Local Mode Addresses. All LIB boards use the same control-by-event, with the following format: IF Any intelligent detector with an address less than or equal to the maximum detector Local Mode address is in alarm. Any monitor module with an address less than or equal to the maximum monitor module Local Mode address is in alarm. All control modules with an address less than or equal to the maximum control module Local Mode address will be activated.
AND/OR
THEN
Extended Local Mode Operation Devices local to each individual LIB are divided into Local Mode categories based on Software Type IDs. All devices within the Local Mode address range will participate in Local Mode. Below is a description of each Local Mode category and a table showing which device types reside in each category. For complete definitions of Software Type IDs, refer to Section Three, Software Type IDs.
1
PHOT ION THER MON PULL FTHR WAT SCON NCMN NONA FPHT MPUL IOND IONH IONL CMBO
2
MTRB MPAG NOA SARM SSYM SACM SEQM
CATEGORY
3
SPSU SUPR
4
WAT
5
CON SPKR FORC CMXS CMXC FRCM
6
TPND GPND GTC TRS TRC DACT
7
TELE PAGE
8
APND EVGA GAS GAC
9
WFS WFC
A
SSC
B
PWRC
DESCRIPTION
If any of the participating standard inititating devices in Category 1 become active, then at a minimum all participating indicating devices in Category 5 will be activated (other indicating devices may activate as a side effect of standard initiating device activation.) These initiating devices are never acted on by local mode and have no side effects for other devices. If these initiating devices become active, Type ID SSC will activate. If these initiating devices become active, Type IDs WFS and WFC will activate. If any of the participating standard initiating devices in Category 1 become active, then all participating standard indicating devices in Category 5 become active. During local mode these indicating devices are always active. These indicating devices will activate if they participate in local mode. These indicating devices will activate if any participating or nonparticipating alarm input is active. These indicating devices will activate if any initiating module with Type ID WAT is active. These indicating devices will activate if any initiating module with Type ID SPSU or SUPR is active. These devices deactivate temporarily upon system reset to remove power to conventional devices allowing them to reset.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B
Table 1-1 Extended Local Mode Categories and Software Type IDs
3-20
NFPA Listings NFPA listing allows the programmer to change the operation of the panel based on the NFPA listings selected. Each listing will select one or more mandatory modules. Listing * NFPA 72 (72A) Local Fire Alarm Systems NFPA 72 (72B) Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems ** NFPA 72 (72C) Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems Software ID EVGA GAS GAC GAC Address L1M96 L1M97 L1M98 L1M99
** NFPA 72 (72D) Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems ** NFPA 72 (71) Central Station Fire Alarm Systems Receiving Unit (RCV) and Central Station Unit
n/a n/a n/a
n/a n/a n/a
* Fire alarm input devices automatically default to latching operation when the 72A listing is selected. ** NFPA 72 (72C), (72D), and (71) are no longer required and should not be selected during programming. Once a module is programmed by an NFPA Listing selection, that module can only be removed from the system by de-selection of that same listing. Selection of RCV disables the block acknowledge function. RCV must be enabled for all Central Station Receiving and Proprietary and Protected Premises receiving units. RCV is not supported by NOTIFIRENET systems that contain an NRT or AFP-200 panel. NOTES Modules must be connected on the LIB SLC Loop with the appropriate address(es) set in order to avoid trouble conditions. NFPA modules selected must be in their normal state or acknowledged prior to de-selection otherwise trouble conditions may not clear from the panel memory. Pre-Alarm Function The pre-alarm function causes the FACP to generate a trouble message when the chamber value of the detector has exceeded 80% of the alarm threshold (determined by the sensitivity selection of low, medium, high). With pre-alarm enabled, the 80% condition must be present for at least a 60 second period and will indicate a "PRE-ALARM ALERT" message on the FACP after that period. With pre-alarm disabled the 80% condition must be present for at least a 26 hour period and will indicate a "MAINTENANCE REQ" message on the FACP after that period. NOTE This condition (detector exceeding 80% of alarm threshold) may be due to a dirty detector. The detector should be inspected and cleaned as necessary by an authorized service representative. Failure to do so may result in a false alarm.
3-21
Section 1.1.8 Intelligent Serial Interface Board Programming
D }X1X8X
8=ISIB Option 8 from the Partial System Programming Menu allows the programmer to change parameters associated with an Intelligent Serial Interface Board (ISIB). ISIB Programming has four submenu options, ISIB Installation, Annunciator Installation, External Interface Parameters and UDACT Selection. Detailed descriptions of the four ISIB programming options are located on the pages that follow. The SIB-2048A and SIB-NET ISIBs are available for use with the AM2020/ AFP1010. For AM2020/AFP1010 with NOTIFIRENET the SIB-NET is the only ISIB available. Refer to Chapter One, Serial Communications, for a description of available intelligent serial interface boards.
8 = ISIB
Select ISIB
Submenu Option 1-4
1 = INSTL
(Sib installation)
Change ISIB?
Yes
Enable/Disable ISIB
No
(annunciator installation)
2 = ANN
Enter annunciator to be changed (1-32)
Yes
Install annunciator selected?
Yes
Enter Label
Change Another?
No
No
3 = XINT
(external interface)
Change Upload/ Download? Yes Enable/Disable Upload/Download?
No
Change SIB Address?
Yes Enter SIB Address
No
Change Channel A Threshold? Yes Enter Channel A Threshold
No
Change Channel B Threshold? Yes Enter Channel B Threshold
No
Change MIB Data Port Monitoring?
No
Change ACK/SIL/RES?
No
Yes Enter Number of Channels to Monitor
Yes Do you want ACK/SIL/RES disabled at panel?
No
Do you want ACK/SIL/RES reenabled on LAN Comm Fault?
No
4 = DACT
(communicator transmitter)
Change UDACT programming?
Yes
Install UDACT?
No
ISIBFLOW.CDR
Yes No Enter base address (1-32) (Exit Program Mode)
3-22
Figure 1-8 Intelligent Serial Interface Board Option Flow Chart
After entering option 8 from the Partial System Programming submenu, the display will show the ISIB submenu:
PRESS@1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :
1=INSTL - ISIB Installation
D }X1X8X1X
:@1 :@Y :@Y
This option allows the installation or removal of the Intelligent Serial Interface Board from control panel memory. The board must still be physically installed or removed from the system to prevent a system trouble condition. The following programming example illustrates the installation of the Intelligent Serial Interface Board.
PRESS@1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB?@(Y=YES,N=NO) DO@YOU@WANT@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) PROGRAMMING@COMPLETE@@-@@POWER@DOWN@TO@MAKE@APPROPRIATE@CHANGES
See notes in Section 1.1, Partial System Programming. 2=ANN - Annunciator Installation
D }X1X8X2X
:@2 :@1 :@Y :@N
This option allows the installation or removal of annunciators (EIA-485 devices) from the AM2020/AFP1010 memory. The modules must still be physically installed or removed from the system to prevent a system trouble condition. The following programming example illustrates the installation of annunciator module 1.
PRESS@1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT ENTER@THE@ANNUNCIATOR@NUMBER@TO@CHANGE@(1@-@32) IS@ANNUNCIATOR@01@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO) ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL :@ANNUNCIATOR@ONE DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@ANOTHER@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO) PROGRAMMING@COMPLETE@@-@@POWER@DOWN@TO@MAKE@APPROPRIATE@CHANGES
* The SCS-8 and SCS-8L firmware has been updated in conjunction with Software Release 2.8. The new SCS firmware is not backward compatible with older revisions of software. 3=XINT - External Interface Parameters
D }X1X8X3X
This option allows the programmer to change the parameters associated with the external interface port. The following example illustrates enabling all associated parameters.
* * * * * * * * PRESS@1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@ACS PORT@UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD?@(Y=YES,N=NO) DO@YOU@WANT@THE@ACS PORT@UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ADDRESS?@(Y=YES,N=NO) ENTER@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ADDRESS@(0@-@249)@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@MIB-W@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@A?@(Y=YES,N=NO) ENTER@THE@MIB-W@VALUE@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@A@(H=HIGH,L=LOW) DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@MIB-W@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@B?@(Y=YES,N=NO) ENTER@THE@MIB-W@VALUE@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@B@(H=HIGH,L=LOW) DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@MIB@DATA@PORT@USAGE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) DO@YOU@WANT@TO@USE@BOTH@MIB@DATA@PORTS?@(Y=YES,N=NO) DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@ACK/SIL/RES@LOCKOUT@SETTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO) * DO@YOU@WANT@ACK/SIL/RES@LOCKED@OUT@AT@THE@PANEL?@(Y=YES,N=NO) * DO@YOU@WANT@ACK/SIL/RES@RE-ENABLED@DURING@LAN@COMM@FAULT?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@3 :@Y :@Y :@Y :@249 :@Y :@L :@Y :@H :@Y :@Y :@Y :@Y :@Y
* These items are NOTIFIRENET specific functions and are only programmed when a SIB-NET is used. NOTES
During an upload/download, the fire protection capability of the AM2020/AFP1010 is enabled (it is limited for download). To reduce the risk of incompatible databases, the programmer should NEVER program any parameters into the control panel while an upload/download is in progress. To communicate over the external interface, the annunciator modules MUST first be disconnected since both functions use the same serial port. When an Intelligent SIB Board is changed from one address to another, the CCBE is lost. If the address is changed back to the previous address, CCBE will return.
3-23
4=DACT - UDACT Installation
D }X1X8X4X
This option allows the installer to program a Notifier UDACT (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter) and specify its base annunciator protocol address in the system. The example below illustrates programming a UDACT. Before programming a UDACT into an AM2020/AFP1010 system, the number of annunciator addresses required must be determined. First, take the number of annunciator points in the system and add 8 points (for the UDACT). Then, divide the total by 64 to obtain the number of annunciator addresses required (round up to next whole number if decimal). PRESS 1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE UDACT PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) DO YOU WANT A UDACT INSTALLED? (Y=YES,N=NO) ENTER THE BASE ADDRESS FOR UDACT OPERATION (1@-@32) :@4 :@Y :@Y :@1
NOTES The UDACT can only be programmed into or removed from the system through the Partial System Programming Menu. The UDACT must be programmed at an installed annunciator address. Once programmed, the first 8 annunciator protocol points (base address only) automatically become unique fire panel status indicators (see UDACT Manual). These 8 functions required by the UDACT override any previous AM2020/AFP1010 annunciator point programming. When a UDACT is installed, the first 8 AM2020/ AFP1010 annunciator points associated with the UDACT base address cannot be reprogrammed/ removed and have no read status functionality. Answering "NO" for the question, "Do you want a UDACT installed?" disables the automatic 8 point UDACT programming and restores these points to their original annunciator point programming. Multiple annunciator addresses may need to be programmed depending upon the range specified by the UDACT annunciator address switches. The UDACT cannot be used in systems containing an AVPS-24/AVPS-24E, AA-30/AA-30E, AA-120, AA-120E or XP Transponder since a primary power failure signal transmission will not be delayed as required for this application. When using the UDACT in a system with a NIB-96, use care to ensure that the EIA-485 addresses selected do not overlap with those of the NIB-96. When a UDACT is programmed into the system, both the red and yellow LEDs will illuminate on an annunciator point mapped to a supervisory input during the presence of a supervisory signal for that point, unless the supervisory ACS reporting option has been enabled. Off-premises transmission of security alarms using the UDACT must be made by mapping input points with the Software Type ID SACM and SEQM to annunciator points within the range of the UDACT. Use of other security Type IDs for this purpose will result in simultaneous transmission of a trouble signal. Multiple UDACT usage per AM2020/AFP1010 system is not permitted.
3-24
Section 1.1.9 Additional System Parameters
D }X1X9X
9=PARM This option allows the programmer to enable/disable additional system parameters such as the day/night sensitivity of detectors or rapid polling. For a full description of these functions, see the Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations at the end of this manual.
9 = PARM
Change High Day/ Night Zone?
Yes
Enable High Zone?
Yes
Enter Zone # to be set High
No
No*
Change Low Day/ Night Zone?
Yes
Enable Low Zone?
Yes
Enter Zone # to be Set Low
No
No*
* Zone Cleared
Change Detector Verification Trouble Counter? No
Yes
Enable Detector Verification Trouble?
Yes
Enter Detector Verification Trouble Count (1-20)
No
Change SACM/SEQM Module State Reporting?
Yes
Enable/Disable SACM/SEQM State Reporting
No
Change Drift Compensation ?
Yes
Enable/Disable Drift Compensation
No
Change Pager Prog?
Yes
Enable/Disable Pager
No
Change Modem Prog?
Yes
Enable/Disable Modem
No
Change NAM Prog?
Yes
Enable/Disable NAM
No
Change Rapid Polling Prog?
Yes
Enable/Disable Rapid Polling
No
Change Supervisory ACS Reporting?
Yes
Enable Supervisory ACS Reporting?
No
(Exit Prog Mode)
Figure 1-9 Additional System Parameters Option Flow Chart

3-25
The following programming example illustrates enabling these functions.

PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM :@9 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@A@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y ENTER@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE@(ZXXX) @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z150 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@A@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y ENTER@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE@(ZXXX) :@Z1 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@ DETECTOR@ VER.@TROUBLE @COUNTER?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@ DETECTOR@ VERIFICATION @TROUBLE @ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y ENTER@DETECTOR@ VERIFICATION @TROUBLE@ COUNT@(1@-@20 :@15 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@"SACM"/"SEQM"@MODULE@STATE@REPORTING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@"SACM"/"SEQM"@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@DRIFT@COMPENSATION@OPERATION?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@DRIFT@COMPENSATION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PAGER@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PAGER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@MODEM@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@MODEM@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@NAM@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@NAM@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@N DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@RAPID@POLLING@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@RAPID@POLLING@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO @YOU @WANT @TO@ CHANGE@ THE @SUPERVISORY@ MODULE@ ACS @REPORTING?@ (Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y DO@ YOU@ WANT@ SUPERVISORY@ MODULES @TO@ ILLUMINATE@ ACTIVE @LED?@ (Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
Day/Night Sensitivity The function of Day/Night sensitivity is to force intelligent detectors into high or low sensitivity when the appropriate zones are active, regardless of the detectors normal sensitivity setting. If both the high and low zones are active, the system is forced to high sensitivity. The Day/Night high and low sensitivity zones may be individually activated by control-by-event (CBE) equations written for this purpose or through the use of control-by-time equations. The capability of the control panel to provide the function of day/night sensitivity can be enabled/disabled in both Full and Partial System Programming. However, the day/night sensitivity option (for addressable detectors) must be enabled/disabled individually for each SLC Loop device. The following must be performed when programming Day/Night Detector Sensitivity: Enable the Day/Night Sensitivity and set the zone number. This is a global setting. Select Day/Night Sensitivity for each individual detector. For example: Detector Detector Detector Detector 1 2 3 4 = YES = NO = YES = YES
Detector Verification Trouble If set, the control panel will generate a trouble for each intelligent detector which exceeds the verification counter trouble limit. This feature can be used to isolate those devices which excessively go into detector verification before causing false alarm conditions in the panel. To clear this condtion reset the detector verification counters as described in Section 2.6. SACM/SEQM Module Reporting If selected for reporting, module state changes for modules with the Software Type ID SACM or SEQM will be printed out. See Software Type IDs for further information on all Software Type IDs. Drift Compensation If set, the addressable detectors will automatically compensate for environmental contaminants and other factors over time, until the drift tolerance value has been exceeded. When the drift tolerance value has been exceeded, the control panel will signal a maintenance alert for the apropriate detector. 3-26
Pager The Pager mode must be enabled when a compatible pager is connected to the auxiliary printer port. Modem If enabled, the following remote device (CRT) functions are inhibited: ACK STEP, SIGNAL SILENCE, SYSTEM RESET, PROGRAMMING, and ALTER STATUS. This option must be employed when a modem is used to receive signals from an off-premise device or when the keyboard is to remain attached to the CRT in a system that is not configured and operated as a Proprietary Fire Alarm System. See the TPI-232 manual. NAM The NAM-232 is used to tie a remote FACP to the NOTIFIRENET via telephone lines. If the NAM is enabled, the following options are automatically programmed as indicated: Terminal Supervision = Enabled Terminal Status Line = Enabled Receiving Unit Mode = Enabled Event Reminder = Disabled Reports Redirected to Terminal = Enabled Modem = Disabled
This special application only supports the ACKNOWLEDGE, SIGNAL SILENCE, and SYSTEM RESET network functions and is intended for Protected Premises Fire Alarm System (Local) use only. Local use of a CRT, printer or other 232 device from the remote FACP is prohibited. No other system network functions can be implemented due to system contraints. For more information refer to the NAM-232 for Use With AM2020/ AFP1010 Manual, Document 50424. Rapid Polling The AM2020/AFP1010 has the option to utilize a rapid polling algorithm to process certain monitor modules on a priority basis. When used properly, this can result in a much faster response from fire alarm call points (pull stations) and security devices. If Rapid Polling is enabled, the first 20 module addresses on each LIB SLC loop are polled more frequently than the other addresses and should be used for high priority input devices when using this feature. However, as a consequence all other SLC addresses will be polled less frequently. XPM8 circuits and output devices (CMX and XPC-8 circuits) should not be assigned addresses in the rapid polling range. Supervisory Module ACS Reporting If selected for reporting, activation of modules with the Software Type ID SUPR or SPSU will cause the primary (top) LED to light instead of the secondary (bottom) LED for an ACS Annunciator Point. This feature must be enabled for proper transmission of supervisory signal transmission with ADEMCO contact ID mode on a UDACT communicator.
3-27
Section 1.2 Full System Programming
D }X2X
2=FSYS Option 2 from the Programming Menu walks the programmer through complete initial programming of system-wide functions. Alarm Verification, Signal-Silence Inhibit, Signal Cut-Out, and the supervision of peripherals are all programmed under this option, as well as the number of AVPS, APS-6R, LIBs, ISIB and Annunciator Modules in the system, and SLC Loop styles. The following CRT display illustrates the screen prompts during the installation of three SLC loops, four Annunciator Modules and the enabling of all optional functions. Refer to Chapter One of this manual for information on LIB-400 and its correct slot address.
For information on the parameters programmed here, refer to Partial System Programming.
PRESS@1=PSYS,2=FSYS,3=PPRG,4=FPRG,5=REMV,6=PSWD,7=MSG,8=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2 IS@LIB@BOARD@01@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@STYLE@OF@SLC@LOOP@01@(6@OR@4)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6 IS@LIB@BOARD@02@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@STYLE@OF@SLC@LOOP@02@(6@OR@4)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 IS@LIB@BOARD@03@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@STYLE@OF@SLC@LOOP@03@(6@OR@4)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6 IS@LIB@BOARD@04@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N IS@LIB@BOARD@05@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N IS@LIB@BOARD@06@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N IS@LIB@BOARD@07@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N IS@LIB@BOARD@08@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N IS@LIB@BOARD@09@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N IS@LIB@BOARD@10@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N DO@YOU@WANT@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME@(5@-@50@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS)@@@@@:@45 DO@YOU@WANT@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME@(1@-@255@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS)@@:@60 DO@YOU@WANT@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME@(1@-@2040@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS)@@@@@@@@:@1200 Include ENTER@THE@NUMBER@OF@AVPS-24@INSTALLED@IN@THE@SYSTEM@(0@-@16)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 number of ENTER@ZXXX@OF@HIGHEST@FORWARD@ACTIVATED@ZONE@IN@SYSTEM@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z200 devices DO@YOU@WANT@THE@TERMINAL@SUPERVISION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y employingDO@YOU@WANT@THE@TERMINAL@STATUS@LINE@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y the trouble DO@YOU@WANT@THE@AUXILIARY@PRINTER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y bus here. DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@CONTROL@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@"NONA"/"NOA"@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y WERE@ALL@ADDRESSABLE@DEVICES@FACTORY-PURCHASED@AFTER@4/1/91?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@"LED@LATCHING"@FOR@MORE@DEVICES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@TRANSMIT@DATA@UNDER@PRINTER@ERROR@CONDITIONS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@:@N DO@YOU@WANT@BIDIRECTIONAL@COPY@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PRIMARY@PRINTER@TROUBLE@INHIBITED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REDIRECT@PRINTER@REPORTS@TO@THE@TERMINAL?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@N DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@LOCAL@MODE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@DETECTOR@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@45 ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@MONITOR@MODULE@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@26 ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@CONTROL@MODULE@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@19 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y SELECT@NFPA@LISTING@-@1=72A,2=72B,3=72C,4=72D,5=71,6=RCV@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@OR@REMOVE@THIS@LISTING?@(Y=PRG,N=RMV)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y SELECT@NFPA@LISTING@-@1=72A,2=72B,3=72C,4=72D,5=71,6=RCV@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@OR@REMOVE@THIS@LISTING?@(Y=PRG,N=RMV)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N ENTER@THE@TYPE@OF@BATTERY@INSTALLED@(L=LEAD-ACID,N=NICAD)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N ENTER@THE@BATTERY@CAPACITY@(9@-@32@IN@1@AHR@INCREMENTS)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@32 ENTER@THE@BATTERY@STANDBY@TIME@(4,@24,@48@OR@60@HR)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 DO@YOU@WANT@24@HOUR@HIGH@RATE@CHARGE@FOR@BATTERY?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
AM2020 only
3-28
* * * * * *
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@EVENT@REMINDER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@DEVICE@BLINK@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PRE-ALARM@FUNCTION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y IS@ANNUNCIATOR@01@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@ANNUNCIATOR@1 IS@ANNUNCIATOR@02@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@04@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@05@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@06@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@07@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@08@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@09@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@10@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@11@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@12@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@ANNUNCIATOR@12 IS@ANNUNCIATOR@13@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@14@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@15@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@16@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@17@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@18@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@ANNUNCIATOR@18 IS@ANNUNCIATOR@19@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@20@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@21@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@22@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@23@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@24@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@25@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@26@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@27@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@28@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@29@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@30@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N IS@ANNUNCIATOR@31@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@ANNUNCIATOR@31 IS@ANNUNCIATOR@32@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N ENTER@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ADDRESS@(0@-@249)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :160 ENTER@THE@MIB-W@VALUE@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@A@(H=HIGH,L=LOW)@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@H ENTER@THE@MIB-W@VALUE@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@B@(H=HIGH,L=LOW)@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@H DO@YOU@WANT@TO@USE@BOTH@MIB@DATA@PORTS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@ACK/SIL/RES@LOCKOUT@SETTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@ACK/SIL/RES@RE-ENABLED@DURING@LAN@COMM@FAULT?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@A@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y ENTER@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE@(ZXXX)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z200 DO@YOU@WANT@A@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y ENTER@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE@(ZXXX)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z201 DO@ YOU @WANT@ THE @DETECTOR@ VERIFICATION @TROUBLE@ ENABLED?@ (Y=YES,N=NO) @@@@@@ :@ Y ENTER@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TROUBLE@COUNT :15 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@"SACM"/"SEQM"@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@DRIFT@COMPENSATION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PAGER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@MODEM@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THE@NAM@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N DO@YOU@WANT@RAPID@POLLING@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y DO@YOU@WANT@SUPERVISORY@MODULES@TO@ILLUMINATE@ACTIVE@LED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@ :@Y PROGRAMMING@COMPLETE@@-@@POWER@DOWN@TO@MAKE@APPROPRIATE@CHANGES
* These items are NOTIFIRENET specific functions and are only programmed when a SIB-NET is used. See notes in Section 1.1, Partial System Programming.
3-29
Section 1.3 Partial Point Programming
D }X3X
3=PPRG Option 3 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the operational parameters of SLC Loop devices, software-defined zones, and annunciator points. After selecting option 3 from the Main Programming menu, the display will show the Partial Point Programming submenu:
PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The Partial Point Programming submenu has six options, where: 1=TYPID Type ID - Changing the Software Type ID of SLC Loop devices, zones and annunciator points. Control-By-Event - Redefining the Control-By-Event associated with each detector, module, or zone. Label - Renaming the custom user label for any detector, module, or zone. Options - Selecting the optional features associated with any detector or module. Annunciator Point Mapping - Selecting Annunciator Point Mapping for any detector, module, or zone. Cooperative Control-By-Event - Edit the CCBE associated with reverse activated zones for NOTIFIRENET.
2=CBE
3=LBL 4=OPTNS 5=AMAP
6=CCBE
The Partial Point Programming flow chart is located in Figure 1-10. Detailed information on the Partial Point Programming options follows. NOTE Each option under Partial Point Programming prompts the programmer to enter the address of the detector, module, zone, or annunciator point to be affected. Leading zeros are not required. The address assumes the following format:
LXX(D/M)YY (for devices) or
ZXXX (for zones) or AXXPYY (for annunciator points)
SLC Loop 1 to 10 (AM2020), 1 to 4 (AFP1010)
Addressable Detector or Module followed by an address in the range 1 to 99
Software-defined Zone Z1 to Z240
Annunciator Module 1 to 32
Annunciator Point 1 to 64
Example: For the 44th module on SLC Loop 3, enter L3M44
3-30
3 = PPRG
Select Partial Point Programming Submenu Option 1-6
1 = TYPID (Change device, zone, or annunciator point software type ID)
see Section 1.3.1
2 = CBE (change CBE list or equation which controls interaction between devices, and software zones)
see Section 1.3.2
3 = LBL (change custom label associated with each device, and software zone)
see Section 1.3.3
4 = OPTNS (enable/disable for each device signal silence, walk test, alarm verification, sensitivity, or tracking)
see Figure 1-11
5 = AMAP (individually maps devices or software zones to annunciator points for remote annunciation)
see Figure 1-12
6 = CCBE (change CCBE equation associated with reverse activated zones)
see Section 1.3.6
Figure 1-10 Partial Point Programming Flow Chart
Section 1.3.1 Type ID
D }X3X1X
1=TYPID Option 1 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the Software Type ID of any detector, module, zone or annunciator point. This pre-setting of all devices in the system gives the control panel the ability to execute specific functions for each device type. The following CRT display illustrates the assignment of the Software Type ID SCON to the 14th monitor module on SLC Loop 3.
PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 ENTER@LXX(D/ M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@:@L3M14 ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@SCON@
For a complete description of the various Software Type IDs, see Software Type IDs.
3-31
Section 1.3.2 Control-By-Event
D }X3X2X
2=CBE Option 2 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the Control-By-Event (CBE) for any detector, module or software zone. The panel maintains a CBE for each device and zone installed in the system. NOTE A software zone is not a physical zone, but rather a software grouping in control panel memory. When programming a particular device, the control panel prompts the programmer with:
ENTER@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The following CRT screen display illustrates CBE programming for smoke detector number 23 on SLC Loop 2 to activate software zones 15 and 29.
PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@:@L2D23 ENTER@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@: (Z15@Z29)
For a complete description of the types, parameters, limitations, and guidelines of CBE programming, see Control-By-Event Programming in Section Four.
Section 1.3.3 Label
D }X3X3X
3=LBL Option 3 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the 20-character custom label associated with each detector, module, or software zone in the system. Acceptable characters for device or zone labels are as follows:
Letters A through Z, digits 0 through 9, periods (.), dashes (-), and spaces.
The following CRT display illustrates renaming control module 21 on SLC Loop 1.
PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@:@L1M21 ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@MAIN@LOBBY@BELLS@@@
Programming Tip: Creative use of the custom label feature allows the programmer to be extremely specific in naming each SLC device. For instance, for a group of addressable devices congregated in a particular area (such as a floor or a section of a building), map each device to the same software zone and label the zone to serve as an additional 20 characters of information to the individual device labels. Assume Detector 3 initiates an alarm. Only the first zone listed in the control-by-event (CBE) list of the initiating devices will display the 20-character label, along with the label of the initiating devices itself when in alarm. Note: Since Annunciator points do not have individual custom labels, Annunciator addresses are invalid entries on this menu.
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Software Zone
General location
Specific location
Detectors 1 through 5 all mapped to the same Software Zone
ALARM: SMOKE(PHOTO) GUEST KITCHEN
3RD FLOOR WEST WING 05:48P 03/01/97 103
The result is a 40-character label that characterizes a particular addressable device. 3-32
Section
1.3.4
Optional
Features
}X3X4X
D
4=OPTNS Option 4 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to individually enable or disable, per device, the functions of Signal Silence and Walk Test (for control modules), Alarm Verification and Sensitivity (for addressable detectors), and Tracking (addressable detectors and monitor modules). These functions must still be enabled or disabled, as appropriate, for the entire system (see Partial System Programming). For an explanation of the functions of Signal Silence, Alarm Verification, Sensitivity, and Tracking, see the Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations at the end of this manual. The Optional Features flow chart is located in Figure 1-11. NOTE: The AM2020/AFP1010 will not permit Signal Silence programming for control modules with Software Type IDs, TELE, PWRC, APND, TPND, and GPND. See Software Type IDs for an explanation of all Software Type IDs.
4 = OPTNS
Enter Addressable Device

(panel determines device entered and branches accordingly)
Control Module
Monitor Module
Addressable Detector
S/W ID Type TELE, PWRC, APND, TPND, or GPND
All Other S/W ID Types Change Tracking Option? No
Change Verification Option?
No
Yes Change Signal Silence Option? Yes Enable/Disable Verification Option
No Change Walk Test Option?
No
Yes Enable/Disable Signal Silence Option
Enable/Disable Tracking Option
Change Detector Sensitivity? No Yes Enter Senstivity (low, med, or high)
Yes Enable/Disable Walk Test Option
No Change Day/Night Control?
Change Tracking Option?
No
Yes
(Address Prompt)
Yes Enable/Disable Day/Night Sensitivity
Figure 1-11 Optional Features Flow Chart

3-33
A control module example:

PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@:@L3M20 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@OPTION@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO):@Y IS@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@WALK@TEST@OPTN@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@:@Y IS@THE@WALK@TEST@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
A monitor module example:

PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@:@L5M13 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@TRACKING@OPTN@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y IS@THE@TRACKING@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
An addressable smoke detector example:

PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@:@L5D17 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THIS@DETECTORS@VERIFICATION@OPTION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@:@Y IS@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@OPTN@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO):@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THIS@DETECTORS@SENSITIVITY@SELECTION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@SENSITIVITY@SELECTION@FOR@THIS@DEVICE@(L=LOW,M=MED,H=HIGH):@M DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@TRACKING@OPTN@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y IS@THE@TRACKING@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@DAY/NIGHT@CONTROL@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@:@Y IS@THERE@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@CONTROL@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@:@Y
NOTE Control modules that activate monitor modules via physical connections must not have the walk test option enabled.
Section 1.3.5 Annunciator Mapping
D }X3X5X
5=AMAP Option 5 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to individually map devices or zones to annunciator points for remote annunciation. The Annunciator Point Mapping Option Flow Chart is located in Figure 1-12.
5 = AMAP
Enter Software Zone, Addressable Device, or Annunciator Point
Change Annunciator Mapping? No
Yes
Map to an Annunciator?
Yes
Enter Annunciator Number
No
(Address Prompt)
Figure 1-12 Annunciator Mapping Option Flow Chart
3-34
The following CRT display illustrates mapping monitor module 11 on SLC Loop 1 to Annunciator Module 1, Point 1.
PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@5 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@:@L1M11 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@ANNUNCIATOR@MAPPING@FOR@THIS@POINT?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@MAPPED@TO@AN@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@AXXPYY@FOR@ANNUNCIATOR@POINT@MAPPING@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@A1P1
If an annunciator point has more than one control point mapped to it, then all the control points must have identical control-by-event and signal silence programming. Each telephone point must have its own distinct annunciator point for telephone "ring-signal" to function. Each annunciator point must be installed through Full Point Programming before a device, module, or software zone may be mapped to it. NOTE Each detector, module or zone may only be mapped to one annunciator point. Therefore, if it is desired to map a detector, module or zone to more than one annunciator point; the detector, module or zone may be mapped to a dummy zone and the dummy zone may be mapped to an annunciator point. This is for annunciation purposes only. If control is desired from both annunciators, then custom shadow annunciator software must be used. Contact Notifier for further information. For annunciator point mapping information on an AM2020/AFP1010 with NOTIFIRENET, refer to Chapter Two, Operation, in the INA manual, document 15092.
Smoke Detector
L3D64
A1P12
First Annunciator Point
Z23
A9P2
Second Annunciator Point
Dummy Zone
*Section 1.3.6 Cooperative Control-By-Event
D}X3X6X
6=CCBE Option 6 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the Cooperative Control-ByEvent (CCBE) for any reverse activated zone when using the AM2020/AFP1010 with the NOTIFIRENET. NOTE A software zone is not a physical zone, but rather a software grouping in control panel memory. When programming a particular reverse zone, the control panel prompts the programmer with:
ENTER@COOPERATIVE@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The following CRT screen display illustrates CCBE programming for reverse zone number 220 to activate other zones on NOTIFIRENET network nodes.
PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@:@Z220 ENTER@COOPERATIVE@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@: OR(N8Z1@N8Z2@N8Z3@N8Z4@AND(N9Z1@N9Z2@N9Z3@N9Z4)@AND(N10Z1@N10Z2@N10Z3@N10Z4))
For a complete description of the types, parameters, limitations, and guidelines of CCBE programming, see Control-By-Event Programming in Section Four. *This item is a NOTIFIRENET specific function and is only programmed if a SIB-NET is used.
3-35
Section 1.4 Full Point Programming
D }X4X
4=FPRG Option 4 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to completely program of all the addressable detectors, modules, software-defined zones and annunciator points in the AM2020/AFP1010 system. The programming examples illustrate the CRT screen prompts displayed during Full Point Programming. For a description of each of the parameters programmed here, refer to Partial Point Programming. NOTE The control panel continuously loops back through the Full Point Programming routine, allowing the programmer to enter devices, software zones or annunciator points one after the other. Use the Backspace key to exit Full Point Programming.
4 = FPRG
Enter Software Zone, Addressable Device, or Annunciator Point (Backspace to Exit Mode)
(panel determines item entered and branches accordingly)

Addressable Detector
Control Module
Software Zone
Annunciator Point
Monitor Module
Enter Software Type ID
Enter CBE List
Enter CBE Equation
Enter CBE Equation/List *
Enter CBE List
Enter Custom Label
Enter Custom Label
Enter CCBE ** (Reverse Zones Only) Enter Custom Label
Enter Custom Label
Enable/Disable Detector Verification Enter Detector Sensitivity (low, med, or high)
Enable/Disable Signal Silence
Enable/Disable Walk Test
Map to Annunciator Point?

Yes
No
No

Yes
Enable/Disable Tracking
Enable/Disable Day/ Night Sensitivity Control

Yes
No
Enter Annunciator Point

Yes
No
* Equation for Reverse Zone,

List for Forward Zone
** NOTIFIRENET only
Figure 1-13 Full Point Programming Flow Chart

3-36
Example: Programming Addressable Detectors Photoelectric Smoke Detector on SLC LOOP 2 programmed to activate two software zones (Z13, Z29) and a control module (L2M19), and also mapped to annunciator module address "02" point "02".
PRESS@1=PSYS,2=FSYS,3=PPRG,4=FPRG,5=REMV,6=PSWD,7=MSG,8=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT@@@@:@L2D23 ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@PHOT ENTER@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@: (Z13@Z29@L2M19)@ ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@MAIN@LOBBY@DETECTOR@ IS@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@OPTN@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO):@Y ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@SENSITIVITY@SELECTION@FOR@THIS@DEVICE@(L=LOW,M=MED,H=HIGH):@H IS@THE@TRACKING@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y IS@THERE@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@CONTROL@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@MAPPED@TO@AN@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@AXXPYY@FOR@ANNUNCIATOR@POINT@MAPPING@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@A2P2
Example: Programming Annunciator Points Installation of individual annunciator points.

ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@:@A12P10 ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@ADET
Example: Programming Monitor Modules Monitor Module on SLC Loop 3 programmed to monitor a full zone of conventional 4-wire smoke detectors, and activate a software zone (Z13), and also mapped to annunciator module address "02" point "03".
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@:@L3M15 ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@SCON ENTER@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@: (Z13)@ ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@BASEMENT@DETECTORS IS@THE@TRACKING@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@N DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@MAPPED@TO@AN@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@AXXPYY@FOR@ANNUNCIATOR@POINT@MAPPING@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@A2P3
Example: Programming Control Modules Control Module on SLC Loop 2 programmed to turn on in response to an alarm condition on either of two software zones (Z13 or Z29), and also mapped to annunciator module address "02" point "04".
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@:@L2M19 ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@CON ENTER@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@: OR(Z13@Z29)@ ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@MAIN@LOBBY@BELLS IS@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y IS@THE@WALK@TEST@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:@Y DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@MAPPED@TO@AN@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@AXXPYY@FOR@ANNUNCIATOR@POINT@MAPPING@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@A2P4
NOTE Control modules that activate monitor modules via physical connections must not have the walk test option enabled.
3-37
Example: Programming Software Zones Software Zone 13 programmed as a forward zone to activate two other software zones (Z15 and Z29), and also mapped to annunciator module address "02" point "05".
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@:@Z13 ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@FZON ENTER@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@: (Z15@Z29)@ ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@FIRST@FLOOR DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@MAPPED@TO@AN@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@AXXPYY@FOR@ANNUNCIATOR@POINT@MAPPING@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@A2P5
Reverse zones on an AM2020/AFP1010 system with NOTIFIRENET can be programmed with both CBE and CCBE equations. Below is an example of Zone 220 programmed as a reverse zone to activate zones on other network nodes.
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@:@Z220 ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@RZON ENTER@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@: (@)@ ENTER@COOPERATIVE@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@: OR(N8Z1@N8Z2@N8Z3@N8Z4@AND(N9Z1@N9Z2@N9Z3@N9Z4)@AND(N10Z1@N10Z2@N10Z3@N10Z4)) ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@LIBRARY@@@@@@@@@@@@@ DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@MAPPED@TO@AN@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
* *
* This item is a NOTIFIRENET specific function and is only programmed when a SIB-NET is used.
3-38
Section 1.5 Remove
D }X5X
5=REMV Option 5 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to remove (from control panel memory) SLC Loop devices, software-defined zones or annunciator points. The devices can still be installed in the system, but the AM2020/AFP1010 will stop looking for these devices by not addressing them. NOTES Devices that are removed from the system's program will not function in any capacity until reinstalled under Full Point Programming. CAUTION - devices that have had their LEDs latched ON must be returned to their normal state before removal (execute System Reset for detectors or control OFF for modules). Unacknowledged points must be acknowledged prior to removal. The programming example below illustrates the CRT screen prompts during removal of an SLC Loop device (smoke detector 34 on SLC Loop 10).
PRESS@1=PSYS,2=FSYS,3=PPRG,4=FPRG,5=REMV,6=PSWD,7=MSG,8=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@5 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@REMOVAL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@:@L10D34
Section 1.6 Password
D }X6X
6=PSWD Option 6 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the Level One and Level Two passwords for the AM2020/AFP1010. NOTES The AM2020/AFP1010s are shipped with initial Level One and Level Two passwords of 00000. As a security measure, the control panel does not echo password digits to the DIA and CRT screen. Rather, it displays an asterisk (*) for each digit entered. After entering five password digits, pressing ENTER (on the DIA) or RETURN (on the CRT) places the new password into operation. Acceptable characters for a password are the digits 0-9.
PRESS@1=PSYS,2=FSYS,3=PPRG,4=FPRG,5=REMV,6=PSWD,7=MSG,8=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6 PRESS@1=LEVEL@ONE,2=LEVEL@TWO@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2 @@@@@ENTER@LEVEL@TWO@PASSWORD:@*****
A Forgotten Password? If a Level One or Level Two password is incorrectly entered, the panel will respond by displaying a special code word and prompt the programmer to reenter the password. If the password has been forgotten, record this code word and contact NOTIFIER. After proper authentication, the original password can be determined from deciphering the code word. An example of this code word follows:
@@@ENTER@LEVEL@ONE@PASSWORD:@***** @@INVALID@PASSWORD:@@@@@@@7129406@@@@@@@@@REENTER@PASSWORD:
Section 1.7 Message
D }X7X
7=MSG Option 7 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the 40-Character Custom User Label for the system. Acceptable characters for the label include Letters A though Z, digits 0 through 9, periods (.), dashes (-), and spaces.
PRESS@1=PSYS,2=FSYS,3=PPRG,4=FPRG,5=REMV,6=PSWD,7=MSG,8=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@7 ENTER@40@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@USER@LABEL@@:@NOTIFIER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
3-39
Section 1.8 History Mode
D }X8X
8=HIS Option 8 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the parameters associated with History Mode. Once the History option is enabled, the AM2020/AFP1010 has the capability to store the most recent 400 system events.
8 = HIS
Select History Submenu Option 1-3
1 = START (Starts the recording of events into the history file)
2 = STOP (Stops the recording of events into the history file)
(Exit Prog Mode)
3 = CLEAR (Clears out selected number of oldest events from history file)
Enter # of Events to be Cleared
Figure 1-14 History File Option Flow Chart

After selecting option 8 from the Main Programming menu, the display will show the History Mode Programming submenu:
PRESS@1=START,2=STOP,3=CLEAR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
3-40
The History Mode Programming submenu has three options as described below:
1=START
D }X8X1X D }X8X2X D }X8X3X
This option allows the programmer to start storing events into the panel's history file. The following example enables history mode:
PRESS@1=START,2=STOP,3=CLEAR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
2=STOP
This option allows the programmer to stop storing events into the panel's history file. The following example disables history mode:
PRESS@1=START,2=STOP,3=CLEAR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
3=CLEAR
This option allows the programmer to clear out of history file memory a selected number (1-N, where N represents the number of stored events) of the oldest history events recorded. The following example illustrates this by clearing out the entire history file.
PRESS@1=START,2=STOP,3=CLEAR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3 ENTER@NUMBER@ENTRIES@TO@CLEAR@(1@-@400)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@400
3-41
3-42
Section Two The Alter Status Menu

The Alter Status Mode is accessed by entering the following (level 1 password required):
C|X
After entering the Alter Status Mode, the display will show the Alter Status menu:
PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The Alter Status menu has six options, where: 1=DIS Disable - Disabling or enabling any individual addressable detector, module, or software zone in the system. Control - Manually turning on and off a control module. Detector Sensitivity - Altering the sensitivity of any of the addressable detectors in the system. Time - Resetting the system time/date clock. Diagnostics - Performing system diagnostics. Walk Test - Allows the programmer to select which Loop Interface Boards will participate in walk test and generates the walk test reports. Group Zone - Allows the programmer to select which zone (and its associated points) to be disabled or enabled as a group.
2=CTL 3=DSEN
4=TIME 5=DIAG 6=WALK
7=GZON
The Alter Status Menu flow chart is located in Figure 2-1. Detailed information on the Alter Status options follows. NOTE When an AM2020/AFP1010 with NOTIFIRENET is in walk test mode, a trouble condition will appear for that AM2020/AFP1010 node at the INA and/or NRT.
3-43
Press ALTER STATUS key
Enter Level 1 Password
Valid Password?
No
Error Message
Yes
Select Alter Status Menu Option 1-7
1 = DIS (enable/disable of devices or software zone)
see Section 2.1
2 = CTL (manually turn on/off a control module)
see Section 2.2
3 = DSEN (alter sensitivity of any addressable detector)
see Section 2.3
4 = TIME (set the panel time/date clock)
see Section 2.4
5 = DIAG (perform system diagnostics)
see Section 2.5
6 = WALK (specify LIBs for Walk Test, and Walk Test reports)
see Section 2.6
7 = GZON (Group Zone disable or enable)
see Section 2.7
Figure 2-1 Alter Status Menu Flow Chart
Section 2.1 Disable Point
C |X1X
1=DIS Option 1 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to disable and subsequently re-enable individual devices or zones. When a device is disabled, it is no longer polled by the AM2020/AFP1010. The following example illustrates disabling monitor module 4 on SLC Loop 1. NOTE
The programmer should NEVER disable a point that is in alarm. The programmer should never turn on (using option 2 of the Alter Status Menu) or program a disabled point. Telephone (TELE) and remote page (PAGE) Type IDs can not be disabled. PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT):@L1M4 DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@DISABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
* *
Note: Disable does not affect annunciator points.

3-44
Section 2.2 Control Module

C |X2X
2=CTL Option 2 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to selectively turn on or off control modules from the control panel. The following example illustrates turning on control module 22 on SLC Loop 1.
PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2 ENTER@LXXMYY@FOR@CONTROL@MODULE@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@L1M22 DO@YOU@WANT@POINT@TO@BE@ON@OR@OFF?@(Y=ON,N=OFF)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
Section 2.3 Detector Sensitivity

C |X3X
3=DSEN Option 3 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to alter the sensitivity of any addressable detector. The sensitivity of a detector can be set at one of three levels - low, medium and high. Refer to Chapter Two, Section 8 of this manual for information on sensitivity levels and drift compensation. The following example illustrates setting a high sensitivity for Detector 14 on SLC Loop 3.
PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3 ENTER@LXXDYY@FOR@DETECTOR@TO@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@L3D14 ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@SENSITIVITY@SELECTION@FOR@THIS@DEVICE@(L=LOW,M=MED,H=HIGH):@H
Section 2.4 Time
C |X4X
4=TIME Option 4 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to reset the time/date system clock.
PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 ENTER@THE@MONTH@(1@-@12)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3 ENTER@THE@DAY-OF-MONTH@(1@-@31)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 ENTER@THE@YEAR@(0@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@93 ENTER@THE@DAY-OF-WEEK@(1=SUN,...,7=SAT)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2 ENTER@THE@HOURS@IN@MILITARY@TIME@(0@-@23)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@15 ENTER@THE@MINUTES@(0@-@59)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@37 NOTIFIER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ALL@SYSTEMS@NORMAL@@03:37P@03/01/97
NOTES Military time and conventional time are the same for the hours of 1:00 am to noon. To convert conventional time to military time for the hours of 1:00 pm to midnight remove the colon from the conventional time and add the resulting number to 1200. Example: 1:34 pm conventional time is 134 + 1200 = 1334 hours military time (13 hours and 34 minutes). On the NOTIFIRENET system, the time and date are synchronized every hour by the master clock node on the network. The last AM2020/AFP1010, INA, or NRT on the network where the time and date were manually programmed is the master clock node.
3-45
Section 2.5 Diagnostics
C |X5X
5=DIAG Option 5 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to perform system diagnostics. The Diagnostics Option submenu is shown below:
PRESS@1=RVER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@@
1=RVER - Reset Detector Verification Counters
C |X5X1X
This option allows the programmer to reset the detector verification counters for all installed intelligent detectors and clear all detector verification error conditions. The detector verification counter associated with each detector indicates how many times that detector has entered the alarm verification routine without producing a valid fire alarm. The following example illustrates the execution of this option:
PRESS@1=RVER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@RESET@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@COUNTERS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y
Section 2.6 Walk Test
C |X6X
6=WALK Option 6 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to select which LIBs will participate in walk test. Upon completion of walk test, the programmer will be able to choose from the optional walk test reports. After Selecting option 6 from the Alter Status menu, the display will show the Walk Test submenu:
PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The Walk Test submenu has six options, where: 1=SEL 2=UNP Select - Select which LIB boards will participate in Walk Test. Unprogrammed Device Report - Allows the programmer to generate a report for unprogrammed devices in the area designated for Walk Test that are connected to the SLC but not defined in the panel database. Uninstalled Device Report - Allows the programmer to generate a report for uninstalled devices in the area designated for Walk Test that have been defined in the panel data base but not physically installed on the SLC. Tested Devices Report - Allows the programmer to generate a report for tested devices in the area designated for Walk Test. Untested Device Report - Allows the programmer to generate a report for untested devices in the area designated for Walk Test. Exit Walk Test - Allows the programmer to exit/abort the Walk Test Mode.
3=UNI
4=TEST
5=UNTST
6=EXIT 3-46
6 = WALK
Select Walk Test Submenu Option 1-6 Yes Enter Another LIB for Test?
1 = SEL (select LIBs for Walk Test)
Enter LIB # Included in Test
No
2 = UNP (generates report for unprogrammed devices)
(Exit Alter Status Mode, see notes under 1=SEL)
3 = UNI (generates report for uninstalled devices) Enter LIB # for Test Report 4 = TEST (generates report for tested devices) Request/Abort Test Report
(Prints report, Exit Alter Status Mode)
5 = UNTST (generates report for untested devices)
6 = EXIT (Exits Walk Test Option)
(Exit Alter Status Mode)
Figure 2-2 Walk Test Option Flow Chart
1=SEL - Select
C | X6X1X
This option allows the programmer to select which LIBs will participate in Walk Test. The following example selects LIBs 1 and 3 for Walk Test:
PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 ENTER@LIB@NUMBER@TO@BE@INCLUDED@IN@WALK@TEST@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@MORE@LIBS@FOR@WALK@TEST?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y ENTER@LIB@NUMBER@TO@BE@INCLUDED@IN@WALK@TEST@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3 DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@MORE@LIBS@FOR@WALK@TEST?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
NOTES Upon completion of the walk test LIB selection, a system trouble is generated to indicate the control panel is operating under limited fire protection. Only the LIBs selected for walk test are affected. Each LIB collects information immediately after it is selected. The programmer should not generate a walk test report until 20 seconds after LIB selection or the report will be missing data and should be considered invalid. If this happens, abort the walk test and start again. If one or more LIBs have been selected for walk test, additional LIBs cannot be selected without exiting walk test. For every intelligent addressable device activated during walk test, a walk test count message is sent to the printer. Conventional devices attached to an addressable device with a Software Type ID of SCON (or equivalent) can not be individually tested with walk test, because walk test does not perform a reset on PWRC (or equivalent) devices. Do not perform a System Reset during a Walk Test. System Reset does not function properly while in Walk Test mode of operation and may result in unwanted activation of various output modules. If a system reset occurs during a Walk Test, exit Walk Test mode and re-enter. Walk Test will automatically abort if no devices are tested for 15 minutes.
3-47
C | X6X(2,3,4 5)X
or 2=UNP - Unprogrammed Device Report 3=UNI - Uninstalled Device Report 4=TEST - Tested Device Report 5=UNTST - Untested Device Report These options allow the programmer to generate the desired Walk Test report. These reports are generated on a LIB basis. They use the same display format as the Point Read option under Read Status except for the status field which is report-specific (no Control-by-Event or annunciator point mapping is reported). The results of the report are not displayed on the CRT screen but are printed out on the printer. 1=REQUEST 2=ABORT Begins the selected report. Aborts the selected report in progress. NOTE Only one report can be conducted at any one time.
WARNING: Do not reset the Control Panel while in Walk Test mode. Execution of a System Reset during a Walk Test may cause unwanted activation of various output modules (CMX, XPC, etc.). If a System Reset occurs during a Walk Test, exit Walk Test Mode and re-enter.
The following CRT screen illustrates conducting a Tested Device Report. The printout of this test is illustrated in Figure 2-3.
PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 ENTER@LIB@NUMBER@FOR@WALK@TEST@REPORT@(1@-@10) :@1 PRESS@1=REQUEST,2=ABORT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 LIB@01@TESTED@DEVICE@REPORT@BEGIN@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00 NOTIFIER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ALL@SYSTEMS@NORMAL@@04:32P@03/01/00 LIB@01@TESTED@DEVICE@REPORT@END@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00 NOTIFIER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ALL@SYSTEMS@NORMAL@@04:32P@03/01/00
6=EXIT - Exit Walk Test
C |X6X6X
This option allows the programmer to exit/abort Walk Test. In order to exit/abort Walk Test Mode, reenter Alter Status Mode and choose option 6 from the Walk Test submenu. The following example demonstrates exiting/aborting Walk Test:
PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6
NOTE Upon exiting/aborting Walk Test, the Walk Test system trouble is cleared and the AM2020/AFP1010 resumes full fire protection.
3-48
Smoke Detector Activation During Walk Test Activation of smoke detectors during Walk Test for the Series 500 smoke detectors can be accomplished by placing the optional Test Magnet (System Sensor model number M02-24) against the cover opposite the test module socket, as shown below:
The LEDs should track within 10 seconds indicating alarm and annunciating the panel. (The LEDs will turn off when the magnet is removed.) If Alarm Verification is enabled for the detector, the magnet will have to be held in place for a longer time until the system verification is completed. The Series 700 smoke detectors can be activated during Walk Test by placing the Test Magnet against the cover between LED 1 and the test module socket in the area shown below:
The LEDs should track within 30 seconds, indicating an alarm and annunciating the panel. (The LEDs will turn off when the magnet is removed.)
3-49
PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4 ENTER@LIB@NUMBER@FOR@WALK@TEST@REPORT@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 PRESS@1=REQUEST,2=ABORT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1 LIB@01@TESTED@DEVICE@REPORT@BEGIN@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00 TEST01@SMOKE@(ION)@@OFFICE@AREA@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@101 TEST01@SMOKE(PHOTO)@FACTORY@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@102 TEST01@HEAT(ANALOG)@MAINTENANCE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@103 TEST01@MONITOR@@@@@@FIRST@AID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@104 TEST03@CONTROL@@@@@@FIRST@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@101 TEST02@CONTROL@@@@@@SECOND@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@102 LIB@01@TESTED@DEVICE@REPORT@END@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
Troubleshooting Tip: The test count indicates the number of times the device has been activated during Walk Test. If two devices have been mistakenly set to the same address, and these two devices are activated once each during walk test, a TEST02 indication will be indicated for one device and the missing device address will not show up on the report at all.
Figure 2-3 Printout of an AM2020/AFP1010 Walk Test Report
3-50
Section 2.7 Group Zone Disable
C |X7X
7=GZON Option 7 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to disable and subsequently re-enable all appropriately mapped points (input devices and zones) associated with a particular software zone. When a point is disabled, it is no longer polled by the AM2020/AFP1010. When a zone is disabled using this feature, a trouble message is generated for this zone. Then the entire CBE database is searched for all input devices and zones, looking for this "group" zone to be the first zone in each point's individual CBE. A trouble message will be generated for each point (input device or zone) matching the above criteria as it is found and disabled. During the search process the user interface is locked out. The following example illustrates group disabling Zone 2. NOTE: The programmer should never program a disabled point.
PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@7 ENTER@ZXXX@FOR@ GROUP @ZONE @CHANGE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z2 DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@GROUP@ZONE@DISABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
Example:
Point
Z1 Z2 Z3 L1D1 L1D2 L1D3 L1M1 L1M2 L1M3
CBE
( ) ( ) ( ) (Z1) (Z2) (Z3) (Z1) (Z2) (Z3)
As a result of disabling Z2 using the group zone disable function, L1D2 and L1M2 will automatically be disabled as well.
The "first zone" does not necessarily mean being the first operand in a CBE. A zone can be located anywhere within the CBE. The following CBE examples all have the same effect for group zone functions: (Z1) (Z1 L1M1) (L1M1 Z1) (L1M1 L1M2 Z1 Z2) Z1 is the first zone found in each individual CBE.
3-51
Section Three Software Type IDs

All point addresses for devices, software zones, and annunciator points must be programmed with an appropriate Software Type identification. Software Type IDs allow the AM2020/AFP1010 to identify the type and configuration of specific devices, zones, and annunciator points associated with the panel. Each Type ID is categorized by groups. There are 18 separate groups of Software Type IDs which are defined in the tables on the following pages. Each table consists of the following format. Type ID - This is the software type entered by the programmer for a particular point. Display Label - The characters displayed for addressable devices, zones, and annunciator points on the control panel during alarm, trouble, and read status conditions. Type of Device - Type of devices compatible with, and/or description of operating parameters for, the particular Type ID The control panel will not permit the changing of a Software Type ID in one group to a Software Type ID in another group. To accomplish this, the device must be reinstated with the Software Type ID of the desired group by using the Full Point Programming option of the Main Programming Menu. NOTE The XP Transponder will revert to Local Mode program operation upon loss of communications with the AM2020/AFP1010. Therefore, use extreme care when assigning Software Type IDs to XP Transponder circuits. For instance, an XP circuit assigned Software Type ID SPSU will initiate a supervisory condition under communication with the AM2020/AFP1010, but will result in an alarm condition under local XP operation. Group 1: Addressable Detectors
Type ID CMBO FPHT FTHR Display Label SMOKE(COMBO) FIXED PHOT D FIXED THER D Type of Device
IPX-751 Intelligent Combination Ionization/Photoelectric/Thermal Detector. SDX-551/751 Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector with a fixed sensitivity level. (This software type is obsolete and should not be used). FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor with a fixed sensitivity level. (This Software Type ID can only be used in Canadian applications and does not meet UL sensitivity requirements for use in the U.S.). CPX-551/751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector. CPX-551-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector with a fixed sensitivity level. (The sensitivity of this detector can not be adjusted. All other detector functions will be equivalent to type ION). This detector is used in conjunction with the DHX501 or DHX-502 duct detector housing. CPX-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector. (This Software Type ID can only be used in Canadian applications and has the same programming options as type ION). CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector. (This Software Type ID can only be used in Canadian applications and has the same programming options as type ION). SDX-551/751 Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector.The SDX-551/751 photo detector does not require a different Software Type ID when used with the DHX-501 or DHX-502 duct detector housing. FDX-551 or FDX-551R Intelligent Thermal Sensor.
ION IOND
SMOKE(ION) ION DUCT DET
IONL
SMOKE ION LP
IONH
SMOKE ION HP
PHOT
SMOKE(PHOTO)
THER
HEAT(ANALOG)
3-52
Group 2: Output Modules These Software Type IDs cannot be programmed for Signal Silence. These Software Type IDs do not have any control-by-event programming. If the Software Type ID requires Form-C relay function, the two tabs on the CMX must be broken. Otherwise, the tabs must not be broken.
Type ID
APND
Display Label
ALARMS PEND
Type of Device
CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will activate upon receipt of an alarm condition, and remain in the ON state until all alarms have been ACKNOWLEDGED. CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode) that will delay the reporting of AC power loss. Any other trouble condition will be reported immediately. This module is used in conjunction with a digital alarm communicator. CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay,an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode) to switch power to a Reverse Polarity Trip Device for NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems applications (RPT-680 required). This type can also be used for general alarm activation. CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) configured as a Municipal Box Transmitter for NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems applications (MBT-1 required). This Type ID can also be used for general alarm activation. CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will activate upon receipt of an alarm and/or trouble condition, and remain in the ON state until all events have been ACKNOWLEDGED. CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode) activated under any System Trouble condition. CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) configured for remote paging (RPJ-1 required). CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay or an XP5-C (in relay mode) used to momentarily interrupt power (during system reset) to conventional 4-wire smoke detectors powered from a remote main power supply. CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode) activated under any Supervisory condition (includes sprinkler type). CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) configured for telephone operation. Note: The CMX and XP5-C will not provide a ringback signal when a call is placed. CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will activate upon receipt of a trouble condition, and remain in the ON state until all troubles have been ACKNOWLEDGED. CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode) that will activate upon receipt of a trouble condition(s) and remain in the ON state until the trouble(s) clear(s). CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will activate upon receipt of a trouble condition(s) and remain in the ON state until the trouble(s) clear(s). CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode) activated under any Water Flow condition. CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC module mode) configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit, activated under any Water Flow alarm condition.
DACT
DACT CONNECT
GAC
GN ALRM FORC
GAS
GN ALARM
GPND
GENERAL PEND
GTC PAGE PWRC
GN TRBL FORC PAGE POWER (CONV)
SSC TELE
GN SUPR FORC TELEPHONE
TPND
TRBLS PEND
TRC
TROUBLE FORC
TRS
TROUBLE
WFC WFS
GN WAT FORC GN WATER FLW
3-53
Group 3: Software Zones
Type ID
FZON RZON
Display Label
FORWARD ZONE REVERSE ZONE
Type of Device
A software-defined zone that is forward-activating. A software-defined zone that is reverse-activating.
A Forward-Activating Zone is a software zone in control panel memory which once activated by an addressable input device or other forward zone may in turn activate other zones and/or addressable output devices directly. Zones and output devices activated by a forward zone are contained in the CBE List of that forward zone, or the zone may be listed in the CBE of the addressable output device. A Reverse-Activating Zone is a software zone in control panel memory which if not activated directly by an addressable input device or forward zone may be activated through an associated CBE equation. A Reverse Zone may be listed in other CBE Equations.
Group 4: Alarm Initiation Modules
Type ID
MON
Display Label
MONITOR
Type of Device
MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor normally-open contact, shorting-type devices other than 4-wire smoke detectors (i.e. conventional heat detectors, pull stations, etc.). BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station. MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor normally-closed contact, opening-type devices. MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit that functions identically to Software Type ID NONA with one exception subsequent alarms from this Type ID will not reactivate silenced output devices - once silenced, outputs will remain silenced until reactivated by another Software Type ID (or cleared by System Reset and reactivated). MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor normally-open contact, shorting-type non-alarm devices. Activation of a module with Software Type ID NONA will not initiate a fire alarm condition: System Alarm LED will not illuminate. Does not activate alarm status line count on a CRT. No affect on modules programmed as APND (alarm pending) or GPND (general event pending). Alarm, clear alarm, or acknowledgments are not reported for this type. BGX-10 Addressable Manual Pull Station. MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor conventional 4-wire smoke detectors. This module has a longer reset period than modules programmed as MON. MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit dedicated to a Water Flow Alarm device.
MPUL NCMN
MON PULL STA MON NORM CLD
NOA
NON ALARM
NONA
NON ALM MON
PULL SCON
PULL STATION SMOKE (CONV)
WAT
WATER FLOW
3-54
Group 5: Output Modules
Type ID
CMXC
Display Label
CMX FORM C
Type of Device
CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode). CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit. CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit. CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode) CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in relay mode). This device is not deactivated when a system reset occurs. This module can be used for some fan control applications and can be mapped only to an AFCM annunciator point. CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) configured as a speaker circuit.
CMXS
CMX CONTROL
CON
CONTROL
FORC
FORM C RELAY
FRCM
FORMC MANUAL
SPKR
SPEAKER
Note: Each Type ID listed above is prompted for Signal Silence during programming. If the silence option has been programmed for these addressable devices, they can be turned off using the Control OFF function under the Alter Status Menu or by pushing the appropriate annunciator point switch. Of the above Type IDs, only CON, FORC, and SPKR can be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button, initiating a partial signal silence. If the Software Type ID requires FormC relay function, the two tabs on the CMX must be broken. Otherwise, the tabs must not be broken.
Group 6: Supervisory/Security Modules
Type ID
SACM
Display Label
ACCESS MONTR
Type of Device
MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor a security device. This module will be activated by an open or a short condition. Activation of a module with this Software Type ID will not initiate a security alarm condition: Security Alarm LED will not illuminate. Does not activate trouble status line count on a CRT. No effect on modules programmed as TPND (trouble pending) or GPND (general event pending). Trouble, clear trouble or acknowledgments are not reported for this type. MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor a security device. This module will be activated by either an open or a short condition and produces a SECURITY ALARM message in the display. MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit that functions identically to Type ID SACM. MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit dedicated to a normally open sprinkler supervisory switch. Activation of a module with Software Type ID SPSU will generate a trouble condition (produces a SPRNKLR TROUBLE message) not an alarm. The option of Tracking (troubles self-restore) is automatically selected for this software type. MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor a security device. This module will be activated by either an open or a short condition and produces a SECURITY TAMPER message in the display. MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit dedicated to a normally open supervisory switch. Activation of a module with Software Type ID SUPR will generate a trouble condition (produces a SUPRVSRY SIGNAL message) not an alarm.
SARM
AREA MONITOR
SEQM
EQUIP MONITR
SPSU
SPRNKLR MNTR
SSYM
SYSTEM MONTR
SUPR
SPRVSRY MNTR
3-55
Group 7: Evacuation Modules
Type ID Display Label

EVGA GN ALARM EVC
Type of Device
CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit (in NAC mode) configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit, activated on General Alarm, for NFPA 72 Local Fire Alarm Systems applications.
Note: This software type cannot be silenced if a module of Software Type ID WAT (Water Flow) has been activated.
Group 8: Annunciator Control
Type ID
AAST ALMP ARES ASGS
Display Label
ANN ACK/STEP ANN LAMP TST ANN RESET ANN SIG SIL
Type of Device
Annunciator Point used to execute ACKNOWLEDGE/STEP. Annunciator Point used to execute LAMP TEST. Annunciator Point used to execute SYSTEM RESET. Annunciator Point used to execute SIGNAL SILENCE.
Group 9: Annunciator Zone
Type ID
AZON
Display Label
ANN ZONE
Type of Device
Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any software zone mapped to it.
Group 10: Annunciator Detector
Type ID
ADET
Display Label
ANN DETECTOR
Type of Device
Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any intelligent detector mapped to it.
Group 11: Annunciator Module
Type ID
AMON
Display Label
ANN MONITOR
Type of Device
Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any MMX Monitor Module, XPM-8 circuit, or XP5-M circuit mapped to it.
Group 12: Annunciator Input
Type ID
AINP
Display Label
ANN INPUT
Type of Device
Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any generic input (software zone, intelligent detector, monitor module, XPM-8 circuit or XP5-M circuit) mapped to it.
Note: Items in groups 9,10 and 11 may be re-mapped to group 12 only.
3-56
Group 13: Annunciator Output
Type ID
ACON
Display Label
ANN CONTROL
Type of Device
Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any CMX Control Module, XPC-8 circuit, XPR-8 relay, or XP5-C circuit mapped to it. This annunciator point can also be used for manual control of relays, speaker and notification circuits. Annunciator Point that is not deactivated upon system reset. Used for fan control and similar applications only with an FRCM control device.
AFCM
ANN FORC MAN
Group 14: Annunciator Telephone
Type ID
ATEL
Display Label
ANN TELEPHON
Type of Device
Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any CMX Control Module or XPC-8 or XP5-C circuit configured for telephone operation. This annunciator point can also control the state (connect/disconnect) of the circuit.
Group 15: Annunciator Supervisory
Type ID
ASUP
Display Label
ANN SUPRVSRY
Type of Device
Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any SPSU or SUPR module mapped to it.
Group 16: Trouble Module
Type ID
MTRB
Display Label
TRBL MONITOR
Type of Device
MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor any trouble contacts external to the system. This module will be activated by either an open or a short condition, and produces a POINT TROUBLE message in the display. A Control-By-Event equation need not be entered for this type since it only produces a trouble signal, not an alarm.
Note: This software type can be used to monitor power from an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) under NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems applications or to monitor remote Main Power Supply in XP Transponder systems.
Group 17: Page Module
Type ID
MPAG
Display Label
MONITOR PAGE
Type of Device
MMX Monitor Module or an XPM-8 circuit or XP5-M circuit dedicated to a normally open switch. Activation of a module with Software Type ID MPAG connects the remotely located Fire Fighter's Telephone handset to the paging system. This Type ID is used in conjunction with the PAGE Type ID (RPJ-1 required).
3-57
Group 18: Annunciator Manual Mode
Type ID
AMAN
Display Label
ANN MANUAL
Type of Device
Annunciator Point that indicates manual mode for an annunciator module. The annunciator point can also turn the manual mode off or on. This Type ID is used in conjunction with INA ACS or FACP shadow point programming.
3-58
Section Four Control-By-Event Programming

4.1 Control-By-Event Programming
Introduction Control-By-Event (CBE) Programming is used to provide a variety of responses based on various combinations of events (initiating conditions). The Control-By-Event Programming controls the interaction between the alarm initiating devices, the internal software zones, and the alarm notification appliances associated with an AM2020/AFP1010. NOTE A software zone is not a physical zone, but rather a software grouping in control panel memory.
Software Zones The AM2020/AFP1010 contains 240 software zones to be used in CBE programming. These software zones are broken into two types, Forward-Activating Zones (FZON) and Reverse-Activating Zones (RZON). These forward and reverse zones must be grouped separately in the system's programming, with the forward group always preceding by lower zone number the reverse group. This is accomplished by setting the Zone Boundary (see Section 1.1.5, Zone Boundary, for more information on setting the zone boundary). Once the boundary is set, all software zone numbers above the Zone Boundary are RZONs and all software zones below and including the Zone Boundary are FZONs.
Forward-Activating Zones FZONs are used to activate addressable output devices and/or other software zones. The software zones that can be activated, however, must have a higher zone number than the FZON being utilized. Reverse Activating Zones RZONs are activated from addressable input devices and/or other software zones. The software zones that can be used to activate a reverse zone must have a lower zone number than the RZON being activated.
Lists and Equations Control-By-Event Programming can be accomplished in two ways, via the List and the Equation. Lists are used for addressable initiating devices (detectors and monitor modules) and forward activating zones, where as, Equations are used for addressable output devices (control modules) and reverse activating zones. When an addressable initiating device or forward-activating zone is programmed with a List, the AM2020/AFP1010 activates all the items, called Operands, in the list when activation of the device or zone occurs. The operands listed for an addressable initiating device can be notification modules and/or software zones (forward or reverse activating). For a forward activating zone, the operands can be forward zones that are higher than its address, reverse activating zones and/or addressable control modules.
Example:
A photoelectric detector has a List of (L1M1 L2M2), where L1M1 and L2M2 are control modules. When the detector is in alarm, all the items in the Control-By-Event List are enabled so both control modules are activated.
3-59
The real power of the CBE Programming comes from the equation, which is evaluated by the control panel to determine a variety of alarm initiating conditions. The equation provides the real decision-making ability through the use of an operator acting on a set of operands. The operands for an output module can be addressable initiating devices, software zones (forward or reverse-activating), or addressable control modules assigned an address lower than its own. For a reverse-activating zone, the operands can be addressable initiating devices, forward zones, or reverse zones that are lower than its address. The format for an equation is shown below, where the operators are OR, AND, NOT, XZONE, DEL, SDEL, and TIM; and the operands are groupings of initiating devices and/or software zones, as well as information specific to the format of individual operators.
Operator(- - - - Operands - - - -)
Examples: OR(Z9 Z15 Z23) AND(L1D1 Z3 L1D35 L1D72) NOT(Z23) XZONE(Z23) DEL(HH.MM.SS HH.MM.SS (L1M1)) SDEL(HH.MM.SS HH.MM.SS (Z1)) TIM(SU MO TU WE TR FR SA HH.MM HH.MM)
All of the operator formats above are explained in detail on the following pages.
Control-By-Event Programming Constraints There can only be one DEL or SDEL operator in a control-by-event equation, not both. If there is no duration time field in a DEL or SDEL, the equation will always be activated. The maximum value of DELAY TIME + DURATION TIME is 255:59:59. If either the day, month or year field is omitted, that field is assumed to be all allowable values of the field omitted. Example: 12--90 is equivalent to any day in December 1990. The HH.MM field for START TIME and STOP TIME uses military time. The HH.MM field for STOP TIME must be greater than the START TIME. The maximum value of START TIME or STOP TIME is 24:00. If an alarm condition occurs, all active TIM devices will be deactivated. All TIM equations will be ignored until all alarms are restored, at which point all TIM devices will return to their proper state. See Section 4.3, Size Limitations for the constraints on the size, in bytes, of the CBE.
3-60
4.2 Operators
OR
Operator: Equation: The first (and most useful) operator is OR. OR(Z9 Z15 Z23) If ANY one of the three operands in the equation are in alarm, then the control module will be activated. IF Software Zone 9 is in alarm OR IF Software Zone 15 is in alarm OR IF Software Zone 23 is in alarm, THEN this control module will be activated.
L1M3 CMX OR(Z9 Z15 Z23) Z9 Z15 Z23
AND
Operator: The AND operator requires that each operand be in alarm. AND(Z9 Z15 Z23) ALL three operands in the equation MUST be in alarm for the control module to be activated. IF Software Zone 9 is in alarm AND IF Software Zone 15 is in alarm AND IF Software Zone 23 is in alarm, THEN this control module will be activated.
L1M1 CMX AND(Z9 Z15 Z23) L1D1 (Z9) L1D2 (Z15) L1D3 (Z23)
Equation:
Z9
Z15
Z23
3-61
NOT
Operator: The NOT operator inverts the state of the operand (activated to deactivated OR deactivated to activated). NOT(Z2) The control module will remain activated UNTIL the operand comes into alarm.
Z2 L1D4 (Z2)
Equation:
IF Software Zone 2 is in alarm, THEN this control module will be deactivated.
L1M1 CMX NOT(Z2)
XZONE
Operator: For Cross Zone operation, the XZONE counting operator may be used. XZONE(Z23) IF ANY combination of two or more initiating devices (L1D1, L1D2, L1D3, L1D4) that have been programmed (Control-By-Event) to this software zone (Z23) come into alarm, THEN this control module will be activated.
Z23 L1D1 (Z23) L1D2 (Z23) L1D3 (Z23) L1D4 (Z23)
Equation:
L1M3 CMX XZONE(Z23)
3-62
DEL
Operator: Equation: For delayed operation, the DEL operator is used. DEL(HH.MM.SS HH.MM.SS (Z1)) Delay Duration Internal
L1M3
(optional) Equation
Example: L1M3 activates Forward Activating Zone 223 (Z223). L1M2 CBE is: DEL(00.00.30 00.01.30 (Z223)) IF Z223 has been active for 30 seconds THEN L1M2 will become active. L1M2 will stay active for 1 minute and 30 seconds provided that Zone Z223 remains active. Time line 0:00 0:30 1:00 1:30 2:00 2:30 ++++++ Z223 L1M2 L1M2 active active inactive
(Z223)
Z223
L1M2 CMX
DEL(00.00.30 (Z223))
00.01.30
NOTES The entire DEL equation consumes at least 11 bytes (including a 3-byte internal equation). The internal equation can be a complex equation many bytes in size. If a delay of zero is entered (00.00.00), the equation will evaluate true as soon as the internal equation evaluates true and will remain that way for the specified duration, unless the internal equation becomes false. If no duration is specified, then the device will not be deactivated until a reset occurs or the internal equation evaluates false.
3-63
SDEL
Operator: The SDEL operator is also used for delayed operation. This is a latched version of the DEL operator. Once the equation evaluates True, it remains activated until a reset, even if the internal equation becomes false. SDEL(HH.MM.SS HH.MM.SS (Z1)) Delay Example: Duration Internal
Equation:
(optional) Equation
If Z223 CBE is: SDEL(00.00.30 00.01.30 (L1M1)) IF L1M1 has been active for 30 seconds THEN Z223 will become active. Z223 will stay active for 1 minute and 30 seconds. Time line 0:00 0:30 1:00 1:30 2:00 2:30 ++++++ L1M1 Z223 Z223 active active inactive NOTES The entire SDEL equation consumes at least 11 bytes (including a 3-byte Internal Equation). The Internal Equation can be a complex equation many bytes in size. If a delay of zero is entered (00.00.00), the equation will evaluate true as soon as the Internal Equation evaluates True and will remain that way for the specified duration. If no duration is specified, then the device will not deactivate until reset.
TIM
Operator: Equation: The TIM operator is used to specify activation on specific days of the week or year.
TIM(SU MO TU WE TR FR SA HH.MM HH.MM) Activation Day Start Time Stop Time
(Type 1)
(optional) (optional) (optional)
Example:
If Z221 CBE is: TIM(SA SU 7.30 13.59) Zone Z221 will be active on Saturdays and Sundays from 7:30AM to 1:59PM.
Equation:
TIM(MM-DD-YY HH.MM HH.MM) Activation Date Start Time Stop Time
(Type 2)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
Examples: If Z222 CBE is: TIM(7-4-)

` Zone Z222 will be active on July 4th for every year. If Z222 CBE is: TIM(12-25- 9.00 17.00) Zone Z222 will be active on December 25th for every year from 9:00AM to 5:00PM.
` 3-64
4.3 Size Limitations

Each Control-By-Event has a physical size limitation of 14 bytes in control panel memory. For initiating devices, the Control-By-Event size can be calculated by the following formula: Size in bytes = 1 + (Number of Zones) + (Number of Control Modules X 3) Example: The following Control-By-Event takes up 10 bytes in memory. (Z1 Z6 Z12 L2M4 L7M15) Size in bytes 1+ (3) + (2 X3) +1 = 11
For notification devices, the Control-By-Event size can be calculated by adding the components involved using the following values: ( = 1 byte ) = 1 byte OR( = 1 byte AND( = 1 byte NOT( = 1 byte XZONE( = 1 byte DEL( = 1 byte TIM( = 1 byte SDEL( = 1 byte Examples: 1) The following Control-By-Event takes up 13 bytes in memory: OR( Size in bytes 1 Z1 + 1 Z4 + 1 Z9 + 1 Z16 + 1 Z23 + 1 LID3 + 3 L2M7 + 3 ) + 1 = 13 Zones = 1 byte each Initiating devices = 3 bytes each The time specifications for the DEL, TIM, and SDEL operators = 6 bytes
2) The following CBE takes up 11 bytes in memory: DEL( Size in bytes 1 + 00.00.30 00.01.30 6 ( + 1 Z1 + 1 ) + 1 ) + 1 = 11
3-65
Due to the 14-byte size limitation, it may be necessary to use more than one equation or list to accomplish a desired result. Through the use of reverse activating zones, an equation which normally would contain too many bytes can be broken up into several smaller equations. In the example below, a control module (CMX) is to be activated by any one of 14 software zones:
Z6 Z5
Z7
Z8
Z9 Z10
Z4
Z11
Z3
Z12
Z2 L1M1 CMX Z1 Z14
Z13
CBE Equation for L1M1: OR( Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8 Z9 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14 )
1 + 1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 + 1+1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 16 Bytes (too many)
By using two reverse-activating zones, the equation with 16 bytes is broken into two smaller equations and the CBE for the control module uses the two reverse-activating zones as its operands.
Z6 Z5
Z7
Z8
Z9 Z10
Z4
Z11
CBE Equation for Z239: OR(Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8) = 10 Bytes
Z3 Z239 RZON Z2 Z240 RZON
Z12
Z13
CBE Equation for Z240: OR(Z9 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14) = 8 Bytes
Z1
Z14
CBE Equation for L1M1: OR(Z239 Z240) = 4 Bytes

L1M1 CMX
3-66
4.4 Cooperative Control-By-Event

Cooperative Control-By-Event equations pertain to reverse activated software zones on the AM2020/ AFP1010 NOTIFIRENET system only. CCBE, like Control-By-Event (CBE), is used to provide a variety of responses based on various combinations of events (initiating conditions). Where CBE programming controls the interaction between devices and software zones within one AM2020/AFP1010, CCBE programming controls events between multiple panels on a NOTIFIRENET system. For example, an addressable initiating device in one panel turning on an addressable output device of another panel through a reverse activated software zone. The formats and uses for CBE and CCBE are similar in many ways with the following exceptions: Only reverse activating software zones can be programmed with a CCBE equation. CCBE equations can only be programmed for software zones from the AM2020/AFP1010 node that the zones reside in. For instance, if a CCBE equation is to be programmed for software zone 23 of node 10 the user must program the equation on the AM2020/AFP1010 that is declared as node 10. CCBE can only use the AND(, OR(, and NOT( operands. CCBE equations have a size limitation of 80 characters. NOTE Forward activating software zones can not have CCBE equations but can be used as operands in other CCBE equations. Each AM2020/AFP1010 has 240 software zones for both CBE and CCBE programming. Although there are 240 software zones, only zones 2-240 can have CCBE equations associated with them. Since a zone boundary must be declared, at least one of the software zones will be a forward activating zone and can not have a CCBE equation associated with it. If Zone 1 is used as the zone boundary, then there are only 239 zones left for CCBE programming. It is possible for a reverse-activated software zone to have both a CBE and CCBE equation associated with it. If this occurs, the software zone will become active if either equation becomes active. The format for a CCBE equation is the same as a CBE equation. The operators for CCBE can only be AND(, OR(, and NOT(. The operands for CCBE are most often a zone with the format N(XXX)Z(YYY), where XXX is the node number for the particular panel on the network and YYY is one of the 240 software zones available to CCBE programming.
4.5 The Null Control-By-Event

The simplest type of Control-By-Event is the Null, which means empty. For initiating devices, the Null is denoted by entering ( ) as the Control-By-Event. In response to an alarm on an addressable alarm initiating device programmed with a Null Control-By-Event, the AM2020/AFP1010 will do the following: Initiate a System Alarm condition (Alarm LED flashes, piezo sounds and the Form-C alarm contacts on the CPU will be activated). Activate no control modules or software zones (no notification appliances will sound and no output relays will be activated due to the fact that there are no entries in the Control-By-Event for this initiating device). For Addressable Output Devices, the Null is denoted by entering OR( ) or ( ). Note: Entering ( is equivalent to entering OR(. A control module programmed with a Null Control-By-Event will not be activated unless it is included in the Control-By-Event of a software zone or initiating device. Example - Resetting 4-wire Smoke Detectors A control module is needed to reset power to 4-wire smoke detectors in an AM2020 or AFP1010 system unless the resettable power output (TB3 terminals 1 and 2) from the MPS-24A is used. This module must not be activated in response to an alarm condition. Rather, this module must only be activated during system reset. This can be accomplished by assigning the module a Null Control-By-Event and the Software Type ID PWRC (the control panel automatically resets modules with Type ID PWRC upon system reset).
3-67
4.6 Programming Examples

Options The example below illustrates three ways to accomplish the simple programming task of programming a Notification Appliance (control module) on SLC Loop 1 to indicate activation of an Initiating Device (smoke detector) also on SLC Loop 1.
Solution A
Program the smoke detector with the Control-By-Event:
Solution B
No Control-ByEvent required for the smoke detector.
Solution C
Program the smoke detector with the Control-By-Event:
(Z1)
(L1M1)
Software Zone Z1
Type: FZON
Program the control module with the Control-By-Event No Control-ByEvent required for the control module.
OR(L1D1)
Program the control module with the Control-By-Event
OR(Z1)
3-68
L1D1
L1D2
L1D3
L1D4
(Z1)
(Z1)
(Z1)
(Z2)
Example # 1: Combinational Logic
L1D1, L1D2, and L1D3 activate Z1. L1D4 activates Z2. If Z1 activates, L1M1 will activate. If Z2 activates then L1M4 will activate. The equation AND(Z1 Z239) requires both to be active for an output. Because reverse zone 239 has a NOT operand, it is active as long as L1D4 is inactive.
Z1
RZON AND(Z1 Z239) Z240 RZON Z239
Z2
NOT(Z2)
L1M1 CMX L1M2 CMX L1M4 CMX
OR(Z1)
OR(Z240)
OR(Z2)
Example # 2: General Alarm
L1D1
(Z1)
L1D2
(Z2)
L1D3
(Z3)
L1D4
(Z3)
L1D1 activates L1M1 through Z1. L1D2 activates L1M2 through Z2. L1D3 and L1D4 activate L1M4 through Z3. L1M3 will activate when reverse zone 240 is activated. Z240 will activate when Z1, Z2 or Z3 are activated. Notification Appliance L1M3 serves as the General Alarm device. It will be activated whenever an alarm occurs on any addressable initiating device in the system, due to the fact that all initiating devices activate a Software Zone, and activation of any zone activates software zone Z240.
Z1
Z2
Z3
RZON Z240
OR(Z1 Z2 Z3)
L1M1 CMX
OR(Z1)
L1M2 CMX
OR(Z2)
L1M3 CMX
OR(Z240)
L1M4 CMX
OR(Z3)
3-69
L1D1
(Z1)
L1D2
()
Example # 3: Delay and Time
Z1
RZON Z240
DEL(00.01.00 00.05.00 (Z1))
L1D1 activates Z1. L1M1 turns on when Z1 is active. L1D2 is a null equation. L1M2 activates with L1D2 after a ten minute delay. Z239 is active July 4th of every year. L1M3 will activate when Z1 and Z239 are active. Z240 is active when Z1 is on after a one minute delay and will stay on for 5 minutes. L1M4 turns on when Z240 is active.
L1M1 CMX
OR(Z1)
RZON Z239
TIM(7-4-)
L1M3 CMX L1M2 CMX

AND(Z1 Z239)
L1M4 CMX
OR(Z240)
DEL(00.10.00 (L1D2))
Example # 4: Fire Floor, Floor Above, Floor Below
L1D1
(Z1 Z2)
L1D2
(Z1 Z2 Z3)
L1D3
(Z2 Z3 Z4)
L1D1 activates Z1 and Z2. L1D2 activates Z1, Z2 and Z3. L1D3 activates Z2, Z3 and Z4. L1M1 will activate when Z1 is active. L1M2 will activate when Z2 is active. L1M3 will activate when Z3 is active. L1M4 will activate when Z4 is active.
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
L1M1 CMX
OR(Z1)
L1M2 CMX
OR(Z2)
L1M3 CMX
OR(Z3)
L1M4 CMX
OR(Z4)
3-70
Example # 5: CCBE for NOTIFIRENET
Node 1 will activate L1M1 if Z1 is active locally. Node 1 will activate L1M2 if Z200 is active locally or in both Nodes 7 and 43 simultaneously. Node 43 will activate L1M2 if Z200 is not active locally and not activated in Node 7.
L1D1
L1D2
L1D1
L1D2
(Z1)
(Z200)
(Z1)
(Z200)
Z1
RZON Z200
Z1
RZON Z200
()
OR( ) AND(N7Z200 N43Z200)

L1M2 CMX
()
OR( ) OR( )
L1M2 CMX
L1M1 CMX
L1M1 CMX
OR(Z1)
OR(Z200)
OR(Z1)
OR(Z200)
NODE 1
NODE 7
L1D1
(Z1)
Z1
RZON Z200
()
OR( ) OR(N7Z200)
L1M2 CMX
L1M1 CMX
OR(Z1)
NOT(Z200)
NODE 43
3-71
Section Five Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation

Programming for Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation operation (for use in Canada only) An XPC-8 Notification Appliance Circuit module can be configured for Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation operation. Under this mode of operation each circuit operates in one of two stages: alert or evacuation. When configured this way, each notification appliance circuit has two addresses associated with it. Refer to the XP Series Transponder Manual for additional information. The first address is the control address. Activating this point (through its Control-By-Event programming) will turn the notification appliance circuit on. This point uses the Software Type ID CON. The second address is the stage selection address. This point decides what state an active notification appliance circuit will be in. Activating this point will put the notification appliance circuit into evacuation mode. If this point is not activated the circuit will be in alert mode. This point uses the Software Type ID FORC. NOTE If an unacknowledged circuit is in alert mode for more than five minutes, all activated circuits on the XPC-8 will change to the evacuation pulse rate.
3-72
AM2020 AFP1010
Chapter Four Security
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-1
4-2
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
Section One Installing and Programming Combination Fire/Security Fire Alarm Systems
1.1 Introduction
The AM2020/AFP1010 is suitable for use as a Grade AA, Grade A, or Grade B Central Station and Proprietary Burglar Alarm Protected Premises and Receiving Unit when the installation and programming requirements outlined in this section are followed. Such an installation meets the requirements of Standards UL1076 (Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems) and UL1610 (Central Station Burglar Alarm Units). A Fire/Security Protective Signaling System includes one or more of the following: Protected Premises. Central Stations. Security devices in such a system must be configured so unauthorized activity in an area within the Protected Premises is communicated to the Central Station. This communication will be handled in one of two ways, depending on the characteristics of the location: When the system consists of a single AM2020/AFP1010, the system must reside in the Central Station. Security devices are grouped together in logical areas, and when activated, signal the operator at the Central Station. When the system consists of more than one AM2020/AFP1010, a Protected Premises Unit (PPU) AM2020/AFP1010 equipped with a Network Interface Board (NIB-96) facilitates signaling over an SLC loop to the AM2020/AFP1010 control unit at the Central Station.
NOTE The INA and NRT are not suitable for Central Station or Proprietary supervising station use.
This section outlines security requirements for installations using a single AM2020/AFP1010 and installations using multiple AM2020/AFP1010 units, including optional features. Sample system configuration diagrams are also included. Programming must be performed by an installer who is proficient in programming the AM2020/AFP1010. The table below lists monitor and control module codes used in the system configuration diagrams, and lists the specific part numbers that are defined by the codes.
General Term Monitor Module Control Module Code used in Security Diagrams MM CM Specific Part Numbers MMX-1, MMX-101, XP5-M, CMX-1, CMX-2, XP5-C,
Table 1.1-1 Monitor and Control Module Codes

Note: The installation will comply with the UL security listings when it is installed as detailed in this manual. The UL listing does not automatically apply to any configuration of security equipment that is not detailed in this document.
1.2 General Security Requirements

The following security requirements must be met: The MPS-24 or MPS-24E power supply cannot be employed; an MPS-24A or MPS-24AE must be used. Shielded cable must be used on all input/output wiring associated with security functions. SLC Loop Shielding (refer to Chapter One Installation, Section 4.4, SLC Loop Shield Termination). Security Module I/O Circuit Shielding terminate the shield at earth ground at the junction box containing the module. When employed as a Protected Premises Unit, the AM2020/AFP1010 cabinet door must be wired with an STS-1 Tamper Switch that is monitored by the control panel. If the system has arming and disarming capability, a ringback signal from the Central Station to the arming location is required for Grade AA or Grade A operation. The ringback signal informs the Protected Premises Control Panel that the signal to arm/disarm has been received by the Central Station. A single SLC loop may be used for both Fire and Security Device Connections.
Security 15088:J 10/22/99
4-3
There are four software type IDs associated with security operation; Security Access Monitor (SACM), Security Area Monitor (SARM), Security Equipment Monitor (SEQM), and Security System Monitor (SSYM). There is also one software function, Security Delay (SDEL). These software elements are essential to all aspects of security operation, including Control-By-Event (CBE) programming. Devices with the type IDs SACM and SEQM do not automatically display at the LCD or require state change acknowledgment. State changes in devices with these software types may be output at a printer. Refer to Chapter Three Programming for more information about the characteristics of software type IDs.
WARNING! XP Transponder circuits (XPP-1, XPM-8, XPC-8, XPR-8, XPM-8L) are not suitable for security applications.
1.3 Security Configuration-Specific Requirement

Placement of Security Devices
Security devices are placed in two main areas: the building perimeter and the interior spaces. Take care to select a device appropriate to the area you install it in. The device should be sensitive enough to detect an intruder but not so sensitive that normal variations in the surrounding environment cause false alarms.
Building Perimeters
Table 1.3-1 lists some common types of security devices used on the building perimenter, and a brief description and application notes for each type. This is meant only as a guide when selecting which types of devices you need; follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation and maintenance.
Type Magnetic Contacts Description A reed switch and a magnet usually used in doors and windows. The switch is mounted in the frame, the magnet directly opposite in the door or window. When the door or window opens, the magnet is moved away from the switch, causing an alarm. Also available in a balanced/high security version, which has a second biasing magnet built into the switch portion to prevent the contact from being defeated by an external magnet. Spring-loaded contact held closed by the door or window. When the door or window is opened, the contact springs open, causing an alarm. Application Notes Usually installed on all perimeter doors and any moveable surface on the perimeter of the building (i.e., windows, loading chutes, overhead doors, etc.). Often installed on some interior doors to create internal traps. Normall installed on the upper edge of a door two inches from the opening side. Install contacts on concealed inside surface if possible. Consider using balanced/high security version in high-risk situations or when the contacts are easily accessible. Make sure that the barrier the contacts protect is in good repair and that the contacts are installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. Usually installed on all perimeter doors and any moveable surface on the perimeter of the building (i.e., windows, loading chutes, overhead doors, etc.). Often installed on some interior doors to create internal traps. Make sure that the barrier the contacts protect is in good repair and that the contacts are installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. Foil is easily scratched and damaged by animals and humans. If installed on windows, frost can cause the foil to separate from the glass and break. These breaks can be extremely difficult to locate and repair. A good foil installation can also be time-consuming and requires periodic maintenance to prevent problems. Surface mounted detectors typically cover about 30 square feet of glass, but check manufacturer's recommendations. They tend to be more reliable and easier to mount than foil. Since the sound is transmitted through the glass, they are not subject to false alarm by high frequencey sounds transmitted through the air. Acoustical detectors generally cover a larger area than surface types, but check manufacturer's recommendations. Offices with partitions, dividers, or sound absorbing or deadening material will decrease their effectiveness. Screens must usually be custom ordered. They are not aesthetically pleasing, so they are typically used in applications where appearances are not important, such as warehouses and factories. Lacing wire should be run so that a person must cut the wire to gain a cce ss.
Mechanical Contacts
F oi l
A thin, fragile strip of conductive metallic foil fastened with adhesive to glass, wood, or other insulating material. When the material it is fastened to breaks, the foil also breaks, interrupting the current and causing an alarm. Surface mounted: A small, plastic-encased device fastened to the glass surface, which detects high frequency sounds generated when a large piece of glass breaks.
Glass Breakage Detectors
Accoustical: A device that mounts on wall or ceiling adjacent to glass and is attuned to the frequency of sound made by glass breaking. Screens/ Lacing Wire Screens and lacing wire cover openings such as ductwork, skylights, and vents. Screens are an array of wooden dowels with a small-gauge wire embedded in each. If the dowels are cut or broken, the wires are severed, causing an alarm. Lacing wire, a fine insulated wire carrying normal alarm current, runs across the opening in many directions. When the wire is broken or cut, current will be interrupted, causing an alarm.
Table 1.3-1 Building Perimeter Security Devices

4-4
Security 15088:J 10/22/99
Interior Spaces
Table 1.3-2 contains some common types of devices used in interior spaces, and a brief description and application notes for each type. This is meant only as a guide when selecting which types of devices you need; follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation and maintenance.
Type Ultrasonic Motion Detector Description Consists of a transmitter and a receiver. Transmitter produces a high frequency sound (26,500 Hz) which is reflected off surrounding objects and walls. Receiver detects these reflected sounds and compares them to the transmitted sounds. If an object or person is moving, the reflected sound energy will have a different frequency than the transmitted sound due to the Doppler effect. Application Notes Consider environmental conditions before deciding to use ultrasonic motion detectors. Air turbulence or moving objects may cause false alarms. Many systems use signal processing to eliminate random motion by only going into alarm if the source of motion continually approaches or recedes, so place the detector in an area where an intruder would have to walk directly toward or away from it. This increases the chance of detection. Be sure to adjust the detector so it is pointed away from possible sources of false alarms such as other motion detectors, fans, hanging displays, loose overhead doors, or hanging plants. Be aware that the sensitivity ultrasonic of motion detection varies with temperature and humidity. Also, areas that contain highly sound-absorbent materials will reduce the detector's effectiveness, while areas with highly reflective surfaces will increase its effectiveness. The energy used to detect intruders is easily contained by walls and partitions. This allows individual areas to be protected independently. Microwave energy can penetrate glass, paneling, and other interior partitions. Make sure the beam is blocked by the floor or a brick/concrete wall with no windows. Otherwise, the detector could report false alarms by sensing motion far beyond the protected area. Metal reflects microwave energy, so metal columns, walls, flat metal objects, or moving metal objects could cause unexplainable false alarms. Never use microwave detectors in metal buildings. Sometimes radiation from fluorescent lights can cause false alarms, so make sure they are not in the detector's field of view. Radio transmitters and AC transients can also cause false alarms. Detectors covering adjacent areas should have slightly different frequencies. This prevents them from interfering with one another and causing false alarms. Best used in small- to medium-sized areas. Should be installed so their field of view does not include heat sources such as vents, radiators, open flames, or direct sunlight, or moving light sources such as headlights.
Microw ave Motion Detector
Operates on same principle as ultrasonic detectors. Uses microwave energy transmitted at about 10.525 GHz modulated at approximately 915 MHz, then projected into the protected area.
Passive Infrared Motion Detectors Photoelectric Beams
Detects a change in the infrared energy (emitted by all objects) in the surrounding environment using thermistors, thermopiles, or pyroelectrics. Uses an LED to project an invisible modulated or pulsed light source across a protected area to a receiver. If the source is blocked, or if it is received at a different modulation, it causes an alarm.
Arrange beams so they form a complicated array across the protected area. When used in long hallways or large open areas, do not follow the shape of the area or run parallel to it; instead, skew the beams across the area. Additional receivers or mirrors can be used to increase the number of times the beam crosses the area, but be aware that using a mirror reduces the range to as much as half the original distance. Also, dirt/dust on the mirror reduces reliability and increases the number of false alarms. Active: Same characteristics and limitations as ultrasonic detectors.
Audio Detection
Active: Same principle as ultrasonic motion detectors except using audible sound. Passive: Microphones throughout a protected area connected to a controlling device that uses logic to detect the types of noises that would be produced by an intruder.
Passive: Trucks, buses, or low-flying aircraft can create false alarms. Also an intruder may not make enough noise to set the detector off until substantial loss has occurred. Usually used in applications where vandalism is the main concern, such as schools or general office areas. Sensitivity varies with the weight of the intruder. Since the sensors detect only momentary changes in stress, they can be used in areas where the amount of weight in an area will vary from day to day. These systems do not work on structures with a low flexure such as concrete floors, stairs, or beams, heavy steel beams, or stone floors. Make sure the sensors are securely fastened to the structure and that the structure is of the proper material.
Stress Detectors
Operates on the principle that intruders cause small amounts of stress on a building's structure, especially on floor supports and joists. Sensors that use crystals, which produce a small amount of current when deformed or stressed, are strapped to these supports and joists. This current is sent to a control unit, which causes an alarm.
Table 1.3-2 Interior Space Security Devices
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-5
To make locating alarms easier, each monitor module should monitor devices in one specific area. If possible, these devices should all be of similar types. This helps the operator to determine the cause of the alarm, as well as allowing the operator to identify and repair detectors causing false alarms quickly. Interior motion detectors should be placed on a separate supervisory circuit whenever possible, since they have a higher failure rate than other devices. This way, even if the operator has to disconnect that circuit to repair a device, the other security devices in the area (door contacts, photoelectric beams, etc.) would still protect the area.
Zone Numbering
To facilitate the application engineering process, this document refers to the zone number as a Z followed by one or two lower case letters. This is done because the numerical order in which the zones are assigned is an important design consideration. Convert the lower case letters used in this document to numbers using the following rules: Use the same number for each abbreviation. For example, if you decide to program Zone Za as Z05, make sure to use Z05 anywhere else the abbreviation Za appears in that application. When programming zones that have two letter abbreviations, the first letter represents the area that zone is associated with. This first letter does not represent a number; it is just a way to categorize which Protected Premise the zone is associated with. For example, if an application has one area identified as Tenant A and one as Tenant B, the zone abbreviations for the first zone in each would be Zaa and Zba, respectively. You could assign Zone Number Z05 to Zaa and Zone Number Z06 to Zba. See Table 1.3-3.
Assign zone numbers in ascending order following the alphabetical order of the last lower case letter in the abbreviation, with a being the lowest number. Zones with different first letters (for example, Zac and Zbc) do not have to be in any particular order as long as they are in order within their first-letter groups. For example, Zad would not have to have a higher number than Zbc, but Zad would have to have a higher number than Zac. Table 1.3-3 and 1.3-4 provide examples of how zone numbers can be assigned in place of the zone letters used in this document.
Letter Number
Zaa Z05
Zab Z12
Zac Z22
Zad Z180
Zae Z188
Zaf Z190
Zag Z198
Zah Z200
Zai Z208
Zaj Z210
Zone boundary greater than or equal to Z22 and less than Z180
Table 1.3-3 Zone Numbers - One Set of Zones

Letter Number Letter Number Zaa Z05 Zba Z06 Zab Z12 Zbb Z07 Zac Z22 Zbc Z21 Zad Z180 Zbd Z100 Zae Z188 Zbe Z102 Zaf Z190 Zbf Z108 Zag Z198 Zbg Z187 Zah Z200 Zbh Z191 Zai Z208 Zbi Z193 Zaj Z210 Zbj Z215
Zone boundary greater than or equal to Z22 and less than Z100
Table 1.3-4 Zone Numbers - Two Sets of Zones

The reason this document uses letters instead of numbers is to give you some flexibility in assigning zone numbers to your security applications. However, the rules above must be adhered to when assigning numbers to the letter abbreviations. Otherwise,your security system may not work as it is intended due to the system scanning order and other Control-By-Event-interlock statement programming considerations.
4-6
Security 15088:J 10/22/99
Security System Diagrams and Programming Keys

The following figures illustrate the minimum system requirements for various configurations of the AM2020/ AFP1010 and associated peripherals. Refer to Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this chapter for monitor and control module information. Refer to the XP5 Series Transponder Manual listed in the Related Documentation Chart of this manual for connection information for the XP5 modules. Refer as well to the Product Installation Documents 15984 (RKS-S Remote Keyswitch) and 15456 (STS-1 Security Tamper Switch) for connection information on these devices. Refer to the Glossary section of this manual for descriptions of the terms used in this section. The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-1. See Table 1.1-1 the introduction to this section for other monitor module options. One AM2020/AFP1010 Control Panel One Security Supervisory Protected Area One Protected Premises One MMX-1 or MMX-101 Monitor Module, Security Devices (minimum security equipment).
TENANT A
47K End-of-Line Resistor (A-2143-00) Normally open security switch (listed)
Normally closed security switch (listed)
AREA 1 (Perimeter)
1
MMX-1 or MMX-101 Security Area Monitor (See Fig 1.3-7 for MMX-101 wiring polarity) SLC to LIB at Central Station
Area1.cdr
Key
Motion Detector Contact Switch MM Security Area Monitor Pull Station Smoke Detector Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)
AM2020/AFP1010 Central Station
Figure 1.3-1 Simplest Security System Programming Key for Figure 1.3-1
MM Security Area Monitor: Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Type ID: SARM Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Installer Specified (describe location of module). Tracking: Yes - Results in required acknowledgment at Central Station for every unsecured state. Restoral is automatic. No - Results in required acknowledgment at Central Station for first unsecured state only (until reset at Central Station - short condition only). Annunciator: No (not required). Yes (if annunciator mapping desired) Annunciator Point Mapping (Optional): AxxPyy
Security 15088:J 10/22/99
4-7
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-2. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for monitor module options. One AM2020/AFP1010 Control Panel Multiple Security Supervisory Protected Areas One Protected Premises One Monitor Module per protected area, Security Devices (minimum security equipment).
TENANT A
Key
Motion Detector Contact Switch
AREA 2
AREA 3
MM Security Area Monitor
2
AREA 1 (Perimeter)
3 1
Pull Station Smoke Detector
Signaling Line Circuit
Figure 1.3-2 Multiple Tenant Simple Security System
Programming Key for Figure 1.3-2

4-8
Security 15088:J
Area2.cdr
10/22/99
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-3. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for monitor module options. One AM2020/AFP1010 Control Panel Multiple Security Supervisory Protected Areas Multiple Protected Premises One Monitor Module per protected area, Security Devices (minimum security equipment).
TENANT A Key
AREA 2 AREA 3
2
AREA 1 (Perimeter)
3 1
MM Security Area Monitor Shaded Area Indicates Second Tenant Pull Station Smoke Detector Signaling Line Circuit
AREA 1 (Perimeter)
TENANT B Figure 1.3-3 Multiple Tenant Simple Security System

Area3.cdr
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-9
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-4. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for other monitor and control module options. One AM2020/AFP1010 Control Panel Multiple Security Supervisory Circuits Reporting to Central Station as a Single Area Single Protected Premises The minimum security equipment required is as follows: Multiple MMX-1 or MMX-101 Monitor Modules per protected area one group interface consisting of a CMX and an MMX-1 or MMX-101 module. security devices
TENANT A
Key
AREA 1 (Perimeter and Interior)
MM Security Area Monitor MM CM Group Interface * Pull Station Smoke Detector * Group Interface must be physically located in either the protected premises or the Central Station
Group Interface *
MM CM

MMX-1/CMX Wiring CMX-1 or CMX-2 com no
Signaling Line Circuit from Central Station
MMX-1
MMX-101/CMX Wiring (Alternate to MMX-1/CMX) red (+) Signaling Line Circuit from Central Station
black (-)
purple yellow
CMX-1 or CMX-2 com no
Note: Tabs on CMX must be broken when used as a Form-C relay
R-47K End-of-Line Resistor (not supplied)
Figure 1.3-4 Single Tenant Consolidated Security System

4-10
Security 15088:J 10/22/99
Area4.cdr
Note: Tabs on CMX must be broken when used as a Form-C relay
Signaling Line Circuit to other devices

MM Security Access Monitor: Address: Type ID: Control-By-Event: Custom Label:
MM = CM
Group Interface:
LXXMYY (Installer specified). A: CM programming: SACM Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). (Za*) Type ID: CMXC Installer Option (describe specific Control-By-Event: (Za*) location of module). Custom Label: Security Group Output Tracking: Yes - Each unsecured state and Signal Silence: No restoral will be printed when the Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified). print option is enabled. Annunciator: No (Not required). No - the first unsecured state will be printed when the print option is enabled (restorals will not print unB: MM programming: til reset at Central Station - short Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). condition only). Type ID: SARM Annunciator: No (Not required). Control-By-Event: ( ) Yes (if annunciator mapping deCustom Label: Installer Option (describe location sired) of module). Annunciator Point Tracking: Yes - Results in required acknowlMapping (Optional): AxxPyy edgment at Central Station for every unsecured state. Restoral is *'a' is an installer specified numautomatic. ber. In this example, all modules No - Results in required acknowlmust be assigned the same zone edgment at Central Station for first number. unsecured state only (until reset at Central Station - short condition only). Annunciator: No (Not required). Yes (if annunciator mapping desired) Annunciator Point Mapping (Optional): AxxPyy
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-11
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-5. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for monitor and control module options. One AM2020/AFP1010 Control Panel Multiple Security Supervisory Circuits Reporting to Central Station as a Single Area Multiple Protected Premises The minimum security equipment required is as follows: Multiple Monitor Modules per protected area one group interface per grouped area security devices
TENANT A
Key

MM CM
MM Security Area Monitor MM CM Group Interface * Shaded Area Indicates Second Tenant Pull Station Smoke Detector
MM CM
TENANT B
* Group Interface must be physically located in either the protected premises or the Central Station
Figure 1.3-5 Multiple Tenant Consolidation Security System Programming Key for Figure 1.3-5
Programming relating to Figure 1.3-5 is essentially the same as Figure 1.3-4. The only difference in programming is that (Za) Control By Event value for Tenant A and (Zb) Control By Event value for Tenant B must be used, where Za is a zone number and Zb is a different zone number.
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-6. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for monitor and control module options. One AM2020/AFP1010 Control Panel One Security Supervisory Protected Area One Protected Premises System Arm/Disarm Capability with Central Station Ringback Signal The minimum security equipment required is as follows: Monitor Module for Protected Area Contact Switch for Entry/Exit Door RKS-S Remote Keyswitch Monitor Modules One Group Interface ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator for Entry/Exit Door Security Devices One Group Interface
4-12
Security 15088:J 10/22/99
Area5.cdr
TENANT A
Key
Contact Switch with MM Module RKS-S Remote Keyswitch with MM Module MM Security Area Monitor ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator MM CM MM CM * Group Interface * Pull Station Smoke Detector To Signaling Line Circuit
* Group Interface must be physically located in either the protected premises or the Central Station

Sample Annunciator Display (ACM-16AT)
To Central Station (via EIA-485 circuit)
Entry/Exit Door
Figure 1.3-6 Single Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay

Contact Switch w/MM Module: Address: LXXMYY (Installer Specified). Type ID: SACM Control-By-Event: (Zac*) Custom Label: Entry/Exit Door Tracking: Yes Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: AXXP3 RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/MM Module: Address: LXXMYY (Installer Specified). Type ID: NOA Control-By-Event: (Zab*) Custom Label: Arming Switch Tracking: Yes Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: AXXP1
Area6.cdr
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-13
Programming Key for Figure 1.3-6 (Cont)

ACM-16AT/-32A Annunciator: Annun. Pt. Type ID AXXP1 AMON AXXP2 AZON AXXP3 AMON AXXP4 AMON MM Security Access Monitor: Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Type ID: SACM Control-By-Event: (Zaa*) Custom Label: Installer Option (describe specific location of module). Tracking: YesEach unsecured state will be printed when the print option is enabled. NoThe first unsecured state will be printed when the print option is enabled (restorals will not print until reset at Central Station - short condition only). Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: AXXP4
MM = CM
Group Interface: A: CM programming: Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Type ID: CMXC Control-By-Event: (Zaj*) Custom Label: Security Group Output Signal Silence: No Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified). Annunciator: No (Not required). B: MM programming: Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Type ID: SARM Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Tracking: YesResults in required a c knowledgment at Central Station for every unsecured state. Restoral is automatic. NoResults in required acknowledgment at Central Station for first unsecured state only (until reset at Central Station - short condition only). Annunciator: No (Not required).
Zone Programming
1. Zone Boundary: Must be less than Zad* and greater than or equal to Zac*. 2. Zone to Which All Instant Security Modules Are Mapped Zone: Zaa* Type ID: FZON Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Instant Group Annunciator: No 3. Zone Activated Upon Arming System Zone: Zab* Type ID: FZON Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Arming Zone Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: AXXP2 4. Zone Activated When Entry/Exit Door Is Open Zone: Zac* Type ID: FZON Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Tenant A Entry/Exit Annunciator: No (Not required). 5. Zone Activated When Any Instant Module Is Violated and the System Is Armed Zone: Zad* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: AND(Zaa* Zab*) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required). 6. Zone Active for 30 Sec., 30 Sec. After Opening Entry/Exit Door (Not Dependent on Door Closure) Zone: Zae* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: SDEL(00.00.30 00.00.30 (Zac*)) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required). 7. Zone Active 1 Min. After Entry/Exit Door Is Opened and Left Open Zone: Zaf* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: DEL(00.01.00 (Zac*)) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required).
Security 15088:J 10/22/99
4-14
Programming Key for Figure 1.3-6 (Cont) Zone Programming (continued)

8. Zone Active 1.5 Min. After Arming System Zone: Zag* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: DEL(00.01.30 (Zab*)) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required). 10. Zone Active a Minimum of 30 Sec. if Entry/Exit Delay Is Violated (Entry/Exit Door Only) When System Is Armed Zone: Zai* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.00.30 (Zah*))) 9. Zone Providing 30 Sec. Entry/Exit Delay (EnCustom Label: Installer Specified. try/Exit Door Only) When System Is Armed Annunciator: No (Not required). Zone: Zah* Type ID: RZON 11. Zone Active at Least 30 Sec. for Any Security Control-By-Event: Breach While System Is Armed OR(AND(Zab* Zag* Zae*) AND(Zab* Zaf*)) Zone: Zaj* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: OR(Zad* Zah* Zai*) causes Zone causes Zone Zah* to Zah* to activate Custom Label: Installer Specified. activate if entry/exit if entry/exit door time is exceeded. Annunciator: No (Not required).
is left open.
Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required).
Notification Appliance with a Control Module When using an optional control module for Notification Appliances intended to indicate a security violation, this control module may be programmed with the following Control-By-Event equation: AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.15.00 (Zaj*))) resulting in 15 minutes of Notification Appliance activation after a security violation. *Zaa through Zaj are each unique installer-specified zone numbers. Zaa is the lowest specified zone number (highest priority) and Zaj is the highest specified zone number (lowest priority). Example: Zaa Z5 Zab Z12
Forward Zones
Zac Z22
Zad Z180
Zae Z188
Zaf Z199
Zag Z200
Zah Z210
Zai Z211
Zaj Z212
Reverse Zones
Zone Boundary greater than or equal to Z22 and less than Z180.
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-15
1.3.1 CONNECTING
AN RKS-S REMOTE KEYSWITCH The RKS-S Remote Keyswitch arms and disarms the system. It can be mounted in a UL listed single-gang electrical box. Both the MMX-1/MMX-101 (as shown below) or other monitor module (see Table 1.1-1 for module options) and RKS-S must be mounted within the protected area. Figures 1.3-7 and 1.3-8, respectively, depict the connection of an MMX-101 or an MMX-1 module to the RKS-S.
WARNING! XP Transponder circuits (XPP-1, XPM-8, XPC-8, XPR-8, XPM-8L) are not suitable for security applications.
RKS-8 front
Yellow (-) MMX-101
RKS-8 rear Signaling (+) Line (-) Circuit
Purple (+) Red Black
Wire an R-47K End-of-Line Resistor into the circuit
Figure 1.3-7 Connecting an MMX-101 Module to the RKS-S

Signaling Line Circuit Out RKS-8 rear Signaling Line Circuit In
MMX-1 Wire an R-47K End-of-Line Resistor into the circuit
Figure 1.3-8 Connecting an MMX-1 Module to the RKS-S
4-16
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-9. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for monitor and control module options. One AM2020/AFP1010 Control Panel Multiple Security Supervisory Circuits Reporting to Central Station as a Single Area Multiple Protected Premises, each with System Arm/Disarm Capability and Central Station Ringback Signal The minimum security equipment required is as follows: Multiple MM Monitor Modules per Protected Area One Group Interface per Grouped Area Contact Switch for Each Entry/Exit Door RKS-S Keyswitch MM Monitor Modules ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator for Each Entry/Exit Door Security Devices Key
TENANT A
Motion Detector Contact Switch Contact Switch w/MM

MM CM
RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/MM MM Security Area Monitor ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator MM CM Group Interface * * Group Interface Shaded Area Indicates Second Tenant Pull Station Smoke Detector must be physically located in either the protected premises or the Central Station
MM CM
TENANT B Figure 1.3-9 Multiple Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay Zone Programming Notes for Figure 1.3-9
MM Security Access Monitor Provide a unique annunciator point for each Security Access Monitor installed. Notification Appliance w/CM Module When using an optional control module for Notification Appliances intended to indicate a security violation, the control module intended for Tenant A may be programmed with the following Control-By-Event equation: AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.15.00 (Zaj*))) and Tenant B may be programmed with the following Control-By-Event equation: AND(Zbb* SDEL(00.00.00 00.15.00 (Zbj*))) resulting in 15 minutes of Notification Appliance activation after a security violation. Program Tenant A using zone numbers Zaa through Zaj as in Figure 1-6. Program Tenant B as in Figure 1-6, but substitute Zba through Zbj for Zaa through Zaj respectively. *Zaa through Zaj are each unique installer-specified zone numbers. Zaa is the lowest specified zone number (highest priority) and Zaj is the highest specified zone number (lowest priority). Example: Zaa Z5 Zba Z6 Zab Z12 Zbb Z7 Zac Z22 Zbc Z21
Zad Z180 Zbd Z100
Zae Z188 Zbe Z102
Zaf Z199 Zbf Z108
Zag Z200 Zbg Z187
Zah Z210 Zbh Z191
Zai Z211 Zbi Z193
Zaj Z212 Zbj Z215
Security 15088:J
Forward Zones
Reverse Zones
Area7.cdr
10/22/99
4-17
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-10. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for monitor and control module options. One AM2020/AFP1010 Protected Premises Unit (PPU) One AM2020/AFP1010 Central Station Unit One Security Supervisory Protected Area One Protected Premises System Arm/Disarm Capability with Central Station Ringback Signal The minimum security equipment required is as follows: SIB-2048A or SIB-NET Interface NIB-96 Network Interface STS-1 Security Tamper Switch Monitor Modules RKS-S Remote Keyswitch ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator for Entry or Exit Door Control Module RA400Z Remote Annunciator Security Devices One Group Interface
4-18
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
Key
TENANT A
Contact Switch w/MM RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/MM MM Security Area Monitor ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator * Group Interface must be physically located in MM CM Group Interface * either the protected premises or the Central Station NIB-96 NIB-96 Network Interface Board
MM CM
* **
CM Control Module for Ringback (See Figure 1.3-11)** RA400Z Remote Annunciator (see Figure 1.3-11)** STS-1 Tamper Switch with Monitor Module (See Fig 1.3-13) Pull Station
Area9.cdr
**
Signaling Line Circuit from Central Station AM2020/AFP1010 Central Station
CM
**Must be physically located in the protected

premises and the RA400Z must be visible from outside the protected area to provide visible indication that the central station has received the arming signal from the PPU.
AM2020/AFP1010 PPU
NIB-96
Smoke Detector
See Central Station/PPU Wiring Diagram below
Central Station/Protected Premises Unit Wiring
LIB-200, LIB-200A, or LIB-400 in Central Station SIB-2048A or SIB-NET Installed in an AM2020/AFP1010 Protected Premises Unit NIB-96 Installed in an ICA-4 or ICA-4L in an AM2020/AFP1010 Protected Premises Unit. For further information refer to Chapter Two, Programming of this manual and the Network Interface Board (NIB-96) manual.
LIB-200, LIB-200A, or LIB-400 Installed in an AM2020/AFP1010 Protected Premises Unit
Figure 1.3-10 Single Tenant Security System with Ringback
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-19
The following programming key relates to Figure 1.3-10: Contact Switch w/Monitor Module: Address: LXXMYY (Installer Specified). Type ID: SACM Control-By-Event: (Zac*) Custom Label: Entry/Exit Door Tracking: Yes Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: ArrP3 RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/Monitor Module: Address: LXXMYY (Installer Specified). Type ID: NOA Control-By-Event: (Zab*) Custom Label: Arming Switch Tracking: Yes Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: AssPl** Security Access Monitor Module: Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Type ID: SACM Control-By-Event: (Zaa*) Custom Label: Installer Option (describe specific location of module). Tracking: Yes - Each unsecured state and restoral will be printed on the PPU printer when the print option is enabled. No - The first unsecured state will be printed on the PPU printer when the print option is enabled (restorals will not print on the PPU printer until the PPU is reset locally or at the Central Station - short condition only). Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: ArrP4
4-20
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
Figure 1.3-10 Programming Key (continued): ACM-16AT/-32A Annunciator: Annun. Pt. Type ID ArrP1 AZON ArrP2 AZON ArrP3 AMON ArrP4 AMON ArrP5 AZON Group Interface: A: CM programming Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Type ID: CMXC Control-By-Event: (Zaj*) Custom Label: Security Group Output Signal Silence: No Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified). Annunciator: No (Not required). B: MM programming: Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Type ID: SARM Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Tracking: Yes - Results in required acknowledgment at the Protected Premises Unit for every unsecured state when the system is armed as long as the event is present. Restoral at the Protected Premises Unit is automatic. No - Results in required acknowledgment at the Protected Premises Unit for first unsecured state only (system armed). The system must be manually reset at the Protected Premises Unit or at the Central Station - short condition only. Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: AssPp** STS-1 Tamper Switch w/MM Module: Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Type ID: SEQM - Results in no indication at Protected Premises Unit display. Indication at Central Station only. SSYM - When activated, results in indication at PPU display and at Central Station. Control-By-Event: (Zaa* Zal*) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Tracking: Yes Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: AssPn**
= CM MM = CM
CM Control Module for Ringback: Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Type ID: CMXC Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Signal Silence: Yes Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified). Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: AssPm**
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-21
Figure 1.3-10 Programming Key (continued):
NIB-96
NIB-96 Network Interface Board
Protected Premises Unit (Slave)

Annunciator Point: AssP1 Type ID: AAST The first point of the NIB-96 interface reports any trouble condition in the Protected Premises to the Central Station. If the installer fails to program the Protected Premises Unit properly, leaving fire alarm initiation devices without a corresponding NIB point, an alarm from such an initiating device will cause the first NIB point to indicate a default fire alarm condition at the Central Station.
Point
1
Central Station (Master)

Monitor Module Point Address: LXXMYY Type ID: MON Control-By-Event: (Installer Specified) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Tracking: Yes - Default fire alarm conditions will restore automatically at the Central Station after reset at the Protected Premises. No - Default fire alarm conditions will latch in the Central Station until reset at the Central Station and at the Protected Premises if the NIB has been configured to prevent reset from the Central Station - short condition only. Annunciator: Optional. Assign no device to this corresponding point.
Annunciator Point: AssP2 Type ID: AMON Annunciator Point: AssP3 Type ID: ARES - Select the ARES Type ID if reset of the Protected Premises Unit is to be permitted at the Central Station. AMON - Select the AMON Type ID if reset of the Protected Premises Unit is not to be permitted at the Central Station.
Control Module Point Address: LXXMYY Type ID: CON Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Signal Silence: Yes Walk Test: No Annunciator: No
Annunciator Point: AssP4 Type ID: AMON
Assign no device to this corresponding point.
4-22
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
Figure 1.3-10 Programming Key (continued): NIB-96 NIB-96 Network Interface Board (continued)

Arming Switch Annunciator Point: AssPl** Type ID: AMON
Point
l**

Monitor Module Point (PPU Arming Switch) Address: LXXMYY Type ID: SACM Control-By-Event: (Zc) Unique Zone Number Custom Label: Installer Specified. Tracking: Yes Walk Test: No Annunciator: Yes - Provides visual indication of Protected Premises Arm/Disarm status at the Central Station. No - does not provide visual indication of Protected Premises Arm/Disarm status. Annunciator Point: AXXPYY (if used).
Central Station RIngback Annunciator Point: AssPm** Type ID: ACON
m**
Control Module Point (Ringback) Address: LXXMYY Type ID: CMXS Control-By-Event: (Zc) (Same as Point I) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Signal Silence: No Walk Test: No Annunciator: No (Not required). Monitor Module Point (PPU Tamper Switch) Address: LXXMYY Type ID: SSYM Control-By-Event: (Installer Specified) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Tracking: Yes - Security tamper conditions will restore automatically at the Central Station after restoral at the Protected Premises. No - Security tamper conditions will latch in the Central Station until reset at the Central Station - short condition only. Annunciator: No (Not required).
Tamper Switch Annunciator Point: AssPn** Type ID: AMON
n**
**Indicates installer-specified NIB point.
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-23
Figure 1.3-10 Programming Key (continued): NIB-96 NIB-96 Network Interface Board (continued)

Group Interface MM Annunciator Point: AssPp** Type ID: AMON
Point
p**

Monitor Module Point (PPU Security Alarm Input) Address: LXXMYY Type ID: SARM Control-By-Event: (Installer Specified) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Tracking: Yes - Security alarm conditions will restore automatically at the Central Station after restoral at the Protected Premises. No - Security alarm conditions will latch in the Central Station until reset at the Central Station and the Protected Premises Unit if the NIB-96 has been configured to prevent reset from the Central Station - short condition only. Annunciator: No (Not required).
**Indicates installer-specified NIB point.
PPU Zone Programming

1. Zone Boundary: Must be less than Zad* and greater than or equal to Zac*. 2. Zone to Which All Instant Security Modules Are Mapped Zone: Zaa* Type ID: FZON Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Instant Group Annunciator: No (Not Required). 3. Zone Activated Upon Arming System Zone: Zab* Type ID: FZON Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Arming Zone Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: ArrP1 4. Zone Activated When Entry/Exit Door Is Open Zone: Zac* Type ID: FZON Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Tenant A Entry/Exit Annunciator: No (Not required).
4-24
5. Zone Activated When Any Instant Module Is Violated and the System Is Armed Zone: Zad* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: AND(Zaa* Zab*) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required). 6. Zone Active for 30 Sec., 30 Sec. After Opening Entry/Exit Door (Not Dependent on Door Closure) Zone: Zae* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: SDEL(00.00.30 00.00.30 (Zac*)) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required). 7. Zone Active 1 Min. After Entry/Exit Door Is Opened and Left Open Zone: Zaf* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: DEL(00.01.00 (Zac*)) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required).
Security 15088:J 10/22/99
Figure 1.3-10 Programming Key (continued): 8. Zone Active 1.5 Min. After Arming System Zone: Zag* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: DEL(00.01.30 (Zab*)) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required). 10. Zone Active for a Minimum of 30 Sec. if Entry/ Exit Delay Is Violated (Entry/Exit Door Only) When System Is Armed Zone: Zai* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.00.30 (Zah*))) 9. Zone Providing 30 Sec. Entry/Exit Delay (EnCustom Label: Installer Specified. try/Exit Door Only) When System Is Armed Annunciator: No (Not Required). Zone: Zah* Type ID: RZON 11. Zone Active at Least 30 Sec. for Any Security Breach While System Is Armed Control-By-Event: Zone: Zaj* OR(AND(Zab* Zag* Zae*) AND(Zab* Zaf*)) Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: OR(Zad* Zah* Zai*) causes Zone causes Zone Zah* to Custom Label: Installer Specified. Zah* to activate activate if entry/exit if entry/exit door Annunciator: No (Not required). time is exceeded.
is left open.
Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: No (Not required).
12. Zone which remains Active until Reset when security violation occurs and the System is Armed. Zone: Zak* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: SDEL(00.00.00 (Zaj*)) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: ArrP2 13. Zone Active when Tamper Switch Is Active Zone: Zal* Type ID: RZON Control-By-Event: ( ) Custom Label: Installer Specified. Annunciator: Yes Annunciator Point: ArrP5
Notification Appliance w/CM Control Module When using an optional Control Module for Notification Appliances intended to indicate a security violation, this CM may be programmed with the following Control-By-Event equation: AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.15.00 (Zaj*))) resulting in 15 minutes of Notification Appliance activation after a security violation. *Zaa through Zal are each unique installer-specified zone numbers. Zaa is the lowest specified zone number (highest priority) and Zal is the highest specified zone number (lowest priority). Example: Zaa Z5 Zab Z12
Forward Zones
Zac Z22
Zad Z180
Zae Z188
Zaf Z199
Zag Z200
Zah Z210
Zai Z211
Zaj Z212
Zak Z216
Zal Z218
Reverse Zones
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-25
= CM The CMX control module for ringback is illustrated in Figure 1.3-11.

PPU Signaling Line Circuit Out
CMX-1 or CMX-2
PPU Signaling Line Circuit In
Note: Tabs on CMX must be broken when used as a Form-C relay.
Listed 24 VDC Power Supply
+ -
Warning: Observe proper polarity or device will be damaged.
RA400Z
Figure 1.3-11 CMX Control Module for Ringback

An STS-1 Security Tamper Switch installation is illustrated in Figure 1.3-12 through 1.3-14.
Figure 1.3-12 Installing an STS-1 Security Tamper Switch

4-26
Security 15088:J 10/22/99
Figure 1.3-13 Connecting an STS-1 Switch to an MMX-101 Monitor Module
Figure 1.3-14 Connecting an STS-1 Switch to an MMX-1 Monitor Module
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-27
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-15. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for monitor and control module options. Multiple AM2020/AFP1010 PPUs One AM2020/AFP1010 Central Station Unit Multiple Supervisory Security Circuits Reporting to Central Station as Single Area Multiple Protected Premises with System Arm/Disarm Capability and Central Station Ringback Signal The minimum security equipment required is as follows: Each AM2020/AFP1010 PPU must be equipped with a SIB-2048A or SIB-NET Interface NIB-96 Network Interface STS-1 Security Tamper Switch MM Monitor Modules for Protected Area ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator for Each Entry and Exit Door RKS-S Remote Keyswitch Security Devices One Group Interface Key
Motion Detector Contact Switch Contact Switch w/MM
TENANT A
RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/MM MM Security Area Monitor ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator MM CM Group Interface * NIB-96 Network Interface Board CM Control Module for Ringback (See Fig. 1.3-11)

MM CM
NIB-96
CM
** ** RA400Z Remote Annunciator (See Fig. 1.3-12)

STS-1 Tamper Switch w/MM Module Shaded Area Indicates Second Tenant
PPUSLC
PPUSLC
TENANT B
MM CM
*
CM
AM2020/AFP1010 PPU NIB-96
1 Program Tenant A using zone numbers Zaa through Zal. 2 Program Tenant B as shown, but substitute Zba through Zbl for Zaa through Zal, respectively.
** **
Signaling LIne Circuit from Central Station
* Group Interface must be physically located in

either the protected premises or the Central Station
** Must be physically located in the Protected

Premises and the RA400Z must be visible indication that the central station has received the Arming Signal from the PPU
Figure 1.3-15 Multiple Tenant Security System with Ringback
4-28
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
Area10.cdr
** **
CM
Pull Station Smoke Detector
AM2020/AFP1010 PPU NIB-96
Refer to Figure 1.3-16 for the wiring of security notification appliances (supplementary use only in UL listed systems). See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for monitor and control module options.
Key TENANT A
Motion Detector Contact Switch Contact Switch w/MM RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/MM Notification Appliance w/CM MM Security Area Monitor ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator MM CM Group Interface* Pull Station MM CM
* Group Interface must be

physically located in either the protected premises or the Central Station
*
SLC
Smoke Detector
SLC Loop
CMX-1 or CMX-2
47K End-of-Line Resistor (A2143-00) +24 VDC listed Security Notification Appliance
CMX-1 or CMX-2
(activated polarity shown) Configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit (do not break tabs) and programmed in the Protected Premises Unit.
NOTE The CMX may also control audio speakers in an audio application. In such an installation, fire alarm conditions must have priority over security conditions in the AMG-1 (refer to the Voice Alarm Multiplex Manual).
- +
Listed 24 VDC Power Supply.
Figure 1.3-16 System Requirements
Area8.cdr
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
4-29
NOTES...
4-30
Security 15088:J
10/22/99
AM2020 AFP1010
APPENDICES
Appendices
15088:J
10/22/99
A-1
A-2
Appendices
15088:J
10/22/99
APPENDIX A CIRCUIT/DEVICE RATINGS

GENERAL
Appendix A outlines the various circuits and devices that can be employed with the AM2020/AFP1010.
SECTION A.1 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Each of the various types of circuits within an AM2020/AFP1010 Fire Alarm Control System has a specific type of wire that must be used in order to ensure proper operation. In addition, the wire gauge of a particular circuit is contingent on the length of that circuit. To determine the specific wiring requirements for each circuit, refer to Table A-1. NOTES If the SLC Loop is to be run in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits, the risk of encountering problems can be greatly reduced by using the LIB-200A or LIB-400 or exclusively employing electronic sounders instead of more electronically noisy notification appliances such as electromechanical bells or horns. In order to comply with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations on electrical energy radiation when using the LIB-200, any wire entering or exiting the AM2020/AFP1010 cabinet that is not in conduit must be of the twisted-shielded type. For termination of the LIB-200 SLC Loop shield, refer to the Installation section of the manual originally supplied with the LIB-200.
Circuit Type
LIB-200 SLC loop
Circuit Functions
Wire Requirements
Distance (feet/meters)
10,000/3048 8,000/2438 4,875/1485.9 3,225/982.98 12,500/3810 9,500/2895.6 6,000/1828.8 3,700/1127.76 6,000/1828.8 6,000/1828.8 6,000/1828.8 4,000/1219.2
Typical Wire Type

Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL (12 AWG/3.25 mm2) Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2) Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2) Belden 9574, West Penn 975 (18 AWG/0.75 mm2) Belden 9582, Belden 9580, Belden 9572, Belden 9571, West Penn 998 (12 AWG/3.25 mm2) West Penn 994 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2) West Penn 990 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2) West Penn 980 (18 AWG/0.75 mm2)
Twisted-shielded pair, 12 to 18 AWG Connects to Intelligent (3.25 to 0.75 mm). 40 ohms max Detectors and per length of Style 6 and 7 loops. 40 Addressable Modules, ohms per branch max for Style 4 and to XP Transponders loops. Connects to Intelligent Twisted unshielded pair, 12 to 18 AWG (3.25 to 0.75 mm). 50 ohms Detectors and Addressable Modules, max per length of Style 6 and 7 to XP Transponders, loops. 50 ohms per branch max for and XP5 Transponders Style 4 loops Connects to LCD-80, AMG-1 and to Annunciator Control System Modules Twisted-shielded pair with a characteristic impedance of approximately 120 ohms. 18 AWG (0.75 mm) minimum.
LIB-200A or LIB-400 SLC loop
EIA-485
Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL (12 AWG/3.25 mm2) Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2) Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2) Belden 9574, West Penn 975 (18 AWG/0.75 mm2) Belden 9583, West Penn 999 Belden B5020FL (12 AWG/3.25 mm2) Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2) Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2) Belden 9574, West Penn 975 (18 AWG/0.75 mm2) Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL (12 AWG/3.25 mm2) Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2) Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2) Belden 9574, West Penn 975 (18 AWG/0.75 mm2) Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL (12 AWG/3.25 mm2) Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2) Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2) Belden 9574, West Penn 975 (18 AWG/0.75 mm2) Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL (12 AWG/3.25 mm2) Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2) Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2) Belden 9574, West Penn 975 (18 AWG/0.75 mm2) Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL (12 AWG/3.25 mm2) Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2) Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2) Belden 9574, West Penn 975 (18 AWG/0.75 mm2)
EIA-232
Connects to CRTs and Twisted-shielded pair. remote printers 18 AWG (0.75 mm) minimum.
See EIA-232D Standard
MMX XPM-8
12 to 18 AWG(3.25 to 0.75 mm). Maximum loop wire resistance is 20 Initiating Device Circuit ohms (MMX-1, MMX-101) or 100 ohms (XPM-8). 12 to 18 AWG (3.25 to 0.75 mm). MPS-24A: At alarm current level, no more than a 1.2 volt drop at the end of the circuit.
5,000/1524 4,000/1219.2 2,438/743.1 1,613/491.64 Installer Calculations Required
CMX XPC-8
Notification Appliance Circuit
Power Runs
12 to 18 AWG (3.25 to 0.75 mm). To CMXs, XPC-8s, and Size wire so that no more than 1.2 XP5-Cs volt drop across wire run from supply source to end of any branch. 12 to 18 AWG (3.25 to 0.75 mm). Size wire so that no more than 2.4 volts drop across wire run from supply source to end of any branch.
Installer Calculations Required
Power Runs
To annunciators
Installer Calculations Required
Table A-1 Wiring Selection Chart

Appendices 15088:J 10/22/99
A-3
Type of Circuit
Devices/Ratings MPS-24A Main Power Supply
Circuit Ratings 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.8 amps
Connections TB1: Term. 2 + 3 (Ground) Term 4 + 5 (Neutral) Term 6 + 7 (Hot) TB1: Term. 2 (Ground) Term 3 (Neutral) Term 4 (Hot) TB1: Term.1 (Hot) Term. 2 (Neutral) Term. 3 (Ground) Plug P2: Term. 1 + 8 (Ground) Term 3 + 4 (Neutral) Term 5 + 6 (Hot) Plug P2: Term. 1 + 8 (Ground) Term 5 + 6 (Neutral) Term3 +4 (Hot) TB1: Term. 2 + 3 (Ground) Term 4 + 5 (Neutral) Term 6 + 7 (Hot) TB1: Term. 2 (Ground) Term 3 (Neutral) Term 4 (Hot) TB1: Term.1 (Hot) Term. 2 (Neutral) Term. 3 (Ground) Plug P2: Term. 1 + 8 (Ground) Term 3 + 4 (Neutral) Term 5 + 6 (Hot) Plug P2: Term. 1 + 8 (Ground) Term 5 + 6 (Neutral) Term3 +4 (Hot) TB2: Term. 1 (+), Term 2 (-)
Main Supply Circuit MPS-24B Main Power Supply A dedicated branch of the AC service that supplies primary AC power to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.8 amps
APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply
120 VAC, 60 Hz, 2.5 amps
AA-30 Audio Amplifier
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.0 amps
AA-100/AA-120 Audio Amplifier
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.85 amps
MPS-24AE Main Power Supply
220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.9 amps
Main Supply Circuit A dedicated branch of the AC service that supplies primary AC power to the Fire Alarm Control Panel
MPS-24BE Main Power Supply
220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.9 amps
240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.2 amps
AA-30E Audio Amplifier
220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 amps
AA-100E/AA-120E Audio Amplifier Battery Charger Circuit
220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.9 amps
MPS-24A and MPS-24E Main Power Supplies MPS-24B and MPS-24BE Main Power Supplies CHG-120 Battery Charger
27.6 VDC. Float type battery charger 2.0A Max. Supervised and power-limited. 27.6 VDC. Float type battery charger (750 mA max). Supervised and power-limited. 27.6 VDC. Float type battery charger (4.5 amps max). Supervised and power-limited 3.0 amps max. draw in alarm. 25.0 amp max. screw terminal contact rating. Supervised. Battery leads are not powerlimited. 7.3 amps max. draw in alarm. 25.0 amp max. screw terminal contact rating. Supervised. Battery leads are not powerlimited. 6.0 amp max. draw in alarm. Battery leads are not powerlimited. 6.0 amps max. draw in alarm. 25.0 amp max. screw terminal contact rating. Supervised. Battery leads are not powerlimited. 2.9 amps max. draw in alarm. 25.0 amp max. screw terminal contact rating. Supervised. Battery leads are not powerlimited. 24 VDC (3.0 amps max.) Power-limited and supervised.
Charges and maintains the secondary supply during non-fire alarm conditions.
TB2: Term. 5 (+), Term 6 (-) TB2: Term. 5 (-), Term. 6 (+)
AA-30 or AA-30E Audio Amplifier Battery Discharge Circuit or Secondary Power Input
Plug P1: Term. 1 (+), Term 4 (-)
AA-100/AA-120 or AA-100E/AA-120E Audio Amplifier
Plug P1: Term. 3 + 4 (+), Term 1 + 2 (-) TB3-1 (+) TB3-2 (-)
Supplies power to the Fire Alarm Control Panel during loss of primary AC power.
MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply MPS-24B or MPS-24BE Main Power Supply MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply: use with any UL listed 24 VDC fire alarm Notification Appliance.
TB2: Term. 1 (+), Term 2 (-)
TB2: Term. 5 (+), Term 6 (-)
Notification Appliance Power
TB3: Term. 3 (+), Term 4 (-)
Provides power for Notification MPS-24B or MPS-24BE Main Power Appliance Circuits and remote Supply: use with any UL listed 24 VDC signaling devices. fire alarm Notification Appliances. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document. APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply
24 VDC (2.0 amps max. of regulated current available in alarm only) Power-limited and supervised with a UL listed relay. 24 VDC 3.0 amps max. per circuit (6.0 amps total) in alarm only. Power-limited and supervised with a UL listed relay. 24 VDC (200 mV ripple). 1.0 amps max. (draws from the total of 3.0 amps of MPS-24A regulated current available in standby or 6.0 amps available in alarm). Power-limited and supervised with an A77-716 relay. 24 VDC (200 mV ripple). 2.0 amps max. (draws from the total of 3.0 amps of MPS-24A regulated current available in standby or 6.0 amps available in alarm). Power-limited and supervised with an A77-716 relay. Note: Optional jumper selectable. 24 VDC (200 mV ripple). 200 mA max. (draws from the total of 750 mA of regulated current available in standby and alarm. Power-limited and supervised with a UL listed relay.
TB2: Term. 3 (+), Term 4 (-)
TB2: Output Circuit 1, 1+, 2Output Circuit 2, 3+,4-
TB3: Term. 1 (+), Term 2 (-)
MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply External Resettable Power
TB3: Term. 3 (+), Term 4 (-)
MPS-24B or MPS-24BE Main Power Supply
TB2: Term. 1 (+), Term 2 (-)
Table A-2 Circuit Ratings/Connections
A-4
Appendices
15088:J
10/22/99
Table A-2 (Continued)

Type of Circuit Devices/Ratings Circuit Ratings Connections CMX Control Module or XP5-C Transponder Module with an MBT- Local Energy Municipal Box connection. Supervised and power1 Municipal Box Trip device and limited. (3.65 VDC nominal). (10 ohms max. loop resistance. Trip an A77-716 power supervision current = 250 mA. relay. XP Transponder XPC-8 module with an MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip device. Local Energy Municipal Box connection. Supervised and powerlimited. (3.65 VDC nominal). 10 ohms max. loop resistance. Trip current = 250 mA. Operating voltage supplied dependent on the signal power source employed. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part #47K (N-ELR) in Canada. NFPA Style Y or Style Z field wiring. Max Load is 2 amps Resistive @ 24 VDC. Most Notification Appliances are resistive. Certain electromechanical devices exhibit inductive loading characteristics. For these types of devices, derate the outputs to 1 amp @ 30 VDC (0.6pf). Size wiring for no more than 1.2 volt drop at last device on circuit. Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the power source. Operating voltage supplied dependent on the signal power source employed. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part #47K (N-ELR) in Canada. NFPA Style Y field wiring. Total current to all notification applicances cannot exceed 3A(non-coded DC), 2A (DC). Most Notification Appliances are resistive. Certain electromechanical devices exhibit inductive loading characteristics. For these types of devices, derate the outputs to 1 A, 24 VDC, inductive (L/R=2 ms) coded. 0.5A, 30 VDC, inductive (L/R=5 ms) coded. Size wiring for no more than 1.2 volt drop at last device on circuit. Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the signaling power source. Operating voltage supplied dependent on the signal power source employed. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part #47K (N-ELR) in Canada. NFPA Style Y and Style Z field wiring. Max Load is 2 amps Resistive @ 24 VDC. Most Notification Appliances are resistive. Certain electromechanical devices exhibit inductive loading characteristics. For these types of devices, derate the outputs to 1 amp @ 30 VDC (0.6pf). Size wiring for no more than 1.2 volt drop at last device on circuit. Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the power source.
Municipal Box Circuit
Refer to Supervising an Uninterruptable Power Supply in the AM2020/AFP1010 Manual.
Refer to Appendix A of the XP Series Transponder Manual.
CMX Control Module fed from an MPS-24A/MPS-24AE, MPS24B/MPS-24BE, APS-6R or other 24 VDC power supplies listed for Fire Protective Signaling.
NFPA Style Y Activated Polarity CMX Terminal 6 (+), 7 (-). NFPA Style Z Activated Polarity CMX Terminals 6, 9 (+); 7,8 (-).
24 VDC Notification Appliance Circuit A circuit or path directly connected to a 24 VDC notification appliance.
XP5-C Transponder Circuit fed from an MPS-24A/MPS-24AE, MPS-24B/MPS-24BE, APS-6R, or other 24 VDC listed power supply.
NFPA Style Y Activated Polarity (5 circuits on XP5-C) TB1-TB5: B-, B+
XP Transponder XPC-8 module fed from an MPS-24A/MPS-24AE, MPS-24B/MPS-24BE, APS-6R or other 24VDC listed power supply.
NFPA Style Y Activated Polarity (8 zones on XPC-8 P2): Term.1 (+),2(-); 3(+), 4(-); 5(+), 6(-); 7(+), 8(-); 9(+),10(-); 11(+),12(-); 13(+), 14 (-); 15(+), 16(-). NFPA Style Z Activated Polarity (4 zones on XPC-8 P2): Term. 1,3(+), 2,4 (-); 5,7 (+), 6,8 (-), 9,11 (+), 10,12 (-); 13,15 (+), 14,16 (-).
CMX-1 Control Module fed from an AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA100E or AA-120/AA-120E.
Operating voltage dependent on amplifier employed. Max of 40 mA total speaker leakage current due to coupling capacitors. 48 watts max @ 25 VRMS max. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part # A2143-20 (N-ELR NFPA Style Y supervised polarity CMX in Canada). Max. line resistance dependent upon wattage required at Terminals 7(+), 6(-). each speaker. NFPA Style Y field wiring. Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the signaling power source. Operating voltage dependent on amplifier employed. 43.75 watts max., up to 70.7 VRMS. Max of 40 uA total speaker leakage current due to coupling capacitors. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part # A2143-00 (NELR in Canada). Max. line resistance dependent upon wattage required at each speaker. NFPA Style Y and Z field wiring. Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the signaling power source. NFPA Style Y supervised polarity: CMX Terminals 7 (+), 6(-). NFPA Style Z supervised polarity: CMX Terminals 7,8 (+); 6,9 (-). NFPA Style Y supervised polarity (8 zones on XPC-8 P2):Term.1(-), 2(+); 3(-), 4(+);5(),6(+); 7(-), 8(+); 9(-), 10(+); 11(-), 12(+); 13(-), 14(+); 15 (-), 16(+). NFPA Style Z supervised polarity (4 zones on XPC-8 P2): Term. 1,3 (-),2,4,(+); 5,7 (),6,8(+); 9,11 (-), 10,12 (+);13,15 (-), 14,16 (+). NFPA Style Y supervised polarity (5 circuits on XP5-C) TB1 - TB5; B-, B+ AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-100E and AA120/AA-120E Connector P6 to XP5-C (TB1-TB5), XPC-8 Connector P3: AA30/AA-30E Connector P6 (or P8.5 (-) and P8.6(+)) to CMX Term 3(-) and 4(+). Wire optional supervisory return loop from CMX Term 3(-) and 4(-) to AA-30/AA-30E Connector P7 or P8.2(-), P8.3(+) or AA120/AA-120E P8.2(-),P8.3(+). AA100/AA-100E: connnect 25 VRMS output P7.3 and P7.4 to a transformer input P7.1 and P7.2 to obtain 70.7 VRMS output at P8.7 and P8.8. Connection not supervised.
Speaker Notification Appliance Circuits
CMX-2 Control Module fed from an audio amplifier. Model A214320 coupling capacitor (10uA leakage max.) is required for NFPA Style Z connection. Refer to the CMX-2 installation instructions for more details.
XP Transponder XPC-8 module fed from an audio amplifier.
Operating voltage dependent on amplifier employed. 50 watts max @ 25 Vrms, 70 watts@ 70.7 Vrms max. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part # R47K (N-ELR in Canada). Max line resistance dependent upon wattage required at each speaker. NFPA Style Y or Style Z field wiring. Supervised. Power-limiting is a function of the signal source.
XP5-C Transponder circuit fed from an audio amplifier.
Operating voltage dependent on amplifier employed. 75 watts max @ 25 Volts, 64 watts max @ 70.7 Vrms max. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part # R-47K (N-ELR in Canada). Max line resistance dependent upon wattage required at each speaker. NFPA Style Y field wiring. Supervised. Power-limiting is a function of the signal source.
Speaker Power (High-level Audio)
AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-100E or AA-120/AA-120E Audio Amplifier feeding signal to a CMX Control Module, an XP Transponder XPC-8 Module, or an XP5-C transponder circuit. Use only UL listed speakers rated for a minimum 25 VRMS (30 watts max with AA-30/AA-30E, 120 watts max with AA-120/AA120E) or 70.7 VRMS min. when using the AA100/AA-100E. (100 watts max.).
25 Vrms audio amplifier output (70.7 Vrms for AA-100/AA-100E). AA-30/AA-30E: 30 watts max. AA-120/AA-120E: 120 watts max. AA-100/AA-100E 100 watts max. Frequency response: 800 Hz to 2800 Hz. Two wire high level audio circuit is not supervised. Four-wire high level audio circuit is supervised. AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-100E and AA-120/AA-120E are power-limited. Maximum wiring distance limited by wattage required at each speaker.
Appendices
15088:J
10/22/99
A-5

Type of Circuit Devices/Ratings Circuit Ratings Connections FFT-7/FFT-7S Connector P3 Term. 3(+) and 2 (-): to XPC-8 Connector P3.2 (+), P3.1(-), and/or P4.2 (+) P4.1 (-), P5.2 (+) P5.1(-), P6.2 (+) P6.1(-), P7.2(+) P7.1(-), P8.2 (+) P8.1(-), P9.2(+) P9.1(-), P10.2(+) P10.1(-); to XP5-C,TB1-TB5, EXT-, EXT+ or J1A-J5A. Optional four-wire redundant return to FFT-7/FFT-7S Connector P3 Term. 6(+) and 5(-) to XPC-8 Connector P10; to XP5-C,TB1-TB5, EXT-, EXT+ or J1A-J5A. Two-wire circuits (8 telephone circuits on XPC-8 P2): Term 1 (-), 2 (+); 3(-), 4 (+); 5 (-), 6 (+), 7 (-), 8 (+); 9(-), 10 (+); 11 (-), 12 (+); 13 (-), 14 (+); 15 (-), 16 (+). Four-wire circuits (4 telephone circuits on XPC-8 P2): Term. 1,3 (-), 2,4 (+); 5,7 (-), 6,8 (+); 9,11 (-), 10,12 (+); 13,15 (-), 14,16 (+).
Common Telephone Riser (FFT to XPC or XP5-C)
24 VDC (nominal), 1-Vrms max. 800 Hz to 2800 Hz. Seven (7) telephone handsets active at one time max including Master FFT-7/FFT-7S Fire Fighter's Telephone. Supervised/power-limited. Two-wire circuit Telephone to an XP Transponder XPC- supervised via 27K ELR, Part # R-27K (N-ELR for Canada). Optional return loop for 4-wire circuit. Max wiring resistance 8 module or an XP5-C Transponder circuit. (including individual telephone zone to last handset) permitted is 40 ohms. 10,000 ft. (3048 m) max wiring distance at 12 AWG (3.25 mm2) to last handset.
Individual Telephone Notification Appliance Circuits (XPC to Telephone Jacks) Individual Telephone Notification Appliance Circuits (XP5-C to Telephone Jacks)
XP Transponder XPC-8 module fed from an FFT-7/FFT-7S: employs phone jacks APJ-1 and FPJ; Fireman's Handset FHS-1; Fireman's Handset Enclosures FHE-F and FHE-S.
No telephone jack maximum per circuit. Two-wire circuit supervised via a 47K ELR, Part # R-47K (N-ELR in Canada). No outboard ELR for four-wire supervised circuit. Max resistance due to wiring is 40 ohms from FFT-7 to termination of the telephone circuit. Power limitation is a function of the signal source employed. Telephone handset ring signal is provided with this module.
No telephone jack maximum per circuit. Two-wire circuit XP5-C Transponder circuit fed from an supervised via a 47K ELR, Part# R-47K (N-ELR in Canada). FFT-7/FFT-7S: employs phone jacks Max resistance due to wiring is 40 ohms from FFT-7 to Two-wire circuits (5 telephone circuits) on : APJ-1 and FPJ; Fireman's Handset termination of the telephone circuit. Power limitation is a function TB1-TB5, B-, B+ FHS-1; Fireman's Handset Enclosures of the signal source employed. Telephone handset ring signal is FHE-F and FHE-S. not provided with this module. NFPA Class B circuit, power-limited 3.5 VRMS max., 50 mA max.. Monitored for integrity at destination (listed amplifier). Maximum wiring distance 200 ft (61 m) at 18 to 12 AWG (0.75 to 3.25 mm2) gauge wire. Twisted and shielded wiring recommended when connecting to more than one amplifier. NFPA Class B circuit, power-limited 3.5 VRMS max., 50 mA max.. Monitored for integrity at destination (listed amplifier). Maximum wiring resistance from AMG or ACT-2 low-level source connected at input of RM-1/RM-1SA to farthest AA series amplifier at output of RM-1/RM1-SA is 40 ohms. Twisted and shielded wiring recommended when connecting output to more than one amplifier. ACT-2 pins 3,2, and 1 plug directly into P3.3, P3.2, and P3.1 respectively of an AA-30/AA-30E, or AA120/AA-120E. Additional AA series amplifiers feed from the first amplifier P3.6 (shield), P3.5, and P3.4 to additional amplifier P3.3, P3.2, and P3.1 respectively.
ACT-2 output to AA-30/AA-30E, AA100/AA-100E, or AA-120/AA-120E input.
RM-1/RM-1SA output to AA-30/AA30E, AA-100/AA-100E, or AA-120/AA120E input. Low level Audio Riser
RM-1/RM-1SA TB5 shield out, TB5 - out, and TB5 + out to AA series amplifier P3.3, P3.2, and P3.1 respectively or another RM-1/RM-1SA on TB4 shield in, - in, and + in respectively.
AMG-1/E output to AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-100E, AA-120/AA-120E, ACT-1 or RM-1/RM-1SA input
Power-limited/supervised, 40 ohm maximum resistance. 10,000 feet (3048 m) maximum distance at 12 AWG (3.25 mm2) gauge wire. Twisted and shielded wiring recommended. Connect shield to REF A audio source.
Internal two-wire: AMG-1 P5 to AA Series Amplifier P2. External two-wire: AMG-1 P4, Terminals 4 (-) and 5 (+) to AA Series Amplifier P3, Terminals 4 (-) and 5 (+). External four-wire connection: include return from AA-30 P8, Terminals 5 (-) and 6 (+) to AMG-1 P4, Terminals 1 (-) and 2 (+). Connect AMG-1 P4 terminals 4 (-) and 5(+) to ACT2 AUDIO IN terminals (not polarity sensitive). Connect AMG-1 P4 Terminals 4(-) and 5(+) to RM1/RM-1SA TB4 "IN" terminals (not polarity sensitive) Use of twisted shielded cable is recommended. Two-wire: AA-30/AA-30E P8, Terminals 6 and 5 to ACT-2 "Audio In" terminals (not polarity sensitive). AA-30/AA-30E Terminal 4 (shield) to ACT-2 "S". Optional 4-wire return: ACT-2 "Thru" terminals to AA-30/AA-30E P8, Terminals 3 and 2 (not polarity sensitive). Refer to the XPP-1 in the XP Series Transponder System Manual. Refer to the XPR-8 in the XP Series Transponder System Manual. Power: Term 2 (+), Term 1 (-) Normally Open contacts use Term 4; normally closed contact use Term 5: common use Term 6. Break tabs for Form-C relay. Power: Term 2 (+), Term 1 (-) Normally Open contacts use Term 4; normally closed contact use Term 5: common use Term 6. Break tabs for Form-C relay.
High level Audio Riser
AA-30/AA-30E output to ACT-2 input
Power-limited, 25VRMS, 30 W max., frequency response 800 Hz to 2800 Hz, two-wire circuit must be monitored for integrity at destination equipment (listed amplifiers), four-wire circuit is monitored for integrity at AA-30/AA-30E, 40 ohm maximum wire resistance. 2 amps resistive @ 30 VDC. One amp inductive (0.6 pf) @ 24 VDC. Not supervised. Power limitation is a function of the signal source applied. 2 amps resistive @ 30 VDC. One amp inductive (0.6 pf) @ 24 VDC. Not supervised. Power limitation is a function of the signal source applied. 2 amps resistive @ 30 VDC. One amp inductive (0.6 pf) @ 30 VDC.
XP Transponder XPP-1; Dual Form-C Alarm and Trouble Relays XP Transponder XPR-8: Eight Form-C relays or four Dual Form-C relays.
CMX-1: One Form-C relay Form-C Dry Contacts CMX-2: One Form-C relay
2 amps resistive @ 30 VDC. One amp inductive (0.6 pf) @ 30 VDC. Pilot duty: 0.6 amps @ 30 VDC (0.35pf); 0.3 amps @ 110 VDC (0.35 pf);0.3 amps @ 120 VAC (0.365 pf). 3 A @ 30 VDC, resistive, non-coded. 2 A @ 30 VDC, resistive, coded. 0.9 A, 110 VDC, resistive, non-coded. 0.9 A, 125 VAC, resistive, non-coded. 0.5 A, 30 VDC, inductive (L/R=5ms), coded. 1.0 A, 30 VDC, inductive (L/R=2ms), coded. 0.5A, 125 VAC, inductive (PF=.35), non-coded.
XP5-C Transponder: 5 Form-C relays
TB1-TB5, com, N/O, N/C.
A-6
Appendices
15088:J
10/22/99

Type of Circuit Devices/Ratings LIB-200 Board: Employs intelligent detectors and addressable modules SDX-551,SDX-551TH,SDX-751, FDX551,CPX-551,CPX-751,IPX-751,MMX-1, MMX-2, MMX-101,XP5-M, XP5-C, CMX-1, CMX-2, NBG-12LX, BGX-10L, XPP-1, ISO-X.Ten SLC Loops max per AM2020 system,4 per AFP1010. When more than 100 Isolator Modules/Isolator Bases are connected to an SLC Loop, decrease the 198 address capacity by two addresses for every isolator in excess of 100. LIB-200A/LIB-400 Board: Employs 99 intelligent detectors and 99 addressable modules - SDX-551, SDX551TH, SDX-751, FDX-551, CPX-551, CPX-751, IPX-751, MMX-1, MMX-2, MMX-101, XP5-M, XP5-C, CMX-1, CMX-2, NBG-12LX, BGX-10L, XPP-1, ISO-X. Ten SLC Loops max per AM2020 system, four per AFP1010. When more than 100 Isolator Modules/Isolator Bases are connected to an SLC Loop, decrease the 198 address capacity by two addresses for every isolator in excess of 100. MIB-W: Media Interface Board used to connect nodes with twisted-pair wire Circuit Ratings 24 Volts DC nominal, 27.6 volts DC maximum. Maximum length is 10,000 ft. (3048 m) per channel (NFPA Style 4) or 10,000 ft. (3048 m) total twisted-shielded pair length (NFPA Style 6 and 7). Maximum loop current is 200mA (short circuit) or 100 mA (normal). Maximum loop resistance is 40 ohms. Supervised and powerlimited. Connections NFPA Style 4: LIB-200 Channel A - Term. 1 (+), 3 (-); Channel B - Term. 5 (+), 7 (-). NFPA Style 6, 7: LIB-200 Term. 1, 5 (+); 3,7 (-).
LIB-200 SLC Loop
A circuit or path directly over which multiple signals are transmitted and received.
LIB-200A or LIB-400 SLC Loop A circuit or path directly over which multiple signals are transmitted and received.
24 Volts DC nominal, 27.6 volts DC maximum. Maximum length is 12,500 ft. (3810 m) per channel (NFPA Style 4) or 12,500 ft. (3810 m) total twisted pair length (NFPA Style 6 and 7). Maximum loop current is 200mA (short circuit) or 100 mA (normal). Maximum loop resistance is 50 ohms. Supervised and power-limited.
NFPA Style 4: LIB-200A/LIB400 Channel A - Term. 1 (+), 3 (-); Channel B - Term. 5 (+), 7 (-). NFPA Style 6, 7: LIB-200A/LIB400 Term. 1, 5 (+); 3,7 (-).
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud transmission rate. Refer to the NOTIFIRENET Manual, Document 50257 for distance limits. NFPA Style 4 (Class B). Fiber Type: 62.5/125 micrometers. Wavelength: 820 nanometers. Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB. 312.5 Kbaud transmission rate NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud transmission rate. Port A - refer to the NOTIFIRENET manual, Document 50257 for distance limits. Port B - Fiber Type: 62.5/125 micrometers, Wavelength: 820 nanometers, Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB. NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud transmission rate. Refer to the NOTIFIRENET Manual, Document 50257 for distance limits.
Port A - TB1 - 1 and 2 Port B - TB1 - 3 and 4 Port A - U1 (Tx), U5 (Rx) Port B - U2 (Tx), U3 (Rx)
MIB-F: Media Interface Board used to connect nodes with fiber-optic cable
NOTIFIRENET SLC
MIB-WF: Media Interface Board used to connect from twisted-pair wire to fiber or fiber to twisted-pair wire at any network node.
Port A (wire) - TB1 - 1 and 2 Port B (fiber) - U2 (Tx), U3 (Rx)
RPT-W: Repeater used to boost the data signal between network nodes supporting twisted-pair wire only. A series of modules and products which allow a group of Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACPs) and other control equipment to connect, forming a true peer-topeer network
Port A: TB1- 1 and 2 Port B: TB1- 3 and 4
RPT-F: Repeater used to boost the data signal between network nodes supportingh fiber-optic cable
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). Fiber Type: 62.5/125 micrometers. Wavelength: 820 nanometers. Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB. 312.5 Kbaud transmission rate NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud transmission rate. Port A - refer to the NOTIFIRENET manual, Document 50257 for distance limits. Port B - Fiber Type: 62.5/125 micrometers, Wavelength: 820 nanometers, Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB.
Port A: U14 (Tx), U11 (RX) Port B: U15 (Tx), U12 (RX)
RPT-WF: Repeater used to boost the data signal between network nodes supporting both twisted-pair wire and fiber-optic cable
Port A (wire) TB1- 1 and 2 Port B (fiber) U15 (Tx), U12 (RX)
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud NAM-232W: Network Adapter Module transmission rate. Refer to the NOTIFIRENET functioning as an interface between the Manual, Document 50257 for distance limits. AFP200 FACP and the NOTIFIRENET with twisted-pair wire NFPA Style 4 (Class B). Fiber Type: 62.5/125 NAM232F: Network Adapter Module micrometers. Wavelength: 820 nanometers. functioning as an interface between the Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB. 312.5 Kbaud AFP200 FACP and the NOTIFIRENET transmission rate with fiber-optic cable
PortA: TB2 - 1 and 2 Port B: TB2 - 3 and 4
Port A: J2 (Tx), J1 (RX) Port B: J4 (Tx), J3 (RX)
A-7

Type of Circuit Polarity Reversal Devices/Ratings CMX Control Module (two required) with an RPT-680 Reverse Polarity Trip device: Circuit Ratings Supervised/power-limited. Maximum distance and line impedance limited by Receiving Unit Ratings. Connections See Chapter One of the AM2020/AFP1010 Manual, Supervising an Uninterruptable Power Supply. See the XP Transponder Manual.
For connection to a polarity reversal circuit of a remote station receiving unit
XP Transponder XPP-1 module with two RPT-680 Reverse Polarity Trip devices SIB-2048A and SIB-NET Serial Interface Board: Employs AMG-1 Audio Message Generator and annunciator modules - ACM-16AT (AEM-16AT), ACM-32A (AEM-32A). SIB-2048A and SIB-NET Serial Interface Boards: Employs CRT-2
Supervised/power-limited. Maximum distance and line impedance limited by Receiving Unit Ratings.
+/- 5 volts peak-to-peak. Supervised and See Chapter One, Figures 5.1-2 and power-limited. 6000 ft. (1828.8 m) max 5.4-1 of the AM2020/AFP1010 Manual distance. Terminating resistor = 120 ohms, 1/4watt (Part # 71244). Characteristic impedance of the wiring is 120 ohms.Transmission rate = 20.833 Kbps +/- 12 volts peak-to-peak. Supervised and power-limited. Max distance limited by capacitance of wire (refer to EIA-232E Standard). Transmission rate of 2400 bps. +/- 12 volts peak-to-peak. Power-limited but not supervised. Max distance limited by capacitance of wire (refer to EIA-232E Standard). Transmission rate of 2400 bps. +/- 12 volts peak-to-peak. Power-limited but not supervised. Max distance limited by capacitance of wire (refer to EIA-232E Standard). Transmission rate of 2400 bps ELR = 47K, 1/2, Part # A2143-20 (N-ELR in Canada). NFPA Style B or Style D field wiring. 20 ohms max loop resistance. Supervised and power-limited (210 uA). ELR = 47K, 1/2, Part # A2143-20 (N-ELR in Canada). NFPA Style B or Style D field wiring. 20 ohms max loop resistance. Supervised and power-limited (210 uA). 24 VDC (nominal), 200mV ripple. ELR = 2.2K, 1/2 watt, Part #R-2.2K (N-ELR in Canada). NFPA Style B or Style D field wiring. 100 ohms max loop resistance. Supervised and power-limited (50 uA). See Notifier Device Compatibility Document, 15378, for a list of compatible 2-wire detectors. 24 VDC. ELR=10K, 1/2 watt, Part # R-10K (NELR in Canada). NFPA Style B field wiring. 1000 ohms max loop resistance. Supervised and power-limited. 24VDC Input 12-18 AWG (3.25-0.75 mm). See Document M500-03-00 for limits. Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the 24 VDC source. See Chapter One, Figures 5.1-2 and 5.2-1 of the AM2020/AFP1010 Manual. See Chapter One, Figures 5.1-2, 5.31, and 5.3-2 of the AM2020/AFP1010 Manual. See Chapter One, Figure 5.1-2 of the AM2020/AFP1010 Manual.
EIA-485 Interface and EIA-232 Interface
SIB-2048A and SIB-NET Serial Interface Boards: Employs PRN-4, PRN-5, and Keltron 40-column printers. SIB-2048A and SIB-NET Serial Interface Boards: Employs UL EDP listed equipment (display monitors and printers). MMX-1 Monitor Module: Employs contact-type devices only - manual pull stations, heat detectors, supervisory or waterflow switches, and 4-wire smoke detectors. MMX-101 Monitor Module: Employs contact-type devices only - manual pull stations, heat detectors, supervisory or waterflow switches, and 4-wire smoke detectors. XP Transponder XPM-8 module: Employs 2-wire smoke detectors and contact-type devices - manual pull stations, heat detectors, supervisory or waterflow switches, and 4-wire smoke detectors. XP Transponder XPM-8L module: Employs dry-contact type devices only - manual pull stations, heat detectors, supervisory or waterflow switches, and 4-wire smoke detectors.
NFPA Style B: MMX-1 Terminals 7 (+), 6 (-) NFPA Style D: MMX-1 Terminals 7,8 (+), 6,9 (-)
NFPA Style B: MMX-101 Red Wire (+), White Wire (-)
NFPA Style B (8 zones on XPM-8 P2): NFPA Style D (4 zones on XPM-8 P2):.
Initiating Device Circuit A circuit to which automatic or manual signal-initiating devices are connected where the signal received does not identify the individual device being operated.
NFPA Style B (8 zones on XPM-8L P2)
MMX-2 Terminal 3(-) and 4(+)
MMX-2 Monitor Module: Maximum of 40 MMX-2 modules per LIB. Employs 2-wire smoke detectors.
NFPA Style B or D Initiating Device Circuit 1218 AWG (3.25-0.75 mm) 25 ohms max (including 24VDC input wiring above). Supervised and power limited (90mA). 3.9K, 1/2 W end-of-line resistor required at terminals 8 and 9 for NFPA Style D operation. See Document M500-03-00 for additional limits. See Notifier Device Compatibility Document for a list of compatible 2-wire detectors. ELR Model R-47K, 1/2 watt (N-ELR in Canada) NFPA Style B field wiring. 1200 ohms max loop resistance. Supervised and power-limited. Normal 1.7 mA, activated 3.0 mA.
NFPA Style B MMX-2 Terminal 6(-) and 7(+) NFPA Style D MMX-2 Terminals 6,9(-) and 7, 8(+)
XP5-M Transponder monitors 5 drycontact type Class B initiating device circuits, (manual pull stations, heat detectors, four-wire smoke detectors, etc.)
NFPA Style B, TB1-TB5: B-, B+
A-8
Appendices
15088:J
10/22/99
APPENDIX B LISTED EQUIPMENT

SECTION B.1 UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES
Equipment listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) as compatible with the AM2020/AFP1010:
Notifier
A2143-00 47K ELR, 1/2 watt resistor AA-30/AA-30E 30-Watt Audio Amplifier AA-100/AA-100E 100-Watt Audio Amplifier AA-120/AA-120E 120-Watt Audio Amplifier ABF-1 Annunciator Flush Box ABF-1D Annunciator Flush Box ABF-2 Annunciator Flush Box ABF-2D Annunciator Flush Box ABF-4 Annunciator Flush Box ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank ABS-1T Annunciator Surface Box ABS-2 Annunciator Surface Box ABS-8R Surface Box for ACM-8R or UDACT ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module ACT-1 Audio Coupling Transformer ACT-2 Audio Coupling Transformer ADP-4 Annunciator Dress Panel AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module AKS-1 Annunciator Key Switch AMG-1 Audio Message Generator AMG-E Audio Message Generator APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply ATG-2 Audio Tone Generator AVPS-24 Audio Visual Power Supply B224RB Intelligent Relay Base B224BI Intelligent Isolator Base B501 Flangeless Detector Base B501BH Sounder Base B524BI Isolator Base B524RB Relay Base B710 LP Standard Low ProfileDetector Base BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station BP-3 Battery Dress Panel BX-501 Base for all Intelligent Detectors/Sensors CCM-1 Communication Converter Module CHG-120 Battery Charger CHS-4 Chassis CHS-4L Chassis CMX-1 Addressable Control Module CMX-2 Addressable Control Module CPU-2 Central Processing Unit CPU-2020 Central Processing Unit CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector CPX-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector CRT-2 Video Display Monitor with Keyboard DIA-1010 Display Interface Assembly DIA-2020 Display Interface Assembly DP-1 Dress Panel DPDW-1 Double Well Dress Panel DPSW-1 Single Well Dress Panel DR-A3 A-size Door DR-B3 B-size Door DR-C3 C-size Door DR-D3 D-size Door ELR-10K Resistor FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor FDX-551R Intelligent Thermal Sensor FFT-7 Fire Fighters Telephone FFT-7S Fire Fighters Telephone FHS Fireman's Handset FPJ Fireman's Phone Jack ICA-4 and ICA-4L Interconnect Assemblies INA Intelligent Network Annunciator IPX-751 Combination Ionization/Photoelectric/ Thermal Detector
15088:J 10/22/99
Appendices
ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module L20-300-BX Enclosure; recessed mount L20-310-BX Enclosure; surface mount LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module LCD-80TM Liquid Crystal Display LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module LIB-200 Loop Interface Board LIB-200A Loop Interface Board LIB-400 Loop Interface Board MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip device MIB-F Media Interface Board for NotiFireNet MIB-W Media Interface Board for NotiFireNet MIB-WF Media Interface Board for NotiFireNet MMX-1 Addressable Monitor Module MMX-2 Addressable Monitor Module MMX-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module MON-17 17-inch Monitor MON-19 19-inch Monitor MON-21 21-inch Monitor MPM-2 Main Power Meter-2 MPS-24A/MPS-24AE Main Power Supply MPS-TR Trouble Relay N-ELR Assortment Pack with Mounting Plate NBG-12LX Addressable Pull Station NIB-96 Network Interface Board NR45-24/NR45-24E Remote Battery Charger NRT-586T Network Reporting Terminal PRN-4 80-Column Printer PRN-5 Printer PS-12250 Battery 12-volt, 25 amp-hour R-10K 10K End-of-Line Resistor, 1/2 watt R-120 120 Ohm End-of-Line Resistor R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor R-27K 27K End-of-Line Resistor R-470K 470K End-of-Line Resistor R-47K 47K End-of-Line Resistor RM-1 Remote Microphone RM-1SA Remote Microphone RPJ-1 Fireman's Phone Jack RPT-485F EIA-485 Repeater - Fiber RPT-485W EIA-485 Repeater - Wire RPT-485WF EIA-485 Repeater - Wire/Fiber RPT-W Repeater for NotiFireNet RPT-WF Repeater for NotiFireNet SBB-A3 A-size Backbox SBB-B3 B-size Backbox SBB-C3 C-size Backbox SBB-D3 D-size Backbox SCS Series Smoke Contol Station SDX-551 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SDX-551TH Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SDX-751 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SIB-2048 Serial Interface Board SIB-2048A Serial Interface Board SIB-232 Serial Interface Board SIB-NET Serial Interface Board for NotiFireNet STS-1 Security Tamper Switch TPI-232 Modem XP5-C Transponder Output Module XP5-M Transponder Input Module XPC-8 Transponder Control Module XPDP Transponder Dress Panel XPM-8 Transponder Monitor Module XPM-8L Transponder Monitor Module XPP-1 Transponder Processor XPR-8 Transponder Relay Module Refer to the Device Compatibility Document 15378 for additional compatible equipment.
B-1
SECTION B.2 FACTORY MUTUAL

Equipment suitable for use in Factory Mutual (FM) Systems as compatible with the AM2020/AFP1010:
ABF-1 Annunciator Flush Box ABF-2 Annunciator Flush Box ABF-4 Annunciator Flush Box ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank ABS-1T Annunciator Surface Box ABS-2 Annunciator Surface Box ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module ADP-4 Annunciator Dress Panel AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module AKS-1 Annunciator Key Switch AVPS-24 Audio/Visual Power Supply BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station BP-3 Battery Dress Panel CHS-4 Chassis CHS-4L Chassis CMX-1 Addressable Control Module CMX-2 Addressable Control Module CPU-2 Central Processing Unit CPU-2020 Central Processing Unit CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector CRT-2 Video Display Monitor with Keyboard DIA-1010 Display Interface Assembly DIA-2020 Display Interface Assembly DP-1 Dress Panel DR-A3 A-size Door DR-B3 B-size Door DR-C3 C-size Door DR-D3 D-size Door FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor ICA-4 and ICA-4L Interconnect Assemblies ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module LIB-200 Loop Interface Board MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip device MMX-1 Addressable Monitor Module MMX-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module MPM-2 Main Power Meter-2 MPS-24A Main Power Supply MPS-TR Trouble Relay NIB-96 Network Interface Board PRN-4 Printer PS-12250 Battery 12-volt, 25 amp-hour R-120 120 Ohm End-of-Line Resistor R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor R-27K 27K End-of-Line Resistor R-470K 470K End-of-Line Resistor R-47K 47K End-of-Line Resistor REL-47K EOL for Releasing Service SBB-A3 A-size Backbox SBB-B3 B-size Backbox SBB-C3 C-size Backbox SBB-D3 D-size Backbox SDX-551 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SDX-551TH Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SIB-2048 Serial Interface Board SIB-232 Serial Interface Board
System Sensor
A77-716B EOL Power Supervision Relay MA-24 Electronic Sounder, 24 VDC MA/SS-24I Electronic Sounder/Strobe, 24 VDC SS-24 Strobe, 24 VDC
Wheelock
7002T-24 Horn with strobe, 24 VDC
B-2
Appendices
15088:J 10/22/99
SECTION B.3 LLOYD'S REGISTER

Equipment listed by Lloyd's Register as compatible with the AM2020/AFP1010:
AA-30 Audio Amplifier AA-120 Audio Amplifier ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module ADP-4 Annunciator Dress Panel AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module AMG-1 Audio Message Generator AVPS-24 Audio/Visual Power Supply B501 Flangeless Base BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station BP-3 Battery Dress Panel CAB-AM Cabinet for Marine Applications CAB-BM Cabinet for Marine Applications CHS-4L Chassis CMX-1 Addressable Control Module CMX-2 Addressable Control Module CPU-2 Central Processing Unit CPU-2020 Central Processing Unit CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector CPX-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector DIA-1010 Display Interface Assembly DIA-2020 Display Interface Assembly ET-1010-R Speaker FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor ICA-4L Interconnect Assemblies ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module LIB Loop Interface Board MMX-1 Addressable Monitor Module MMX-2 Addressable Monitor Module MPS-24A Main Power Supply MPS-TR Trouble Relay NIB-96 Network Interface Board PS-12250 Battery 12-volt, 25 amp-hour R-120 120 Ohm End-of-Line Resistor R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor R-27K 27K End-of-Line Resistor R-470K 470K End-of-Line Resistor R-47K 47K End-of-Line Resistor SB-10 Surface Backbox SMB-500 Surface Mount Box SBB-B3 B-size Backbox SDX-551 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SDX-751 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SIB-2048 Serial Interface Board XPC-8 Transponder Control Module XPM-8 Transponder Monitor Module XPP-1 Transponder Processor
System Sensor
MA/SS-24D Electronic Sounder/Strobe, 24 VDC
Appendices
15088:J 10/22/99
B-3
SECTION B.4 UNITED STATES COAST GUARD

Equipment suitable for use in marine and shipyard applications as compatible with the AM2020/AFP1010:
AA-120 120-Watt Audio Amplifier AA-30 30-Watt Audio Amplifier ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module ACT-1 Audio Coupling Transformer AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module AMG-1 Audio Message Generator AMG-E Audio Message Generator ATG-2 Audio Tone Generator AVPS-24 Audio/Visual Power Supply BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station BP-3 Battery Dress Panel BX-501 Base for all Intelligent Detectors/Sensors CAB-AM Cabinet for Marine Applications CAB-BM Cabinet for Marine Applications CHS-4 Chassis CMX-1 Addressable Control Module CMX-2 Addressable Control Module CPU-2020 Central Processing Unit CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector CPX-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector CRT-2 Video Display Monitor with Keyboard DIA-1010 Display Interface Assembly DIA-2020 Display Interface Assembly DP-1 Dress Panel FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor ICA-4 and ICA-4L Interconnect Assemblies ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module L20-300-BX Enclosure; recessed mount L20-310-BX Enclosure; surface mount LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module LIB-200 Loop Interface Board MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip device MMX-2 Addressable Monitor Module MMX-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module MPM-2 Main Power Meter-2 MPS-24A Main Power Supply MPS-TR Trouble Relay N-ELR Assortment Pack with Mounting Plate NIB-96 Network Interface Board PRN-4 Printer PS-12250 Battery 12-volt, 25 amp-hour R-120 120 Ohm End-of-Line Resistor R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor R-27K 27K End-of-Line Resistor R-470K 470K End-of-Line Resistor R-47K 47K End-of-Line Resistor SBB-A3 A-size Backbox SBB-B3 B-size Backbox SBB-C3 C-size Backbox SBB-D3 D-size Backbox SDX-551 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SDX-751 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector SIB-2048 Serial Interface Board SIB-232 Serial Interface Board XPC-8 Transponder Control Module XPDP Transponder Dress Panel XPM-8 Transponder Monitor Module XPM-8L Transponder Monitor Module XPP-1 Transponder Processor XPR-8 Transponder Relay Module
System Sensor
A2143-00 End-of-Line Resistor Assembly A77-716B EOL Power Supervision Relay MA-24 Electronic Sounder, 24 VDC MA/SS-24I Electronic Sounder/Strobe, 24 VDC RA400Z Remote LED Assembly SS-24 Strobe, 24 VDC
B-4
Appendices
15088:J 10/22/99
SECTION B.5 OPTIONAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Following is a list of optional equipment which may be used with the Notifier AM2020/AFP1010:
Annunciators ACM-16AT, AEM-16AT, ABM-16AT ACM-32A, AEM-32A, ABM-32A LDM-32, LDM-E32, LDM-R32 LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display ACM-8R, UDACT APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply CPU to APS-6R Cable (71033/75098) Cabinets CAB-A3, B3, C3, D3 (backbox and door) CCM-1 Communication Converter Module1 CHG-120 Remote Battery Charger CHS-4 Chassis CHS-6 Chassis CRT Terminal DP-1 Dress Panel ICA-4/ICA-4L Interconnect Chassis Assemblies LIB-200 Loop Interface Board * LIB-200A Loop Interface Board* LIB-400 Loop Interface Board* MPM-2 Voltmeter and Ammeter MPS-24A/MPS-24AE Main Power Supply * Battery Connector Cables: Pos. (71071), Neg. (71072), Interconnect (71070). MPS-TR Power Supply Remote Trouble Relay NIB-96 Network Interface Board PRN-4 Printer PRN-5 Printer RKS-S Security Switch SCS-8/SCE-8, SCS-8L/SCE-8L Smoke Control System SIB-NET or SIB-2048A Serial Interface Board* DIB to SIB Cable (71046) SLC Loop Addressable Modules: Addressable MMX-1, MMX-2, MMX-101 Monitor Modules Addressable CMX-2 Control Module ISO-X Loop Isolator Module NBG-12LX Addressable Pull Station BGX-101L Addressable Pull Station SMB-500 Surface Mount box for Control and Monitor Modules XP5-C Control/Relay Transponder XP5-M Monitor Transponder NOTIFIRENET 1 SIB-NET Serial Interface Board MIB-W Media Interface Board MIB-WF Media Interface Board MIB-F Media Interface Board RPT-W Repeater RPT-WF Repeater NRT-586 Network Reporting Terminal INA Intelligent Network Annunciator MON-20 20-Inch Monitor MON-17 17-Inch Monitor SLC Loop Intelligent Detectors: SDX-551, SDX-551B Photoelectric Detector SDX-751 Low Profile Photoelectric Detector SDX-551TH Photoelectric Detector with Fixed Thermal Element CPX-551 Ionization Detector CPX-751 Low Profile Ionization Detector FDX-551 Thermal (heat) Detector FDX-551R Thermal (heat) with Rate-of-Rise IPX-751 Combination Ionization/Photoelectric/Thermal Detector SMK400 Surface Mount Kit for Flangeless Base B501 Flangeless Base for Intelligent Detectors B501BH Flangeless Intelligent Detector Base w/ Sounder
B601BH Sounder for Flangeless Base B710LP Low Profile Flanged Base BX-501 Standard Base for Intelligent Detectors DHX-501 Addressable Duct Housing with Relay DHX-502 Addressable Duct Housing F110 Retrofit replacement flange for B501B SMB-600 Surface Mount box for Detectors and Sounder Bases B224BI Isolator Base B224RB Relay Base B524BI Isolator Base B524RB Relay Base UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder (refer to the UZC-256 Manual) Voice Alarm Multiplex Equipment (Refer to the VAM-2020 Manual) Audio Message Generators (AMG-1 or AMG-E) Audio Tone Generator (ATG-2) Fire Fighter's Telephones (FFT-7 or FFT-7S) Telephone Control Center (TCC-1) Audio Amplifiers (AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-100E and AA120/AA-120E) Low-Profile Chassis (CHS-4L) ACT-1 Audio Coupling Transformer ACT-2 Audio Coupling Transformer RM-1 Remote Microphone RM-1SA Remote Microphone VP-2 Dress Panel for upper 2" of Cab-3 series cabinets XP Transponder Series (Refer to the XP Transponder Installation Manual) XPP-1 Processor Module XPM-8 Initiating Circuit Module XPM-8L Initiating Circuit Module XPC-8 Notification Appliance Circuit Module XPR-8 Relay Module XRAM-1 Non-Volatile Memory XPDP Transponder Dress Plate Miscellaneous: A77-716B Power Supervision Relay RA400Z Remote LED Annunciator A2143-20 End-Of-Line Resistor Assembly MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip Device N-ELR Mounting Plate NCM-1 Noise Control Module CAP-1 0.1uF 500V Capacitor WC-2 Wire Channel CAB-AM/BM: Cabinets for Marine Applications PL-AM/BM: Mounting Plates for Marine Cabinets MA/SS Series Strobe Spectralert Series Horns, Strobes, Horn/Strobes ET-1010-R Speaker TPI-232 Modem
* Assembly includes Grounding Cable (71073) 1 Software must be compatible. Contact the Factory.
B-5
SECTION B-6 CITY OF NEW YORK

The equipment or material acceptable for use in accordance with the Report of Materials and Equipment Acceptance (MEA) Division be accepted under the following conditions: a. When used with central office communicator or transmitter, the installation and operation of the equipment and devices listed herein shall comply with Fire Department rule #3-RCNY 17-01, NFPA 72, and shall have the capability of transmitting separate and distinct signals to indicate manual pull station alarm, sprinkler waterflow alarm, supervisory signal indications and trouble indications. b. LCD-80TM which can be remotely located up to 3000 feet from the control panel has a remote acknowledge, silence, and reset features which can affect the control panel from remote locations. These features are not to be employed in any installation in New York City. Smoke Control station and expander (SCS-8 and SCE-8) are to be used in conjunction only with Notifier models AM2020/AFP1010 fire alarm control panels when configured for smoke control. The SCS-8 must be mounted in a separately listed model CAB-3 or ABS-4D enclosure which provides mounting for the SCS-8 and limited access to the manual override switches. These smoke controls shall be arranged such that controls may only be operated by use of or given access to by means of a fire department 1620 key.
c.
d. AM2020/AFP1010 control panels shall provide either redundant processors or Class A redundant SLC loops as needed to positively assure the fail safe control of door locks, ventilation fans, elevator recall and evacuation signalling which will not be rendered inoperable in the event of a fire alarm condition when installed in any building which is required by code to have a Fire Command Station. f. HVAC systems shall not be arranged to automatically restart upon the reset of a smoke detector or control board.
g. The AM2020/AFP1010 is intended to be used as a Central Station Protected Premise Unit, it is to be connected to a listed Ademco Model 678UL-F which in turn is connected to a Listed Ademco Model 685 receiver. h. To provide service as a central station protected premises unit utilizing digital alarm communication techniques, the AM2020/AFP1010/ control unit is intended to be interconnected to a Listed FireLite Model Notifier 911C/911AC digital alarm communicator transmitter or employ the listed FireLite Model Notifier 911/911A subassembly. i. The control units (AM2020/AFP1010/) may also be connected to the separately listed model UDACT to provide remote station or central station service. When the AM2020 control panel is intended for use as a proprietary receiving unit, the system must utilize the CRT-1 terminal keyboard and Models P-80, PRN-2, PRN-3, or PRN-4 printers as the operators terminal station. Both the CRT-1 and Model P-80, PRN-2, PRN-3, or PRN-4 must be located next to the AM2020 control unit. The LCD-80TM remote annunciator shall only be used with the AM2020, AFP1010, and AFP-200 control units.
j.
k.
All shipments and deliveries of such equipment shall be provided with a metal tag suitably placed, certifying that the equipment shipped or delivered is equivalent to that tested and accepted for use, as provided for in Section 27-131 of the Building Code.
B-6
Appendices
15088:J 10/22/99
AM2020 AFP1010
PROGRAMMING SHEETS & GLOSSARY
System Inputs
Address (LxxDyy) or (LxxMyy) Model Type I.D. Control-by-Event List Alphanumeric Label (20 Characters Max) Alarm Det. Day/Night Annunciator Tracking Verify Sens. Det.Sens. Mapping (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (L/M/H) (Yes/No) (AxxPyy)
Job Name: __________________________________ Sheet ___ of ___ Job Takeoff Form: Completed by: _______________________________ Date: _________ Engineer: _______________________________________
G-2
Programming Sheets & Glossary 15088:J 10/22/99
System Outputs
Address (LxxMyy) Model Type I.D. Control-by-Event Equation Signal Walk Annunciator Alphanumeric Label Silence Test Mapping (20 Characters Max) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (AxxPyy)
Job Name: __________________________________ Sheet ___ of ___ Completed by: _______________________________ Date: _________ Engineer: _______________________________________
Job Takeoff Form:
G-3
System Softw are Zones

Address (Zxxx) Type I.D. Control-by-Event Cooperative Control-by-Event Alphanumeric Label (20 Characters Max) Annunciator Mapping (AxxPyy) Notes
Job Name: ______________________________________ Sheet ___ of ___ Completed by: ____________________________________ Date: _________ Engineer: _______________________________________
Job Takeoff Form:
G-4
System Annunciator Points

Address (AxxPyy) Model Type I.D . Alphanumeric Label (20 C haracters Max) N otes
Job Name: __________________________________ Sheet ___ of ___ Job Takeoff Form: C ompleted by: _______________________________ D ate: _________ Engi neer: _______________________________________
G-5
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations

Alarm Verification - A method of reducing false alarms incorporating time delays up to 50 seconds in length. APS-6R - Auxiliary Power Supply. Used to supply filtered, non-resettable power to compatible devices. Central Station - Main AM2020/AFP1010 panel and any associated annunciators and printers. Control-by-Event (CBE) Programming - A method of providing a variety of output responses based on various initiating conditions (events). Cooperative Control-by-Event (CCBE) Programming - A method of providing a variety of output responses on the NOTIFIRENET network based on various initiating conditions. Day/Night Sensitivity - A way to force intelligent detectors into high or low sensitivity using the High and/or Low Sensitivity Zones. Detector Sensitivity - The responsiveness of a detector to stimuli associated with fire (i.e. smoke, heat). DIA - Display Interface Assembly (keypad, system status LEDs and the 80-character LCD). Display Abbreviations: ACK AL ACK TB ACL AL ACL TB ADDR APM BC BCAP BLN BSBY BTYP CLR AL CLR TB CMR CUT DBID DFT DPZ DVTCNTR ERM HIZNDET ISIB LEDL LMC Acknowledged Alarm Acknowledged Trouble Acknowledged Clear Alarm Acknowledged Clear Trouble ISIB NOTIFIRENET Address Auxiliary Printer Monitoring Bidirectional Copy Battery Capacity Device Blink Battery Standby Time Battery Type Clear Alarm Clear Trouble Control Module Reporting Signal Cutout Database Identification Drift Compensation Disabled Piezo Detector Verification Trouble Counter Limit Event Reminder High Zone Day/Night Sensitivity Intelligent Serial Interface Board LEDs latched on activated devices Local Mode Control Module Address LMD LMM LOZNDET MDM MIBA MIBB NAM NAR PAL PEC PGR PORTS PTI RP RPT SER SIL SL SUP TS UDACT UPDN VER XINT Local Mode Intelligent Detector Address Local Mode Monitor Module Address Low Zone Day/Night Sensitivity TPI-232 MIB-W/WF Threshold Channel A MIB-W Threshold Channel B NAM-232 Non-Alarm Monitor Module Reporting Pre-Alarm Printer Error Continue (transmit) PAGE-1 MIB Data Port Usage Primary Printer Trouble Inhibit Rapid Polling Reports Redirected to CRT Security Monitor Module Reporting Signal Silence Inhibit Status Line (CRT Terminal) Supervisory ACS Reporting Terminal Supervision Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter Upload/Download Alarm Verification External Interface
Download - To retrieve the system configuration program data from a file on an IBM PC (personal computer) and store it permanently in the AM2020/AFP1010 system. Drift Compensation - An algorithm which permits the maintenance of a constant smoke detector sensitivity by accounting for environmental contaminants and other factors.
G-6
Entry/Exit Time - A short delay in alarm reporting from the entry/exit door that allows authorized personnel to enter the building through the entry/exit door and disarm the system or exit the building after arming the system without setting off the alarm. (Arm/disarm applications only). External Interface - EIA-485 bidirectional serial port used for Upload/Download. Forward Zone - A software zone which once activated by an input device or other forward zone may in turn activate other zones and/or output devices directly. Zones and output devices activated by a forward zone are contained in the forward zone control-by-event list. Group Interface - Monitor module with Type ID SARM wired to a control module with TYPE ID CMXC that reports alarms from a protected premise. ISIB - Intelligent Serial Interface Board. Used for communication with ACS Annunciators (SIB-2048A, SIB-NET). LIB-200, LIB-200A, and LIB-400 - Loop Interface Board. The electronics powering and communicating with each SLC Loop. Local Mode - The independent operation of a LIB board when CPU to LIB communications fail. Three cutoff addresses are programmed by the user into system memory for local mode operation (one address for intelligent detectors, one for monitor modules, and one for control modules). If communications between a LIB and the CPU board break down, local mode will perform the following function: If an alarm occurs on a detector or a monitor module at or below their respective cutoff addresses for that type of device, the LIB will automatically activate all control modules at and below the control module cutoff address. Refer to Extended Local Mode Operation in Chapter Three of this manual. Local Mode General Alarm Bus - The LIB-200A and the LIB-400 incorporate local mode operation. In addition, when installed in an ICA-4L chassis, an alarm detected on any LIB-200A or LIB-400 will cause the other LIB-200A and LIB-400 boards to automatically activate all control modules at and below the control module cutoff address. Refer to Extended Local Mode Operation in Chapter Three of this manual. Point - The occupation of a system memory address by an addressable SLC Loop device, software zone or annunciator point. Protected Premises Unit - A remote AM2020/AFP1010 panel located inside the protected premises and reporting back to the central station via a NIB-96. Protected Premise - An area in a building monitored by either a security area monitor or a group interface and reporting to the central station or PPU as a Security Alarm trouble report. Reverse Zone - A software zone which if not activated directly by an input device or forward zone may be activated through an associated control-by-event equation. A reverse zone may be referenced in other control-byevent equations. Reverse zones on a NOTIFIRENET system may also contain cooperative control-by-event equations. Ringback - An indication from the central station to the protected premises indicating whether the system is armed. Can be at an annunciator or a PPU (if used). (Arm/disarm applications only.) Security Access Monitor - Monitor module on the SLC programmed with software Type ID SACM and monitoring various security devices in a security supervisory protected area. When activated, it generates a Security Alert. Security Area Monitor - Monitor module on the SLC programmed with software Type ID SARM and monitoring various security devices in a security supervisory protected area or protected premise. When activated, it generates a Security Alarm. Signal Cutout- -A feature of the system which causes the signal silence function to activate automatically after a programmed time period following a fire alarm. This option has a resolution of eight seconds.
G-7
Security Supervisory Circuits - Circuit connecting various security devices to the security area monitor or security access monitor. Security Supervisory Protected Area - An area in a building monitored by security access monitor and reporting to the central station or PPU as a Security Alert trouble report. Signal Silence - A function which causes participating fire alarm activated notification appliances or other outputs to deactivate without otherwise affecting the state of the system. Signal Silence Inhibit - A feature of the system which blocks the signal silence function for a programmed time period immediately after a fire alarm. SLC Loop - Signaling Line Circuit. The physical connection along which addressable devices and equipment may communicate. Software Zone - A label internal to the system which may be assigned to addressable devices to form a group. Tracking - Attribute of an input device which prevents the latching of active (i.e. alarm, supervisory) states. Upload - To make a copy of the AM2020/AFP1010 system configuration program data and store it in a file on an IBM compatible PC (personal computer). Zone Boundary - The highest forward activated software zone in the system. This represents the division between forward and reverse activated zones/devices.
G-8
Limited Warranty
The manufacturer warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for eighteen (18) months from the date of manufacture, under normal use and service. Products are date-stamped at time of manufacture. The sole and exclusive obligation of the manufacturer is to repair or replace, at its option, free of charge for parts and labor, any part which is defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service. For products not under the manufacturer's date-stamp control, the warranty is eighteen (18) months from date of original purchase by the manufacturer's distributor unless the installation instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. This warranty is void if the product is altered, repaired, or serviced by anyone other than the manufacturer or its authorized distributors, or if there is a failure to maintain the products and systems in which they operate in a proper and workable manner. In case of defect, secure a Return Material Authorization form from our customer service department. Return product, transportation prepaid, to the manufacturer. This writing constitutes the only warranty made by this manufacturer with respect to its products. The manufacturer does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise, or that its products will in all cases provide the protection for which they are installed or intended. Buyer acknowledges that the manufacturer is not an insurer and assumes no risk for loss or damages or the cost of any inconvenience, transportation, damage, misuse, abuse, accident, or similar incident. THE MANUFACTURER GIVES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR OTHERWISE WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE MANUFACTURER BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY, DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE THE MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCTS. FURTHERMORE, THE MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL, OR INDUSTRIAL USE OF ITS PRODUCTS. This warranty replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by the manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty is authorized.
LimWarLg.p65
01/10/2000
World Headquarters One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472-1653 USA 203-484-7161 Fax 203-484-7118 Programming Sheets & Glossary 15088:J G-10 www.notifier.com Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
10/22/99

AM2020-AFP1010 Installation Programming Operating

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AM2020-AFP1010 Installation Programming Operating

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AM2020-AFP1010 Installation Programming Operating

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fire Alarm Control Panel

Document 15088 10/22/99 Rev:

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Fire Alarm System Limitations

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter One Installation

Installation Overview ............................................................................ 1-5

Cabinets ................................................................................................ 1-7

Section Three Power Supplies ................................................................................... 1-33

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

CHAPTER ONE INSTALLATION (CONTINUED)

Signaling ............................................................................................. 1-51

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

CHAPTER ONE INSTALLATION (CONTINUED)

Serial Communications ...................................................................... 1-83

Standard-Specific Requirements ...................................................... 1-92

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Chapter Two Operation

Prior/Next/Auto Step .......................................................................... 2-17

Section Three Special Function ................................................................................. 2-18

Fire Alarms ......................................................................................... 2-22

Troubles .............................................................................................. 2-24

Remote Peripherals ............................................................................ 2-29

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Chapter Three Programming

Main Programming ............................................................................... 3-7

Section Two The Alter Status Menu ........................................................................... 3-43

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section Three Software Type I.D.s ............................................................................. 3-52 Section Four

Control-by-Event Programming ........................................................ 3-59

Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation .............................................................. 3-72

CHAPTER FOUR SECURITY

Installing and Programming Combination Fire/Security FireAlarm Systems ...... 4-3

Circuit/Device Ratings ........................................................................ A-3

Listed Equipment ................................................................................ B-1

PROGRAMMING SHEETS & GLOSSARY

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:J 10/22/99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Installation 15088: J 10/22/99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Capabilities and Capacities

Installation 15088: J 10/22/99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Fire Alarm and Related Service Standards

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section One Installation Overview

Section 1.2 Related Documentation

Installation 15088: J 10/22/99

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Table 1.2-1 Related Documentation

Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com

Section Two Cabinet Selection and Component Installation

Installation 15088: J 10/22/99